Mercedes-Benz 2003 clk-class cabriolet Operator`s manual

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG
2
0
9
5
8
4
9
8
9
6
Order No. 6515 1326 13 Part No. 209 584 98 96 USA Edition A 2008
CLK-Class
Operator’s Manual
CLK-Class
CLK 350
CLK 550
CLK 63 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your
desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
앫
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and
occupants.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 12
Operating your vehicle
outside the USA or Canada ............ 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting safety defects ................ 18
Vehicle data recording......................... 19
Information regarding electronic
recording devices........................... 19
At a glance .......................................... 21
Exterior view (Coupe) ........................... 22
Exterior view (Cabriolet) ....................... 24
Cockpit................................................. 26
Instrument cluster ................................ 28
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 30
Center console ..................................... 31
Upper part ...................................... 31
Lower part ...................................... 32
Overhead control panel ........................ 33
Door control panel................................ 34
Getting started ...................................
Unlocking .............................................
Unlocking with the SmartKey .........
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*.........
Starter switch positions..................
Adjusting ..............................................
Seats ..............................................
Steering wheel................................
Mirrors............................................
Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belts .................
Starting the engine .........................
Parking brake .................................
Driving ............................................
Switching on headlamps.................
Turn signals ....................................
Windshield wipers...........................
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off the engine.....................
Releasing seat belts........................
Locking ...........................................
35
36
36
37
38
41
41
44
47
48
48
51
53
54
55
56
56
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
Contents
Safety and Security ...........................
Occupant safety...................................
Air bags ..........................................
Occupant Classification System.....
Seat belts .......................................
Active head restraints ....................
Roll bars (only CLK cabriolet) .........
Children in the vehicle....................
Blocking of rear
side window operation ...................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Activating .......................................
Deactivating ...................................
Driving safety systems.........................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
ESP® ...............................................
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm system ..................
63
64
65
72
77
81
82
83
88
89
89
89
90
90
92
92
97
97
97
Controls in detail ............................... 99
Locking and unlocking ....................... 100
SmartKey ..................................... 100
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 103
Checking the batteries in the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* .............................. 108
Loss of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 109
Opening the doors from the inside 109
Opening the trunk ........................ 110
Closing the trunk.......................... 112
Trunk emergency release ............. 117
Valet locking ................................ 118
Automatic central locking ............ 118
Locking and unlocking
from the inside ............................. 119
Seats ................................................. 120
Front seat active head restraints . 120
Rear seat head restraints
(CLK coupe) ................................. 120
Rear seat head restraints
(CLK cabriolet) ............................. 123
Multicontour seat*....................... 124
Seat heating*............................... 125
Seat ventilation* ..........................
Memory function ...............................
Storing positions into memory .....
Recalling positions from memory.
Lighting .............................................
Exterior lamp switch ....................
Combination switch .....................
Corner-illuminating
front fog lamps* (With Bi-Xenon*
headlamps only)...........................
Hazard warning flasher ................
Interior lighting ............................
Door entry lamps .........................
Trunk lamp...................................
Instrument cluster .............................
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination ..................................
Coolant temperature indicator.....
Resetting trip odometer ...............
Tachometer..................................
Clock............................................
Outside temperature indicator .....
Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus ..........................................
126
127
128
128
129
129
133
133
135
136
137
137
138
138
139
139
140
140
140
141
141
142
144
Contents
Standard display menu ................
AMG menu ...................................
AUDIO menu ................................
Navi* menu..................................
Vehicle status
message memory menu ...............
Settings menu..............................
Trip computer menu.....................
TEL* menu ...................................
Automatic transmission.....................
Gear selector lever.......................
Shifting procedure .......................
Gear selector lever positions .......
Driving tips...................................
Gear ranges .................................
Automatic shift program ..............
Gear selector lever
one-touch gearshifting .................
Steering wheel gearshift
control one-touch gearshifting* ...
Manual shift program
CLK 63 AMG ................................
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) ......................
147
148
151
153
154
155
167
169
172
172
173
174
176
177
178
179
180
182
184
Good visibility ..................................... 185
Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 185
Rear view mirrors.......................... 185
Sun visors ..................................... 187
Rear window sunshade*
(CLK coupe: Canada only)............. 188
Rear window defroster.................. 189
Climate control................................... 190
Deactivating the climate control
system .......................................... 193
Operating the climate control
system in automatic mode............ 193
Setting the temperature................ 194
Adjusting air distribution............... 194
Adjusting air volume ..................... 195
Front defroster.............................. 195
Air recirculation mode .................. 196
Air conditioning............................. 198
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents....................... 199
Automatic climate control .................. 200
Deactivating the automatic
climate control system ................. 203
Operating the automatic climate
control system
in automatic mode ........................ 203
Setting the temperature ............... 204
Adjusting air distribution .............. 205
Adjusting air volume ..................... 206
Front defroster ............................. 206
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL........ 207
Air recirculation mode .................. 207
Charcoal filter ............................... 209
Air conditioning ............................ 210
Residual heat and ventilation*
(Canada only)................................ 211
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents ...................... 212
Audio system...................................... 213
Audio and telephone*, operation.. 213
Operating safety ........................... 213
Sound system* ............................. 213
Operating and display elements ... 214
Button and soft key operation ...... 216
Operation...................................... 216
Radio operation ............................ 221
Satellite radio* ............................. 225
CD mode....................................... 229
GSM network phones ................... 236
TDMA or CDMA network phones .. 242
Emergency calls “911” ................. 248
Contents
Power windows ..................................
Opening and closing the windows
Synchronizing power windows .....
Summer opening feature..............
Convenience closing feature ........
Opening and closing all side
windows with the soft top switch
(CLK cabriolet) .............................
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* (Coupe)...
Opening and closing
the power tilt/sliding sunroof ......
Synchronizing
the power tilt/sliding sunroof ......
Soft top (Cabriolet) ............................
Opening and closing the soft top .
Opening and closing the soft top
with the SmartKey........................
Luggage cover ..............................
Wind screen .................................
Driving systems .................................
Cruise control...............................
Parktronic system
(Parking assist)*,
CLK 63 AMG (USA),
Canada all models ........................
250
250
252
253
254
255
256
256
258
259
259
263
264
265
267
267
271
Loading..............................................
Roof rack (CLK coupe only)..........
Ski bag* (Canada only) ................
Split rear bench seat
(CLK coupe only) ..........................
Loading instructions.....................
Cargo tie-down rings
(CLK coupe only) ..........................
Useful features ..................................
Storage compartments ................
Center armrest.............................
Armrest in the
rear passenger compartment.......
Cup holders..................................
Ashtrays .......................................
Cigarette lighter ...........................
Power outlet in the
rear passenger compartment.......
Floormats*...................................
Telephone* ..................................
Tele Aid ........................................
Garage door opener* ...................
275
275
276
281
283
284
285
285
287
287
288
289
290
291
291
292
295
301
Operation .........................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ........
Driving instructions ...........................
Drive sensibly – save fuel.............
Drinking and driving .....................
Pedals ..........................................
Power assistance .........................
Brakes..........................................
Driving off ....................................
Parking.........................................
Tires.............................................
Hydroplaning................................
Tire traction .................................
Tire speed rating ..........................
Winter driving instructions ...........
Standing water.............................
Passenger compartment..............
Driving abroad .............................
Control and operation
of radio transmitters ....................
Catalytic converter.......................
Emission control ..........................
Coolant temperature....................
307
308
309
309
309
309
310
310
312
312
313
314
314
315
316
317
317
317
317
318
318
319
Contents
At the gas station ..............................
Refueling......................................
Check regularly
and before a long trip...................
Engine compartment .........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil .....................................
Transmission fluid level................
Coolant ........................................
Battery .........................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*.........
Tires and wheels................................
Important guidelines ....................
Tire care and maintenance...........
Direction of rotation.....................
Loading the vehicle ......................
Recommended
tire inflation pressure...................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
MOExtended system* ..................
Tire labeling..................................
Load identification .......................
DOT,
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ...
Maximum tire load .......................
320
320
322
323
323
325
327
328
329
330
331
331
332
334
334
339
341
348
348
352
353
354
Maximum tire inflation pressure ... 355
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (U.S. vehicles).............. 356
Tire ply material ............................ 357
Tire and loading terminology......... 358
Rotating tires ................................ 361
Winter driving ..................................... 362
Winter tires ................................... 362
Block heater (Canada only) ........... 363
Snow chains.................................. 363
Maintenance....................................... 364
Maintenance service
indicator message......................... 364
Clearing the maintenance
service indicator message ............ 365
Maintenance
service term exceeded.................. 365
Calling up the maintenance
service indicator display ............... 366
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator ........................... 366
Vehicle care........................................ 367
Cleaning and care of vehicle ......... 367
Practical hints .................................. 377
What to do if …? ................................. 378
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 378
Lamp in center console ................ 390
Vehicle status messages
in the multifunction display .......... 392
Where will I find...? ............................. 421
First aid kit.................................... 421
Storage compartment
underneath the trunk floor............ 421
TIREFIT (CLK 63 AMG only)........... 422
Vehicle tool kit.............................. 422
Minispare wheel............................ 425
Spare wheel bolts ......................... 426
Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 427
Unlocking the vehicle ................... 427
Locking the vehicle....................... 428
Manually unlocking
the gear selector lever.................. 429
Opening/closing
in an emergency (Cabriolet) ............... 430
Operating roll bars manually......... 430
Soft top emergency operation ...... 432
Contents
Resetting activated head restraints ...
Resetting
activated head restraints..............
Replacing SmartKey batteries............
SmartKey / SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* .......................
Replacing bulbs .................................
Bulbs ............................................
Replacing bulbs for front lamps....
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps.....
Replacing wiper blades ......................
Removing and installing
wiper blades.................................
Flat tire ..............................................
Preparing the vehicle....................
Sealing tires with TIREFIT
(CLK 63 AMG only).......................
Mounting the Minispare wheel .....
MOExtended system*...................
Battery ...............................................
Disconnecting the battery ............
Removing the battery ...................
Charging and
reinstalling the battery .................
Reconnecting the battery .............
Jump starting .....................................
440
440
441
442
443
444
446
448
450
450
452
452
452
458
463
464
465
465
466
466
467
Towing the vehicle .............................
Towing the vehicle .......................
Installing towing eye bolt .............
Fuses .................................................
Fuse box
in passenger compartment ..........
Fuse box
in engine compartment ................
Fuse box
in trunk ........................................
469
469
470
472
Technical data .................................
Parts service ......................................
Warranty coverage.............................
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet .....................
Identification labels ...........................
Layout of poly-V-belt drive .................
CLK 350 / CLK 550 .....................
CLK 63 AMG ................................
Engine................................................
Rims and tires....................................
Same size tires.............................
Mixed size tires ............................
Minispare wheel ...........................
475
476
477
472
473
474
477
478
480
480
480
481
482
483
484
486
Electrical system ...............................
Main dimensions and weights ...........
Main dimensions..........................
Weights........................................
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .........
Capacities ....................................
Engine oils ...................................
Engine oil additives ......................
Air conditioning refrigerant ..........
Brake fluid....................................
Premium unleaded gasoline .........
Fuel requirements........................
Gasoline additives........................
Coolants ......................................
Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*..
487
488
488
488
489
489
491
491
491
491
492
492
493
494
496
Index................................................. 497
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Genuine
Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories
approved by us are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will
be performed.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
앫
New Car Limited Warranty
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only)
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws)
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and
should be kept with the vehicle.
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Written notification should not be sent to a
dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
Change of address or ownership
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It
is in your own interest that we can contact
you should the need arise.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The service advisor will record each
service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program Brochure in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
12
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
앫
service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
In the USA:
앫
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
13
Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of your vehicle’s interior and exterior main features.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Practical hints
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.
14
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Maintenance Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your
vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
Trademarks:
앫
앫
앫
ESP® is a registered trademark of
DaimlerChrysler.
®
HomeLink is a registered trademark
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company.
SIRIUS and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
왘
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
*
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your
vehicle.
Warning!
컄
page
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
a warning which is continued on
the next page.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
a procedure which is continued
on the next page.
->
This symbol is used to indicate
cross-references to term definitions.
Display
Words appearing in the multifunction display and Audio display are printed in the type
shown here.
G
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you may
find useful.
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made
may produce an undesired effect on other
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore
never turn off the engine while driving.
16
Warning!
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage to and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the
vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair
facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
the safety precautions in this manual
앫
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
traffic rules and regulations
앫
motor vehicle laws and safety
standards
Warning!
G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself.
Removal of any of these labels may cause
you and others to be unaware of certain
risks which may result in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-426-9153);
go to http://www.safecar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safecar.gov.
18
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
19
20
At a glance
Exterior view (Coupe)
Exterior view (Cabriolet)
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
21
At a glance
Exterior view (Coupe)
22
At a glance
Exterior view (Coupe)
Item
Page
1 Trunk
Unlocking
Item
Page
6 Exterior rear view mirror
36
Opening and closing
110,
112
Minispare wheel
425
Vehicle tool kit
423
Adjusting
Auto-dimming rear view
mirrors
7 Tires and wheels
47
186
331
Checking tire inflation pressure
341
Run Flat Indicator
(Canada only)
342
Item
Page
a Hood, opening
323
Engine oil
325
Coolant
328
Battery
329
b Windshield wipers
56
Wiper blades, replacing
450
Wiper blades, cleaning
373
2 Rear lamps
444
3 Rear window, defrosting
189
4 Fuel filler flap
320
320
Tire Pressure Monitoring
(USA only)
344
Front window, defrosting
Refueling
191,
201
Gasoline
492
General information
331
Cleaning with wiper fluid
57
Vehicle tool kit
422
Cleaning
Minispare wheel
425
d Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Flat tire
452
Opening and closing
257
8 Towing
469
Opening and closing in an
emergency
430
5 Doors
Locking and unlocking
36, 62,
100
Opening
109
Locking/unlocking in an
emergency
427
Installing towing eye bolt
9 Front lamps
470
c Windshield
373
446
23
At a glance
Exterior view (Cabriolet)
24
At a glance
Exterior view (Cabriolet)
Item
Page
1 Trunk
Unlocking
Opening and closing
TIREFIT Kit (CLK 63 AMG)
Minispare wheel
Vehicle tool kit
Item
Page
6 Exterior rear view mirror
103
110, 112
422
425
422
Adjusting
Auto-dimming rear view
mirrors
7 Tires and wheels
47
186
331
Checking tire inflation
pressure
341
Run Flat Indicator
(Canada only)
342
344
Item
Page
a Hood, opening
323
Engine oil
325
Coolant
328
Battery
329
b Windshield wipers
56
Wiper blades, replacing
450
Wiper blades, cleaning
373
2 Rear lamps
448
3 Rear window, defrosting
189
4 Fuel filler flap
320
Refueling
320
Tire Pressure Monitoring
(USA only)
Gasoline
492
General information
331
Cleaning
TIREFIT Kit (CLK 63 AMG)
452
d Soft top
Vehicle tool kit
422
Opening and closing
260
Minispare wheel
458
420
Flat tire
452
Opening and closing in
an emergency
8 Towing
469
Roll bars
82
470
Cleaning
370
5 Doors
Locking and unlocking
Locking/unlocking in an
emergency
36, 62,
100
427
Installing towing eye bolt
9 Front lamps
c Windshield
Front window, defrosting 191, 201
Cleaning with wiper fluid
57
373
446
25
At a glance
Cockpit
26
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
1 Steering wheel gearshift
paddles*
Page
180
2 Combination switch
Item
8 Overhead control panel
285
a Storage box
285
Turn signals
56
b Center console
앫
Windshield wipers
56
c Hood lock release
앫
High beam
55
d Horn
267
4 Multifunction steering
wheel
30,
142
5 Instrument cluster
28,
138
6 Starter switch
7 Front Parktronic* warning
indicator (Canada all vehicles, USA only CLK 63 AMG
cabriolet)
38
33
9 Glove box
앫
3 Cruise control lever
Page
31, 32
324
e Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
45
f Parking brake pedal
53
g Door control panel
34
h Parking brake release
53
j Exterior lamp switch
55,
129
271
k Exterior rear view mirror adjustment
l Headlamp washer switch*
47
185
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
1 L Left turn signal indicator lamp
2 v ESP® warning lamp
Page
56
384
3 Speedometer
4 Multifunction display
141
5 l Distance warning
lamp
Warning lamp without function. It illuminates with the ignition on. It should go out
when the engine is running.
6 K Right turn signal indicator lamp
7 Coolant temperature
indicator with:
• Coolant temperature
warning lamp
8 Tachometer with:
1 Supplemental
Restraint System
(SRS) indicator lamp
Item
Page
378
ú Engine malfunction indicator lamp,
USA only
381
< Seat belt telltale
79,
385
381
A High beam headlamp
indicator lamp
133
± Engine malfunction indicator lamp,
Canada only
388
B Low beam headlamp
indicator lamp
129
H Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale
C Roll bar warning lamp
(CLK cabriolet)
385
앫
Gear selector lever
position
174
앫
Program mode
178
56
a Clock with:
140
380
382
; Brake warning lamp,
USA only
380
140
3 Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
64,
387
Page
- Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator
lamp
9 Main odometer with:
139
Item
b Fuel display with:
A Fuel reserve warning
lamp
385
c Reset button for:
앫
Resetting trip odometer
139
앫
Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination
138
앫
Confirming new time settings
160
29
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item
1 Multifunction display
Operating control system
Page
141
142
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è for next menu
2 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume:
Press button
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu:
Press button
æ up / to increase
ç down / to decrease
j for next display
3 Telephone*:
Press button
30
Item
k for previous display
s to take a call
to dial a call
170
170
t to end a call
to reject an incoming
call
170
170
Page
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part
Item
1 Seat heater*, driver’s side
Seat ventilation*, driver’s
side
125
126
2 Parktronic system* deactivation switch (Canada all
vehicles, USA only CLK 63
AMG cabriolet)
274
3 Rear window sunshade*
switch (CLK coupe Canada
only)
188
4 ESP® control switch
92
5 Hazard warning flasher
on/off switch
135
6 Central unlocking switch
119
Central locking switch
CLK coupe
Page
7 Switch for folding
(CLK coupe) or lowering
(CLK cabriolet) rear seat
head restraints
119
121
Item
8 Anti-theft alarm system
indicator lamp
Page
97
9 Seat heater*,
passenger side
Seat ventilation*,
passenger side
125
a Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp
76,
390
b Audio system,
151
126
or
COMAND* (see separate
operating instructions)
c Climate control
190
Automatic climate control
200
Rear window defroster
189
31
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item
1 Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
2 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button
Page
289
290
39
3 Cup holder
287
4 Storage compartment
with cup holder
and
telephone* compartment
in center armrest.
287
288
5 Soft top switch
(CLK cabriolet)
260
287
6 Program mode selector
switch for automatic transmission
CLK cabriolet
앫
Automatic shift program
178
앫
Manual shift program
(CLK 63 AMG cabriolet)
182
7 Gear selector lever for
automatic transmission
32
172
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item
Page
1 Rear interior lighting on/off
(CLK coupe)
137
2 Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
(CLK coupe)
256
3 Right reading lamp on/off
137
4 Interior lighting control
136
5 Interior rear view mirror
47,
185
6 Garage door opener*
301
7 Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system) and telephone*
292
8 Left reading lamp on/off
137
9 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
295
CLK coupe
33
At a glance
Door control panel
Item
1 Inside door handle
109
2 Seat adjustment
42,
120
3 Memory function (for storing seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel settings)
127
4 Switches for opening/closing front door windows
250
5 Rear window override
switch
88
6 Switches for opening/closing rear windows
250
7 Remote trunk opening
switch
111
Remote trunk
opening/closing* switch
34
Page
111
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
35
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
Unlocking with the SmartKey
왘
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page
references are located at the end of each
segment.
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
3 ΠUnlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 89)
36
왘
Press unlock button Πon the
SmartKey.
앫
All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫
An acoustic signal sounds once.
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄 page 106).
앫
The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Enter the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Getting started
Unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
왘
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock and unlock the vehicle without using
the remote control buttons on the
SmartKey and start the engine without inserting the SmartKey in the starter switch.
side of the car to open slightly. They will return to
the up position when the door is closed.
For more information, see “SmartKey”
(컄 page 100).
앫
All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫
An acoustic signal sounds once.
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄 page 106).
앫
The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away
from the door to be opened.
왘
i Opening a door causes the windows on that
Pull an outside door handle.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Enter the vehicle.
i Opening a door causes the windows on that
side of the car to open slightly. They will return to
the up position when the door is closed.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 103).
37
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
SmartKey
Starter switch
38
0 For removing SmartKey
The steering is locked when the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
1 Power supply for some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
All lamps (except low beam headlamp
indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary. If
a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 378).
3 Starting position
i When you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except low beam
headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps
unless activated) in the instrument cluster come
on. The indicator and warning lamps (except low
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator
lamps if activated) will go out when the engine is
running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational.
i The SmartKey can only be removed from the
starter switch with the gear selector lever in
position P.
i If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it can
no longer be turned in the switch. In this case,
the steering is locked. To unlock, remove
SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.
Getting started
Unlocking
! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
starter switch, the battery may not be sufficiently charged.
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever corresponds
to turning the SmartKey to the various
starter positions.
앫
Check the battery and charge it if necessary
(컄 page 464).
앫
Get a jump start (컄 page 467).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a
completely discharged battery, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch when the
engine is not in operation.
For more information, see “SmartKey”
(컄 page 100).
For information on starting the engine using the SmartKey, see “Starting with the
SmartKey” (컄 page 52).
If you firmly depress the brake pedal during pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button, the engine starts automatically.
You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
i The function of the SmartKey overrules the
1 USA only
2 Canada only
KEYLESS-GO function.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress the brake pedal.
39
Getting started
Unlocking
Position 0
Ignition (or position 2)
i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (as with
SmartKey removed).
왘
tor and warning lamps (except low beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps
unless activated) in the instrument cluster come
on. The indicator and warning lamps (except low
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator
lamps if activated) will go out when the engine is
running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational.
Position 1
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
앫
once again, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on.
앫
twice, the power supply is again switched
off.
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice.
This supplies power for all electrical
consumers. All the lamps (except low
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high
beam headlamp indicator lamp, and
turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come
on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster
fails to come on when the ignition is
switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
cluster” (컄 page 378).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is
again switched off.
40
For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 103).
For information on starting the engine
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
(컄 page 52).
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Warning!
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
Observe the following points:
앫
Adjust the backrest until your arms are
slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.
앫
Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far back as possible
with the driver still able to operate
controls properly.
앫
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports
the back of the head at eye level.
앫
Never place hands under the seat or
near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Seats
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts
provide the best restraint when the wearer
is in a nearly upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
G
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch, or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the power seats
can be operated when the respective door is
open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
41
Getting started
Adjusting
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant, or toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child. For additional
information, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 83).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Seat adjustment
i The memory function (컄 page 127) lets you
The seat adjustment switches are located
on the respective door.
store the settings for the seat position together
with the settings for the steering wheel and the
exterior rear view mirrors.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
! When moving the seats, make sure there are
no items in the footwell or behind the seats; otherwise you could damage the seats.
Seat height
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment
5 Backrest tilt
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
or
왘
42
Press switch forward or backward in
the direction of arrow 4.
Open the respective door.
왘
Press switch up or down in the direction of arrow 2.
Seat cushion tilt
왘
Press switch up or down in the direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs
are lightly supported.
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat backrest tilt
왘
Head restraint adjusting
Folding front seat backrests forward
Manually adjust the head restraint.
1 Release lever
Press switch forward or backward in
the direction of arrow 5.
Head restraint height
왘
Press switch up or down in the direction of arrow 1.
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
왘
Push or pull the head restraint cushion
to the desired position.
For more information, see “Seats”
(컄 page 120).
Folding backrests forward
왘
Pull release lever 1 forward and fold
the backrest forward.
The head restraint will automatically
move down.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
Folding backrests back
왘
Fold and press the backrest rearward
until it engages in driving position.
The head restraint returns to its previous position.
i In addition to the front seat backrests, the
front seat cushions can also be shifted forward
to permit easy access to the rear whenever the
seat is located in the rear half of its adjustment
range. Pivot backrest forward by pulling the release lever until the seat moves in a combined
forward and upward movement.
! When moving the seat, make sure there are
no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats.
Warning!
G
The seat belts provide protection only with
the backrest locked in place. Therefore, the
backrest must be locked in place with the
vehicle in motion. Do not drive the vehicle
when the backrest is not locked in place.
44
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle.
The power seats can also be operated with
the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Never place hands under seat or near any
moving parts during a seat adjustment
procedure.
For information on additional convenience
features permitting easy entry and exit,
see “Easy-entry/exit feature” (컄 page 45).
Steering wheel
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch, or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the steering
wheel adjustment feature can be operated
when the driver’s door is open. Therefore,
do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment
Adjusting steering column in or out
Easy-entry/exit feature
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is
located on the lower left of steering
column.
왘
This feature allows for easier entry into and
exit from the vehicle. When entering and
exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in
its uppermost position.
Move stalk forward or back in direction
of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your
arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Adjusting steering column up or down
왘
Move stalk up or down in direction of
arrow 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely
and all the displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the
instrument cluster are clearly visible.
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
or
왘
Open the driver’s door.
i The memory function (컄 page 127) lets you
store settings for the steering wheel together
with the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors and the seat position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be
activated or deactivated in the
Convenience submenu of the control
system (컄 page 166).
Warning!
G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
the following:
앫
Move steering wheel adjustment stalk
(컄 page 45).
앫
Press the memory position switch
(컄 page 128).
컄컄
45
Getting started
Adjusting
컄컄
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you:
앫
or
앫
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you:
앫
close the driver’s door with the ignition
switched on,
or
앫
insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (컄 page 39) once
with the driver’s door closed.
i The last set steering wheel position is stored
when
앫
the ignition is switched off.
앫
the position is stored in memory
(컄 page 128).
46
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch,
open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 39) in position 1.
i If the current position for the steering wheel
is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering
wheel will no longer be able to move upward
when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted
when the engine is started.
Warning!
G
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
be completed before setting the vehicle in
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Getting started
Adjusting
Mirrors
The buttons are located above the exterior
lamp switch.
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Interior rear view mirror
왘
Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 185).
Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
1 Adjustment button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘
Press button 3 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button 2
for the passenger-side exterior rear
view mirror.
왘
Push adjustment button 1 up, down,
left, or right, according to the desired
setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition
it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into
place. The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally.
i The memory function (컄 page 127) lets you
store the setting for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the settings for the steering
wheel and the driver’s seat position.
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 185).
47
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Make sure absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure the pedals still have
sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between
or beneath the pedals. You could then no
longer brake or accelerate. This could lead
to accidents and injury.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear.
48
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they where designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄 page 64).
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats.
Regardless of seating position, children
12 years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriate infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see “Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 83).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
Warning!
Warning!
G
The seat belt presenter 1 slides out when
the corresponding door is closed and the
ignition is switched on (컄 page 38).
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 68).
The seat belt presenter for driver and passenger makes it easier to put on the seat
belt.
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
1 Seat belt presenter
1 Latch plate
2 Release button
3 Buckle
49
Getting started
Driving
왘
왘
With a smooth motion, pull the belt out
of the seat belt presenter.
Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
lap portion across your hips.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫
Place the seat backrest in a position
that is as upright as possible.
Warning!
G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
왘
Push latch plate 1 into buckle 3 until
it clicks.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a
person and another object at the same
time.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
앫
When using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
앫
Check your seat belt periodically
during travel to make sure it is properly
positioned.
앫
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing.
Proper use of seat belts
앫
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the belt under your
arm.
50
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine
The seat belt presenter slides back:
앫
right after you push the latch plate 1
into buckle 3 and hear it click.
앫
after approximately 60 seconds if you
do not push latch plate 1 into
buckle 3.
앫
if your door is opened.
앫
if you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0.
앫
if you release a front seat backrest and
fold it forward.
Warning!
G
The seat belt presenter must be retracted
while the vehicle is in motion. Only when the
seat belt presenter is retracted can the seat
belt be properly positioned on the body and
protect the occupant as intended.
Warning!
Automatic transmission
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 172).
51
Getting started
Driving
Starting with the SmartKey
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress accelerator.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 (컄 page 38) and release it
again immediately (“touch-start”).
The engine then starts automatically.
For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see (컄 page 60).
왘
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
Warning!
G
The gear selector lever lock is released.
As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started.
Therefore, never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle.
You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
gear selector lever.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
52
Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure.
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘
Do not depress accelerator.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
왘
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
The engine starts if the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 60).
Getting started
Driving
Starting difficulties
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time,
it can no longer be turned in the switch. In
this case, the steering is locked.
왘
To unlock, remove SmartKey from
starter switch and reinsert.
왘
Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 51).
Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 467).
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘
If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.
왘
왘
If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
Or:
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Parking brake
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
컄컄
53
Getting started
Driving
컄컄왘
Release the parking brake by pulling on
release handle 1.
The indicator lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the clock
goes out.
Driving
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
왘
Move gear selector lever to
position D or R.
i Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
! If you hear a warning signal and the message Release Parking Brake appears in the
multifunction display when driving off, you have
forgotten to release the parking brake.
Release the parking brake (컄 page 53).
i At vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h), the automatic central locking system
engages and the locking knobs drop down.
The automatic door lock feature can be deactivated (컄 page 166).
You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to do
so.
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission shifts at a higher engine revolution.
This allows the catalytic converter to reach
its operating temperature earlier.
54
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
! Place the gear selector lever in
position R or P only when the vehicle is stopped
in order to avoid damaging the transmission.
! Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine
speeds may shorten the service life of the engine.
CLK 63 AMG:
At low engine temperatures below +68°F
(+20°C), the engine’s maximum speed is
restricted in order to protect it from damage.
Avoid driving your vehicle at full speed when the
engine is cold to prevent premature engine wear
and/or diminished comfort.
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
For more information on driving, see “Driving instructions” (컄 page 309).
Switching on headlamps
High beam
Low beam headlamps
Combination switch
Exterior lamp switch
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
1 M Off
왘
2 B Low beam headlamps or high
beam headlamps.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The low beam headlamps and the low
beam headlamp indicator lamp B in
the instrument cluster comes on
(컄 page 28).
Push the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1.
The high beam headlamps and the high
beam headlamp indicator lamp A in
the instrument cluster comes on
(컄 page 28).
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄 page 129).
55
Getting started
Driving
Turn signals
i To signal minor directional changes such as
changing lanes, press the combination switch
only to the point of resistance and release. The
corresponding turn signals will flash three times.
Windshield wipers
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
a windshield might scratch the glass and/or
damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on
a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the
windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid (컄 page 57).
Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
왘
0 Windshield wipers off
I
Press the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1 or 2.
Combination switch
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K in the instrument
cluster flashes (컄 page 28).
1 Single wipe
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
2 Switching on windshield wipers
The combination switch resets
automatically after major steering wheel
movements.
56
Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the
intensity of the rain.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
Intermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
Getting started
Driving
Intermittent wiping
i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
! Do not leave windshield wipers on an
vehicle is at a standstill and a door is opened.
This protects persons getting into or out of the
vehicle from being sprayed.
왘
intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to
an automatic car wash or during windshield
cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in the
presence of water sprayed on the windshield,
and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result.
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects
may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an
undesired fashion. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows.
You should therefore switch off the windshield
wipers when weather conditions are dry.
Intermittent wiping interval is dependent
on wetness of windshield.
왘
Turn the combination switch to
position I.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when
앫
all doors are closed
and
앫
앫
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
the gear selector lever is in position D or R
i To prevent smears on the windshield, or
or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even
when it is raining.
the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch.
Single wipe
왘
Press the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 56) past the
resistance point.
Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 56) to
the resistance point.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 330).
컄컄
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor.
57
Getting started
Driving
컄컄! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.
앫
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and,
앫
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
In case of accident
An ignition cable may be damaged.
remove SmartKey from starter switch
앫
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
왘
Do not start the engine under any
circumstances.
turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
door open, starter switch is in position 0,
same as with SmartKey removed from
starter switch)
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police
authorities.
왘
Give very little gas.
왘
Have the problem repaired at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
before attempting to remove any blockage.
앫
Remove blockage.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on again.
If the windshield wipers fail to function at all with
the combination switch in position I,
앫
set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed
앫
have the windshield wipers checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
58
Check the coolant level and add
coolant if necessary (컄 page 328).
앫
or
앫
왘
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
The coolant temperature is
above 248°F (120°C)
If no damage can be determined on the
앫
major assemblies
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
앫
fuel system
앫
engine mount:
왘
Start the engine in the usual manner.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
soon as possible and turn off the
engine. Allow engine and coolant to
cool off.
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
damage to the vehicle or the vehicle
drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement,
always do the following before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle:
앫
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, always turn
the front wheels towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
Parking brake
Warning!
G
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to
lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident. In addition, the
vehicle’s brake lights do not light up when
the parking brake is engaged.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
왘
Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2. 컄컄
59
Getting started
Parking and locking
컄컄
When the engine is running, the
warning lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the clock will
be illuminated.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (컄 page 174).
When parked on an incline, always turn the
front wheels towards the road curb.
60
Getting out of your vehicle without taking
the above measurements to secure it is
dangerous.
Switching off headlamps
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 129).
Turning off the engine
왘
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 59).
i Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P.
On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the
curb.
Turning off the engine with the
SmartKey
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 (컄 page 38).
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
i The SmartKey can only be removed from the
starter switch with the gear selector lever in
position P.
Turning off the engine with
KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button to shut off the engine.
With the driver’s door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch
(컄 page 38).
Getting started
Parking and locking
i If you hear a warning signal, you have tried
왘
Locking
to turn off the engine while the gear selector lever was not in P.
G
In addition, the message Selector Lever In
Park appears in the multifunction display.
Warning!
Place the gear selector lever in P.
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Releasing seat belts
왘
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 49).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that
the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get
caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and
impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or
cause damage to the door and/or door trim panel. Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limit Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Exit the vehicle, take the SmartKey or
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with
you, and close all doors and the trunk
lid.
i If you hear a warning signal you have
forgotten to switch off the low beam headlamps
or the parking lamps before opening the driver’s
door.
In addition the message Switch Off Lights
appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the low beam headlamps or the parking lamps.
If the message Switch Off Lights or Remove Key appears in the multifunction display
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or
switch off the automatic headlamp mode.
! Failure to switch off the exterior lamps when
leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged
battery.
i Opening a door causes the windows on that
side of the car to open slightly. They will return to
the up position when the door is closed.
61
Getting started
Parking and locking
Locking with the SmartKey
왘
Locking with KEYLESS-GO*
With the trunk and both doors closed:
Press lock button ‹ on the
SmartKey (컄 page 36).
앫
All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
With the trunk and both doors closed:
앫
An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄 page 106).
앫
The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫
The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
앫
All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫
An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄 page 106).
앫
앫
The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “SmartKey”
(컄 page 100).
62
1 Lock button
왘
Press lock button 1 on an outside
door handle.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 103).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
앫
Seat belts (컄 page 77)
앫
Child restraints (컄 page 86)
앫
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) (컄 page 87)
Additional protection potential is provided
by:
앫
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
with
Air bag system components with
앫
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp (컄 page 76)
앫
Front passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 72)
Although the systems are independent,
their protective functions work in conjunction with each other.
i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
systems for infants and children, see “Children
in the vehicle” (컄 page 83).
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates detection of system malfunctions. The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when the
ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine has
been started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
lit when the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫
Air bags (컄 page 65)
앫
Air bag control unit (with crash
sensors)
앫
fails to go out after approximately
4 seconds after the engine was started
앫
Emergency tensioning device (ETD)
for seat belts (컄 page 80)
앫
does not come on at all
앫
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
앫
Active head restraints (컄 page 81)
앫
CLK cabriolet: Roll bars (컄 page 82)
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint systems (such as seat
belts and anchors, emergency tensioning
devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags)
or their wiring, as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems, can lead
to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended.
Air bags or emergency tensioning devices,
for example, could deploy inadvertently or
fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deployment
is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their software.
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not deploy when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Air bags
Warning!
G
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front air bags) or side impacts (CLK
coupe: front side impact air bags, rear side
impact air bags*, and window curtain air
bags. CLK cabriolet: head-thorax air bags
and rear side impact air bags*). However, no
system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the air
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
앫
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear their
respective seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and make sure it is properly
positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the air bag.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
or too close to the air bag can be seriously
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates
with great force in the blink of an eye:
앫
66
Sit properly belted in a position that is
as upright as possible with your back
against the seat backrest.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the air bag cover
on the steering wheel must be at least
10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not lean your head or chest close to
the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver’s front air bag inflates.
앫
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
앫
Occupants, especially children, should
always sit as upright as possible,
properly use the seat belts and use an
appropriately sized infant restraint,
toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other
occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
CLK coupe:
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat.
There is a possibility for a side impact air
bag related injury if occupants, especially
children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a front side impact air
bag and/or rear side impact air bag* which
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in
order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door or the rear
side trim panel where the front side impact air bag and/or the rear side impact
air bag* inflates.
This could result in serious injuries or
death should the front side impact air
bag and/or the rear side impact air bag*
be deployed.
(2) Always sit as upright as possible,
properly use the seat belts and for
children 12 years old and under, use an
appropriately sized infant restraint,
toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have the rear mounted side impact air bags* deactivated, then
deactivation can be accomplished upon
your written request to do so at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional
cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Warning!
G
CLK cabriolet:
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat.
There is a possibility for a head-thorax air
bag or rear side impact air bag* related injury if occupants, especially children, are not
properly seated or restrained when next to a
head-thorax air bag and/or rear side impact
air bag* which needs to deploy rapidly in a
side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Always sit as upright as possible,
properly use the seat belts and for
children 12 years old and under, use an
appropriately sized infant restraint,
toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
(2) Always wear seat belts properly.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain frontal impacts (front air bags) and in side
impacts (CLK coupe: front side impact air bags,
rear side impact air bags*, and window curtain
air bags. CLK cabriolet: head-thorax air bags and
rear side impact air bags*) which exceed preset
thresholds. Only during these events will they
provide their supplemental protection.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
air bag
Warning!
In case of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will
not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be
protected to the extent possible by a properly
fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt
is also needed to provide the best possible
protection in a rollover.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use belts installed or supplied at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning
Devices (ETDs) contain Perchlorate
material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment.
Check with your local government’s disposal guidelines. California residents,
see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
앫
Air bags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on
a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
that is deployed must be replaced.
앫
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
It is important to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace deployed air bags and
repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure
the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental
crash protection for occupants.
68
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
앫
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash
they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
앫
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or
removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, seat covers
(CLK cabriolet) etc. over the steering
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag
cover, outboard sides of the front seat
backrest (CLK cabriolet), door trim panels (CLK coupe), door frame trims (CLK
coupe), or rear side trim panels, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring. Keep area between air bags and occupants free from
objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
G
앫
The driver and passenger should always wear
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for
the air bags to provide their supplemental
protection.
앫
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
앫
앫
앫
CLK coupe: Do not hang items such as
coat hangers from the coat hooks or
handles over the door. These items may
turn into projectiles and cause head and
other injuries when the window curtain
air bag is deployed.
Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not
touch.
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
앫
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Given the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and
the textile structure of the air bags,
there is the possibility of abrasions or
other, potentially more serious injuries
resulting from air bag deployment.
Warning!
G
CLK cabriolet: Only use seat covers which
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or
prevent the deployment of the head-thorax
air bags. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front air bags
1 Driver air bag
2 Passenger air bag
i The front air bags in this vehicle have been
앫
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the
air bag to have different rates of inflation that are
based on the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit.
the 56 indicator lamp in the
center console is not lit (컄 page 76)
앫
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
On the front passenger side, the front air bag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger’s weight category as identified by the
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 72).
CLK coupe:
Front side impact air bags, rear side
impact air bags*, window curtain air
bags
The lighter the front passenger side occupant,
the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
for the second stage inflation of the air bag.
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
The air bags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
The front passenger front air bag will only
be deployed if:
앫
independently of the front side impact
air bag (CLK coupe), head-thorax air
bag (CLK cabriolet) and/or the rear
side impact air bag*
앫
Driver and front passenger front air bags
are deployed:
70
the system, based on OCS weight sensor readings, senses that the front passenger seat is occupied
1 Front side impact air bag
2 Rear side impact air bag*
3 Window curtain air bag
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The front side impact air bags, the rear
side impact air bags*, and the window
curtain air bags are deployed:
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
in side impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the front air bags
The front side impact air bags, the rear
side impact air bags*, and the window curtain air bags are not deployed in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
CLK cabriolet: Head-thorax air bags
The head-thorax air bags 1 are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the
system’s deployment threshold.
Warning!
1 Head-thorax air bag
The head-thorax air bags 1 in the drivers
and front passenger seat are deployed:
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
in side impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the front air bags
G
Only use seat covers which have been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle model. Using other seat covers
may interfere with or prevent the
deployment of the head-thorax air bags.
Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for availability.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
CLK cabriolet: Rear side impact air
bags*
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the front passenger
front air bag on or off based on the classified occupant weight category determined
by weight sensor readings from the front
passenger seat.
i CLK coupe: The system does not deactivate
the front passenger side impact air bag, the window curtain air bag and the emergency tensioning device.
1 Rear side impact air bag*
The rear side impact air bags* 1 are
deployed:
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
in side impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the front air bags
The rear side impact air bags* 1 are not
deployed in impacts which do not exceed
the system’s deployment threshold.
72
CLK cabriolet: The system does not deactivate
the head-thorax air bag and the emergency tensioning device.
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
position that is as upright as possible with
their back against the seat backrest and
feet on the floor to be correctly classified.
If the occupant's weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by
leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be
able to properly approximate the
occupant’s weight category.
i If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Both driver and the front passenger should
always use the 56 indicator lamp
as an indication of whether or not the front
passenger is properly positioned.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
If the 56 indicator lamp illuminates
when an adult or someone larger than a
small individual is in the front passenger
seat, have the front passenger re-position
himself or herself in the seat until the
56 indicator lamp goes out.
More information about air bag display
messages (컄 page 396).
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air
bag deployment when the OCS classified
the front passenger seat occupant as being
up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint or if the front passenger seat is
sensed as being empty.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being up
to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the 56 indicator lamp will
illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the
56 indicator lamp will illuminate
when the engine is started and remain
illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being
heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint or as being a small individual
(such as a young teenager or a small adult),
the 56 indicator lamp will illuminate
for approximately 6 seconds when the
engine is started and then, depending on
occupant weight sensor readings from the
seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the
56 indicator lamp illuminated, the
front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
With the 56 indicator lamp out, the
front passenger front air bag is activated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
someone larger than a small individual, the
56 indicator lamp will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
started and then go out, indicating that the
front passenger front air bag is activated.
If the 56 indicator lamp is
illuminated, the front passenger front air
bag is deactivated and will not be deployed. 컄컄
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
If the 56 indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the front passenger front air
bag is activated and will be deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the front side impact
air bags (CLK coupe), head-thorax air
bag (CLK cabriolet) and/or rear side impact air bags*.
If the front passenger front air bag is
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
influenced by:
앫
the rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit
앫
front passenger’s weight category as
identified by the Occupant Classification
System (OCS).
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap (CLK coupe), or
lower anchors and top tether strap (CLK
coupe), or seat belt and lower anchors (CLK
cabriolet), fully in accordance with the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
74
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat.
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be
seriously injured or even killed if the
front passenger front air bag inflates in
a collision which could occur under
some circumstances, even with the air
bag technology installed in your vehicle.
The only means to completely eliminate
this risk is to never place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat. We therefore strongly recommend
that you always place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the back
seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to
do so, make sure the 56 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that
the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 56 indicator
lamp not illuminate or go out while the
restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the
56 indicator lamp while driving
to make sure the 56 indicator
lamp is illuminated.
If the 56 indicator lamp goes out
or remains out, do not transport a child
on the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the front passenger front
air bag inflates.
앫
If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and
secure child restraint with the vehicle’s
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be
activated (컄 page 73).
i Deployment of the driver front air bag does
not mean that the front passenger front air bag
also should have deployed.
The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 72)
may have determined:
앫
that the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint – both instances where the
system suppresses deployment of the front
passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient
severity to deploy the driver front air bag.
앫
that the seat was occupied by a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small
adult) or a child weighing more than the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint – instances where
the system may suppress deployment of the
front passenger front air bag even though
the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air
bag.
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The 56 indicator lamp is located in
the center console.
Warning!
G
If the 1 indicator lamp and the
56 indicator lamp are lit at the same
time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant
Classification System. The front passenger
front air bag will be deactivated in this case.
Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp
The 56 indicator lamp 1 will be
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch or with
the starter switch in position 0.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
In order to ensure proper operation of the
air bag system and OCS:
앫
앫
76
Sit properly belted in a position that is
as upright as possible with your back
against the seat backrest.
While seated, an occupant should not
position him/herself in such a way as to
cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted
from the seat bottom as this may result
in the OCS being unable to correctly approximate the occupant’s weight
category.
앫
Read and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Self-test Occupant Classification
System
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice, the 56 indicator lamp
located in the center console illuminates. If
an adult occupant is properly sitting on the
front passenger seat and the system
senses the occupant as being an adult,
the 56 indicator lamp will
illuminate and go out after
approximately 6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
senses the front passenger seat as being
empty, the 56 indicator lamp will
illuminate and not go out.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
If the 56 indicator lamp should not
illuminate, the system is not functioning.
You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center before seating any child on the front
passenger seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 390).
Warning!
G
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the Occupant Classification System. The bottom of the child seat
must make full contact with the passenger
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child
seat could cause injuries to the child in case
of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
Seat belts
Warning!
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts
fastened whenever the vehicle is in
motion.
For more information, see “Fastening the
seat belts” (컄 page 48).
i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 83).
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, including those sitting in the rear.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are
properly wearing their seat belts.
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a position that is as upright as
possible and the belt is properly positioned
on the body.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is
correctly restrained with a separate seat
belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
78
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also
be checked.
Warning!
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this
section, as that could result in serious
injuries in case of an accident.
앫
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver air bag,
passenger front air bag, CLK coupe:
front side impact air bags, rear side impact air bags*, and window curtain air
bags, CLK cabriolet: head-thorax air
bags and rear side impact air bags*),
ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device), and front seat knee bolsters. The
system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags
and ETD)
Only use seat belts which have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
of the ETDs or to their failure to activate
when necessary.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
and side (CLK coupe: front side impact
air bags, rear side impact air bags*, and
window curtain air bags. CLK cabriolet:
head-thorax air bags and rear side impact air bags* and ETD) impacts which
exceed preset deployment thresholds.
앫
앫
앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would
increase the chance of head and neck
injuries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
might cause injuries.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫
앫
앫
앫
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another
person or other objects.
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
Pregnant women should also always use
a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible
pressure on the abdomen.
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
When using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints or children
in booster seats, always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Enhanced seat belt reminder system
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < will always illuminate
for 6 seconds to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
when the engine is started, an additional
warning chime will also sound for a maximum of 6 seconds or until the driver’ s
seat belt is fastened.
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened
with both doors closed,
앫
the seat belt telltale < remains illuminated for as long as either the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened.
앫
and if the vehicle speed once exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a
warning chime sounds with increasing
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds
or until the driver’s and the front passenger’s seat belt are fastened.
If you and/or your passenger release
the seat belt during driving, the seat
belt telltale < starts flashing and a
warning chime sounds as described before.
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s
seat belt remains unfastened after
60 seconds, the warning chime stops
sounding, the seat belt telltale <
stops flashing but continues to be illuminated.
After a vehicle standstill, the warning
chime is reactivated and the seat belt
telltale < is flashing again if the vehicle speed once exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h).
The seat belt telltale < will only go out
if both the driver’s and the front passenger’s seat belt (with the front passenger
seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle
is standing still and a door is opened.
80
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 385).
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force
limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the
following cases:
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts
exceeding the system deployment
threshold
앫
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly,
see 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 64)
i The ETDs for the front seats will only activate if the front seat belts are fastened (latch
plate properly inserted into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear seats will activate with or
without the respective seat belts fastened.
When activated, emergency tensioning
devices remove slack from the belts. Belt
force limiters reduce the force exerted by
the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
Warning!
G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
seats reduces the retracting force of the
seat belts when they are in normal use.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Active head restraints
The active front seat head restraints are intended to offer the driver and front passenger increased protection from whiplash
type injuries in rear-end collisions. In the
event of a rear-end collision exceeding the
systems’ deployment threshold, the active
head restraints on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats are designed to move
forward in the direction of travel, providing
the head with increased support earlier on
in the collision sequence. The active head
restraints activate whether the seat is occupied or not.
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in
the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Warning!
G
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of the active head restraints. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
availability.
You cannot remove the active head restraint on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat.
For removal of the active head restraints
we recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 41).
For information on resetting the activated
active head restraints, see “Resetting activated head restraints” (컄 page 440).
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the active head restraints may not be able to function properly or offer the intended degree of
protection in the event of an accident.
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Roll bars (CLK cabriolet)
Warning!
G
Make sure nothing is blocking the roll bars’
path of motion. Otherwise someone could
be injured when the roll bars are raised. The
head restraints should therefore always be
in the raised position when the rear seat is
occupied (컄 page 123).
The roll bars are integrated into the rear
head restraints.
The roll bars raise automatically in an accident or in a critical driving situation.
i When the roll bars are raised automatically,
you will hear a ratcheting sound and the rear
head restraints will also rise.
82
You can manually lower the roll bars again
when the soft top is open (컄 page 431).
With the soft top closed, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the
roll bars lowered. Do not attempt to lower
the roll bars manually with the soft top
closed. Lowering the roll bars manually
with the soft top closed may impair the
function of the roll bars.
i You cannot lower the rear head restraints
with the rear head restraint lowering switch
(컄 page 123) when the roll bars are in the raised
position.
Also, you cannot operate the soft top using the
soft top switch when the roll bars are in the
raised position.
앫
If the soft top is open, you can manually lower the roll bars (컄 page 431).
앫
If the soft top is closed, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the roll
bars lowered.
Warning!
G
If the yellow roll bar warning lamp \ in
the clock does not go out after starting the
engine, or if it comes on while driving, then
the roll bar system is not operating properly
and may not activate in an accident. In this
case, raise the roll bars manually before
continuing to drive (컄 page 430).
For safety reasons, drive only with the roll
bars raised until the malfunction is repaired.
Have your vehicle checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
왘
왘
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child.
Make sure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle
is in motion.
Warning!
G
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could
앫
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
앫
be seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold
If children open a door, they could
앫
injure other persons
앫
get out of the car and injure themselves
or be injured by oncoming traffic
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment or trunk unless
they are firmly secured in place. For more information, see “Loading” (컄 page 275), and
see “Useful features” (컄 page 285) in the
“Controls in detail” chapter.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
앫
strong braking maneuvers
앫
sudden changes of direction
앫
an accident
Infant and child restraint systems
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
pull the shoulder belt out completely and
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual
manner.
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i For information on LATCH-type child seat
anchors (컄 page 87).
CLK coupe: Information on child seats with anchor fittings for tether anchorages (컄 page 86).
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the District
of Columbia, the U.S. territories, and all
Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for the child restraint, that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and
210.2.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with these standards can be found on the instruction label
on the restraint and in the instruction
manual provided with the restraint.
84
When using any infant, or toddler restraint,
or booster seat, be sure to carefully read
and follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
infant or child restraints.
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, or:
CLK coupe: the seat belt and top tether
strap, or lower anchors and top tether
strap,
CLK cabriolet: the seat belt and lower
anchors,
fully in accordance with the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in
the area of the door or the rear side trim
panel where the front side impact air bag
(CLK cabriolet: head-thorax air bag) and/or
the rear side impact air bag* inflates. This
could result in serious injuries or death
should the air bag be triggered. Always sit as
upright as possible, properly use the seat
belts and use an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
앫
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the OCS senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard
appropriate child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be
seriously injured or even killed if the
front passenger front air bag inflates in
a collision which could occur under
some circumstances, even with the air
bag technology installed in your vehicle.
The only means to completely eliminate
this risk is to never place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat. We therefore strongly recommend
that you always place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the back
seat.
If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to
do so, make sure the 56 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that
the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 56 indicator
lamp not illuminate or go out while the
restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the
56 indicator lamp while driving
to make sure the 56 indicator
lamp is illuminated. If the 56
indicator lamp goes out or remains out,
do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been
repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will
be seriously injured or even killed if the
front passenger front air bag inflates.
앫
If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and
secure child restraint with the vehicle’s
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
For children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be activated
(컄 page 73).
Warning!
G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
for children over 41 lbs until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster.
컄컄
85
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
When the child restraint is not in use,
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised
children in a child restraint system may use
vehicle equipment and may cause an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
The CLK coupe is equipped with tether
anchorages for a top tether strap at each
of the rear seating positions.
i Your CLK cabriolet does not have and is not
required to have anchorage rings for a child
seat’s top tether strap in the rear seating positions. Child seats can be used with the seat belt,
or lower anchor system and seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
86
1 Anchorage ring
2 Hook
1 Anchorage ring
2 Hook
왘
Open the trunk and release the rear
seat backrest (컄 page 281).
왘
Fold up anchorage ring 1.
왘
왘
Fold rear seat backrest slightly forward.
Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
of the tether strap, to anchorage
ring 1.
왘
Guide top tether strap between head
restraint and top of seat back.
Head restraint must be installed and
positioned such that the top tether
strap can pass freely between the head
restraint and the top of seat back.
Make sure the tether strap is not
twisted.
i For safety, make sure the hook 2 has attached to the anchorage ring 1 beyond the
safety catch, as illustrated.
왘
Swing rear seat backrest to the rear until it engages.
왘
Check the rear seat backrest to be
locked in its upright position
(컄 page 282).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied by passengers, or the extended cargo area is not in
use. Check for secure locking by pushing
and pulling on the backrest.
Once the top tether anchorage hook is
attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured. Secure the child restraint and
tighten the top tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
The CLK coupe and cabriolet are equipped
with two LATCH- (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) type anchors (at each of
the rear seats) for the installation of a
LATCH-type child seat with matching
mounting fittings.
Warning!
G
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts.
Position shoulder belt across chest and
shoulder, not face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning for children over
41 lbs until they reach a height where a
lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
i Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be
used and can be installed using the vehicle’s
seat belt system (컄 page 83). Install child seat
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
LATCH-type anchors
The LATCH-type anchors are located between the seat cushion and the backrest.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached to the
right and left side anchor.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to the child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat anchor fittings must be replaced.
1 Anchors
왘
Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
87
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear side window operation
Warning!
You can block the rear side window
operation (for instance when you have
children riding in the rear passenger
compartment).
The override switch is located on the door
control panel of the driver’s door.
G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
1 Deactivating override switch
2 Activating override switch
3 Override switch
88
Activating override switch
왘
Slide override switch 3 to the right in
direction 2.
The rear side windows can no longer be
operated using the respective switch
located in the rear trim panels.
i Operation of the rear side windows with the
switches located on the door control panel of the
driver’s door is still possible.
Deactivating override switch
왘
Slide override switch 3 to the left in
direction 1.
The rear side windows can be operated
using the respective switch located in
the rear trim panels.
For more information, see “Power windows” (컄 page 250).
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
i Canada only:
Deactivating
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
왘
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
1 Â button
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i USA only:
Activating
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
왘
Press button  again.
or
왘
Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 39).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
be inside the vehicle.
Press and hold button  for at least
1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
89
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
Warning!
G
ABS
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
Warning!
앫
앫
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The ABS, BAS, and ESP® cannot reduce this
risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
i In winter operation, the maximum effective-
ness of the ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® is only
achieved with winter tires (컄 page 362) or snow
chains as required.
G
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 28) comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
90
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Braking
Emergency brake maneuver
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode.
왘
왘
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal while experiencing the
pulsation.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions
and functions as a reminder to take extra
care while driving.
Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
Warning!
G
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS
and the ESP® are also switched off. The basic driving and braking functions are still
available.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability and extending the braking distance.
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction available on the road surface. The ABS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 377).
91
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
Warning!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance.
왘
Apply continuous full braking pressure
until the emergency braking situation is
over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
Warning!
G
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without
the additional brake boost available that
BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
distance may increase.
92
G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
ESP®
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction
(force of adhesive friction between the
tires and the road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
applying the brakes to the appropriate
wheel and by limiting the engine output,
the ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle.
The ESP® is especially useful while driving
off and on wet or slippery road surfaces.
The ESP® also stabilizes the vehicle during
braking and steering maneuvers.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP®
is engaged.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the
instrument cluster. In this case, proceed as
follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
®
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.
Warning!
G
The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded by the existing road and tire conditions. The ESP®
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
i The ESP® will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended tire
size (컄 page 482).
! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and the ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 0
or 1) when
앫
the parking brake is being tested on a brake
test dynamometer
앫
the vehicle is being towed with the front axle
raised
Active braking action through the ESP® may
otherwise seriously damage the brake system.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 384) and
(컄 page 394).
93
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP®
Electronic traction system
Warning!
The electronic traction system is a
component of ESP®.
Switching off the ESP®
(except CLK 63 AMG)
The electronic traction system improves
the vehicle’s ability to utilize available
traction, especially under slippery road
conditions by applying the brakes to a
spinning wheel.
Warning!
When you switch off the ESP®, the
electronic traction system is still enabled.
Warning!
G
If you are driving too fast, the electronic
traction system cannot reduce the risk of an
accident.
The electronic traction system cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle.
94
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
To improve the vehicle's traction, switch
off the ESP® in driving situations where it
would be advantageous to have the drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
앫
when driving with snow chains
앫
in deep snow
앫
in sand or gravel
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not stabilize
the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a
wheel is spinning.
G
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
G
When you switch off the ESP®
앫
the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫
the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫
the traction control will still apply the
brakes to a spinning wheel
앫
the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking
앫
you cannot activate the cruise control
앫
the cruise control switch off if currently
activated
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
®
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP
warning lamp v in the instrument cluster
flashes. However, the ESP® will then not
stabilize the vehicle.
The ESP® switch is located on the center
console.
Warning!
G
When the ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers reduces.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP® switched off. This
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
1 ESP® switch
왘
With the engine running, press ESP®
switch 1 until the ESP® warning
lamp v in the instrument cluster
comes on.
Switching off the ESP®
(CLK 63 AMG only)
Warning!
G
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving. Disabling of the system will
result in the following:
앫
no restriction to engine torque
앫
loss of system supported traction
control
“ESP® Off” is designed for driving on closed
tracks when the natural oversteer and
understeer characteristics are desired and
requires a highly skilled and experienced
driver able to handle these critical driving
situations.
You could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
Please be aware of these limits when you
switch off the ESP®.
The ESP® is switched off.
95
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
When you switch off the ESP®
앫
the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫
the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫
the traction control will still apply the
brakes to a spinning wheel
앫
the ESP® operates while you are
braking
앫
you cannot activate the cruise control
앫
the cruise control switch off if currently
activated
i When the ESP® is switched off and one
or more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument cluster
flashes. However, the ESP® will then not
stabilize the vehicle.
The ESP® switch is located on the center
console.
Warning!
G
When the ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers reduces.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
1 ESP® switch
왘
With the engine running, press ESP®
switch 1 until the ESP® warning
lamp v in the instrument cluster
comes on.
The ESP® is switched off.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP® switched off. This
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Switching on the ESP®
왘
Press ESP® switch 1 until the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with ESP® switched on.
96
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
Deactivating
Anti-theft alarm system
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
With the SmartKey
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
with you and lock the vehicle. The engine
can be started by anyone with a valid
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
that is left inside the vehicle.
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
앫
a door
With KEYLESS-GO*
앫
the trunk
왘
앫
the hood
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
i Starting the engine will also deactivate the
immobilizer.
Activating
With the SmartKey
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
In case the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (e.g. a door) is immediately
closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
the vehicle is opened with the
mechanical key.
With KEYLESS-GO*
앫
someone opens a door from the inside.
왘
Turn off the engine by means of the
start/stop button (컄 page 39) on the
gear selector lever.
앫
someone opens the trunk with the
emergency release button.
왘
Open the driver’s door.
97
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
The turn signal lamps flash three times,
and an acoustic signal sounds three
times, to indicate that the alarm system is armed.
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
(컄 page 295) provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
Arming the alarm system
The indicator lamp is in the center console.
Indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after
approximately 30 seconds after arming
the alarm system.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times, and the acoustic signal do not sounds
three times (if equipped and feature activated),
one of the following elements may not be properly closed:
앫
a door
앫
the trunk
Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again.
i The alarm system will rearm automatically
after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door
nor the trunk lid was opened.
Canceling the alarm
With the SmartKey
왘
or
왘
왘
Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*.
98
왘
Unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash once, and
an acoustic signal sounds once, to
indicate that the alarm system is
disarmed.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Pull an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
Disarming the alarm system
1 Indicator lamp
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (컄 page 39).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Climate control
Automatic climate control
Audio system
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* (Coupe)
Soft top (Cabriolet)
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
99
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed in your vehicle.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions of your vehicle, this section will
be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the
basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are
given at the beginning of each segment.
For more information on locking and
unlocking, see “Getting started”
(컄 page 36) and (컄 page 59).
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
100
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
앫
the glove box
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
(컄 page 103)
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 89)
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible
for children to open a locked door from the
inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Opening a door causes its windows to
open slightly. It will fully close when the
door is shut.
! A side window will not work if it is blocked
with ice or if the battery needs charging. If you
cannot shut a door, do not force it or you could
damage the door or the side window. Fix whatever is affecting the window before trying to shut
the door.
i USA only:
i You can also open and close the windows
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(컄 page 253) and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(컄 page 257) or the soft top (컄 page 263) using
the SmartKey.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, then the batteries in the
SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
앫
Check the batteries in the SmartKey
(컄 page 108) and replace them if necessary
(컄 page 441).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 427) and the trunk
(컄 page 428).
앫
Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s
door (컄 page 428) and the trunk
(컄 page 118).
앫
Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked (컄 page 464).
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
101
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
앫
i When unlocking or locking the vehicle with
the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If you
wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust its signal
volume, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Global unlocking
왘
Press button Œ.
the central locking switch is not
activated
Global locking
왘
Press button ‹.
앫
All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
앫
An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
왘
All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫
An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫
앫
The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫
The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of
unlocking if:
앫
neither door nor trunk is opened
앫
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
102
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 100)
flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
With the trunk and both doors closed:
앫
앫
왘
Press button Πonce.
앫
All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫
An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫
The locking knob in the driver’s
door move up.
앫
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing button Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
Global unlocking
왘
Press button Πtwice.
앫
All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫
An acoustic signal sounds once.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫
The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Press button ‹.
With the trunk and both doors closed:
왘
앫
All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
Press and hold button Š until trunk
unlocks and begins to open.
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
each with remote control and a removable
mechanical key.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is checked every time you pull an outside
door handle.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks
앫
An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
앫
The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system*: To
stop the opening procedure, press button Š.
The trunk lid stops moving.
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk
The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
앫
the fuel filler flap
앫
the glove box
앫
Restoring to factory setting
왘
You can unlock and open the trunk
separately.
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) CLK coupe or 5.41 ft (1.65 m)
CLK cabriolet is required to open the
trunk lid.
Global locking
왘
Unlocking and opening the trunk
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 100)
flashes twice.
separately (컄 page 118).
The trunk can also be opened from its
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency release” (컄 page 117).
103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
(컄 page 108)
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 89)
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
104
Opening a door causes its windows to
open slightly. It will fully close when the
door is shut.
! A side window will not work if it is blocked
with ice or if the battery needs charging. If you
cannot shut a door, do not force it or you could
damage the door or the side window. Fix whatever is affecting the window before trying to shut
the door.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i You can also open and close the windows
(컄 page 250) and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(컄 page 257) or the soft top (컄 page 263) using
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then
the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
are discharged, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is
drained.
앫
앫
앫
앫
Check the batteries in the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO (컄 page 108) and replace
them if necessary (컄 page 441).
Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (컄 page 427) and the trunk
(컄 page 428).
Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s
door (컄 page 428) and the trunk
(컄 page 118).
Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked (컄 page 464).
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO*
앫
You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(컄 page 100).
앫
You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with the ‹ button).
앫
앫
앫
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the door to be
opened or the trunk lid.
앫
In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
Never store the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO together with:
앫
앫
Electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
앫
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle.
앫
All doors must be closed.
앫
The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.
앫
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
The vehicle then cannot be locked or
the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
system.
앫
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle (e.g. if passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO).
Metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil.
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
105
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫
with the starter switch position 1,
the message:
Key Not Detected
appears in the multifunction display
앫
with the engine running, the
message:
Key Not Detected
appears in the multifunction display
while driving off.
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or
change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the front passenger
seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
앫
앫
Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
vehicle.
Possibility 1:
(One SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in
the vehicle, one SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO outside the vehicle):
If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, no message appears in the multifunction display.
If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 39), you can turn it off again
with:
Possibility 2:
(One SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in
the vehicle, no SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO outside the vehicle):
When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle, the message
앫
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
Key Detected In Vehicle
앫
the SmartKey inserted in the starter
switch, when the gear selector lever is in position P
106
will appear in the multifunction display.
The vehicle will not be locked.
Factory setting
i When unlocking or locking the vehicle with
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO an acoustic signal sounds. The acoustic signal is activated at
the factory. If you wish to deactivate the feature,
or adjust its signal volume, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Global unlocking
왘
Pull an outside door handle (SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO must be near this
door).
앫
All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫
An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫
The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
앫
neither door nor trunk is opened.
앫
the central locking switch is not
activated.
i The vehicle could inadvertently be unlocked
if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle and:
앫
앫
an outside door handle is splashed with water, or
you attempt to clean an outside door handle.
Global locking
왘
Press the lock button on an outside
door handle (컄 page 62).
With the trunk and both doors closed:
앫
All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫
An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
앫
The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
앫
The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
왘
Pull the driver’s outside door handle.
앫
All turn signal lamps flash once.
Selective setting
앫
An acoustic signal sounds once.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO so when you, pull the driver’s
door handle only the driver’s door and the
fuel filler flap unlocks.
앫
The locking knob in the driver’s
door move up.
앫
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 104)
flashes twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
Global unlocking
왘
Pull the outside door handle on the passenger side.
앫
All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫
An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫
The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
107
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking
Unlocking and opening the trunk
왘
Press the lock button on an outside
door handle.
You can unlock and open the trunk separately.
With the trunk and both doors closed:
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) CLK coupe or 5.41 ft (1.65 m)
CLK cabriolet is required to open the
trunk lid.
앫
All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫
An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
왘
앫
The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automat-
앫
The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
i Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system*, you can also lock the vehicle using the
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
(컄 page 116) on the trunk lid.
Restoring to factory setting
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds until Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 104)
flashes twice.
108
Press and hold button Š until trunk
unlocks and begins to open.
ically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system*: To
stop the opening procedure, press button Š.
The trunk lid stops moving.
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (컄 page 118).
The trunk can also be opened from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency release” (컄 page 117).
Checking the batteries in the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp (컄 page 100) or
(컄 page 104) comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in
order.
! If battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 441).
You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing the ‹ or Œ
button will lock or unlock the vehicle
accordingly.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*
If you lose your SmartKey, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, or mechanical key, you
should do the following:
왘
Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO deactivated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey,
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
왘
Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
be glad to supply you with a replacement.
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open doors only when conditions are
safe to do so.
Opening a door causes its windows to
open slightly. It will fully close when the
door is shut.
! A side window will not work if it is blocked
with ice or if the battery needs charging. If you
cannot shut a door, do not force it or you could
damage the door or the side window. Fix whatever is affecting the window before trying to shut
the door.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
i If the vehicle has been centrally locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a door
from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
With the SmartKey
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
앫
Press button ‹ or Œ on the
SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO*
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 39).
컄컄
109
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
컄컄
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
inside the vehicle.
앫
Pull an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
왘
Pull on door handle 2.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
i If you hear a warning signal you have
forgotten to switch off the low beam headlamps
or the parking lamps before opening the driver’s
door.
In addition the message Switch Off Lights
appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the low beam headlamps or the parking lamps.
If the message Switch Off Lights or Remove Key appears in the multifunction display
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or
switch off the automatic headlamp mode.
! Failure to switch off the exterior lamps when
leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged
battery.
110
Opening the trunk from the outside
Opening the trunk
Warning!
G
Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
These fumes are damaging to your health.
You can open the trunk if the vehicle is stationary.
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) CLK coupe or 5.41 ft (1.65 m)
CLK cabriolet is required to open the
trunk lid.
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
1 Handle
왘
Press and hold button Š on the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* until trunk unlocks and
begins to open.
or
왘
Pull on handle 1.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*:
The vehicle must be unlocked.
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (컄 page 118).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
! Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system*: To stop the opening procedure, press button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (컄 page 118).
! Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system*: To stop the opening procedure, press
switch 1 or 2.
i The trunk can also be opened from its inside
in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency release” (컄 page 117).
i The trunk can also be opened using
Opening the trunk from the inside
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*
button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* or from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency release”
(컄 page 117).
1 Remote trunk opening switch*
2 Remote trunk closing switch*
왘
Vehicles without trunk opening/closing
system*
Press remote trunk opening switch 1
until the trunk begins to open.
The trunk opens. The indicator lamp
comes on and remains lit until the
trunk is closed.
1 Remote trunk opening switch
111
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk
Warning!
Closing the trunk from the inside
automatically*
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk from the inside using the remote trunk closing*
switch.
왘
Press the remote trunk closing*
switch 2 (컄 page 111) until the indicator lamp in the switch goes out and
the trunk lid is closed.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘
Release remote trunk closing*
switch 2.
i You can also close the trunk by hand
(컄 page 113).
112
G
Warning!
G
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
the door mounted remote trunk closing*
switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to ensure that no one is in danger of being injured.
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
To interrupt the closing procedure, release
the door mounted remote trunk closing
switch.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), in the sequence, the
upper motion the closing procedure is
stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the remote trunk opening/closing* switch
can be operated. Therefore, do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the outside
manually
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
lid opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
1 Handle
2 Handles
왘
Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
handle 1 or handles 2.
왘
Close trunk from the outside with
hands placed flat on the trunk lid.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
to open a locked door from the inside, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Warning!
i Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after
closing it (컄 page 112). All turn signal lamps
flash three times, and an acoustic signal sounds
three times, to confirm locking.
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
113
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the outside
(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicle with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk separately.
1 Trunk closing switch
왘
Press trunk closing switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.
i You can also close the trunk by hand
(컄 page 113).
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
114
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ensure that no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
앫
press trunk closing switch 1
앫
press the Š button on the SmartKey
앫
press the remote trunk opening or closing switch (on driver’s door)
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch, the trunk closing switch can
be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
i Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after
closing it (컄 page 112). All turn signal lamps
flash three times, and an acoustic signal sounds
three times, to confirm locking.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the outside
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk separately.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout,
the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the
vehicle or in the trunk.
Warning!
G
앫
press the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
removed from the vehicle, the trunk closing
switch can be operated. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
왘
Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
왘
Press trunk closing switch 1 briefly.
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ensure that no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
The trunk closes.
앫
press trunk closing switch 1
i If the vehicle was previously centrally
앫
press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch
앫
press the remote trunk opening or closing switch (on driver’s door)
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after
closing it (컄 page 112). All turn signal lamps
flash three times, and an acoustic signal sounds
three times, to confirm locking.
1 Trunk closing switch
i You can also close the trunk by hand
(컄 page 113).
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
115
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* and KEYLESS-GO, you can close the
trunk lid and lock the vehicle
simultaneously.
turn signal lamps flash three times to
confirm locking once the trunk has
closed completely. The anti-theft alarm
system is armed.
i You can also close the trunk by hand
(컄 page 113).
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout,
the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.
Warning!
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
왘
Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
왘
Press switch 1 briefly.
With all doors closed, the locking
knobs in the doors move down and the
trunk starts to close automatically. All
116
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ensure that no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around.
To stop the closing procedure, do one of the
following:
앫
press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch 1
앫
press trunk closing switch
앫
press the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO
앫
press the remote trunk opening or closing switch (on driver’s door)
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
removed from the vehicle, the trunk closing
switch can be operated. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Trunk emergency release
With the emergency release button, the
trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.
The emergency release button is located
on the inside of the trunk lid.
i The emergency release button unlocks and
i If the vehicle has previously been locked us-
opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still
or in motion.
ing the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening the
trunk from the inside using the emergency release button will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Illumination of the emergency release button:
앫
앫
The button will flash for 30 minutes
after opening the trunk.
The button will flash for 60 minutes
after closing the trunk.
i The emergency release button does not
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
앫
Press button ‹ or Œ on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫
open the trunk if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (컄 page 118).
1 Emergency release button
왘
Pull an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 39).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
inside the vehicle.
Briefly press emergency release
button 1.
The trunk unlocks and opens slightly.
왘
Push up the trunk lid to fully open.
117
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Valet locking
왘
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
i To deny any unauthorized person access to
왘
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2 and remove the mechanical
key in that position to lock the trunk.
the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehicle,
lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave
only the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* less its mechanical key with the
vehicle.
The lock is located next to the handle
above the rear license plate recess.
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
i You can only cancel the separate trunk locking mode by means of the mechanical key.
왘
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
왘
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to neutral position 1 and remove
the mechanical key in that position to
unlock the trunk.
You can now open the trunk
(컄 page 110).
1 Neutral position
2 Locked
왘
Close the trunk (컄 page 112).
왘
Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 427).
118
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk automatically lock
when the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open doors only when conditions
are safe to do so.
i The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset
threshold.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking when
the vehicle
앫
is pushed or towed
앫
is on a test stand
You can deactivate the automatic locking
mode using the control system, see “Setting automatic locking” (컄 page 166).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
Warning!
The switches are located in the center
console.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk from the inside using the central
locking or unlocking switch. This can be
useful, for example, if you want to lock the
vehicle before starting to drive.
The central locking or unlocking switch do
not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap and/or
the glove box.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
central locking switch:
앫
and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is set to factory settings, the
complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is
opened from the inside
앫
and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is set to selective settings,
only the door opened from the inside is unlocked
Locking
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
왘
If both doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
i You can open a locked door from the inside
at any time. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*, it will not unlock using the central
unlocking switch.
Press central locking switch 1.
Unlocking
왘
Press central unlocking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
119
Controls in detail
Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see
“Adjusting” (컄 page 41).
For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraints” (컄 page 81).
Front seat active head restraints
Rear seat head restraints (CLK coupe)
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Warning!
For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 41).
120
G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.
You cannot remove the active head restraints on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat.
For removal of the active head restraints
we recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Head restraint height
1 Release button
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Controls in detail
Seats
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Folding head restraints back with release button
Folding head restraints back with
switch in the center console
1 Release button
1 Rear head restraints folding switch
왘
Push release button 1.
왘
Start the engine (컄 page 51).
The head restraints will fold backward.
왘
Press switch 1 to release the head restraints.
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.
Raising
왘
Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward.
If the head restraint is fully retracted,
push release button 1 and pull the
head restraint up.
Lowering
왘
To lower the head restraint, push
release button 1 and push down on
the head restraint.
i You can also fold the head restraints back
using the switch in the center console.
The head restraints will fold backward.
121
Controls in detail
Seats
Placing rear head restraints upright
왘
Press the release button (컄 page 121)
and tilt the head restraint to the
desired position.
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.
Removing and installing rear seats
head restraints
Warning!
왘
Pull the rear head restraint forward until it locks into position.
Warning!
G
Make sure the head restraints engage when
placing them upright. Otherwise their protective function cannot be assured.
Head restraint tilt
Two different head restraint angle
positions are available.
122
G
1 Release button
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Removing rear seat head restraints
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
Installing rear head restraints
왘
Fold back head restraint (컄 page 121).
왘
Pull head restraint to its highest
position.
왘
Push release button 1 and pull out
head restraint.
왘
Insert head restraint and push it down
until it engages.
왘
Push release button 1 and adjust
head restraint to desired position.
Controls in detail
Seats
왘
Rear seat head restraints
(CLK cabriolet)
Warning!
G
Pull head restraint 1 to its highest
position.
Lowering rear head restraints with
switch in the center console
i The rear head restraints cannot be lowered
using the switch 1 when the roll bars have been
released. The roll bars need to be lowered before
the rear head restraints can be operated again
using switch 1.
앫
If the roll bars have released and the soft top
is closed, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the roll bars
lowered. Do not attempt to lower the roll
bars manually with the soft top closed. Lowering the roll bars manually with the soft top
closed may impair the function of the roll
bars.
앫
If the roll bars have released and the soft top
is open, you can lower the roll bars manually
(컄 page 431) or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the roll bars
lowered.
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the raised position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
lowering/raising operation of the head
restraints.
Raising rear head restraints
1 Rear head restraint lowering switch
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘
Push the rear head restraints lowering
switch 1.
The rear head restraints are lowered.
1 Rear seat head restraint
123
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat cushion depth
Multicontour seat*
왘
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be
continuously varied with switches on the
side of the seat after the ignition is
switched on (컄 page 40).
Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
length of your upper leg using
switch 1.
Backrest contour
왘
1 Seat cushion depth
2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Side bolster adjustment
왘
Switch on ignition (컄 page 40).
Adjust the contour of the backrest to
the desired position using switches 2
and 3.
Backrest side bolsters
왘
Adjust the backrest side bolsters so
that they provide good lateral support
using switch 4.
i If, after a period of time, the seat no longer
provides the desired contour, then repeat the adjustment procedure.
124
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating*
Both switches for the front seats are
located in the center console.
The red indicator lamps on the switch 1
show which heating level you have
selected.
Switching on seat heating
왘
Three red indicator lamps in the switch
come on.
Level
3
2
1 Seat heating switch
1
Three indicator lamps on
(highest level).
왘
왘
Continue pressing seat heating
switch 1 until desired seat heating
level is reached.
After approximately five minutes,
seat heating is automatically
switched to level 2.
Switching off seat heating
Two indicator lamps on.
왘
After approximately ten minutes,
seat heating is automatically
switched to level 1.
i If one or more of the indicator lamps on the
One indicator lamp on
(lowest level).
After approximately 20 minutes,
seat heating is automatically
switched off.
off
Press seat heating switch 1 once.
No indicator lamp on.
Press seat heating switch 1
repeatedly until all red indicator lamps
go out.
seat heater switch 1 are flashing, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers being switched on. The seat heating
switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
125
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat ventilation*
Both switches for the front seats are
located in the center console.
The blue indicator lamps in the switch 1
show which ventilation level you have
selected:
Switching on seat ventilation
왘
Three blue indicator lamps come on.
Level
왘
Press seat ventilation switch 1
repeatedly until the desired seat ventilation level is reached.
3
Three indicator lamps on
2
Two indicator lamps on
1
One indicator lamp on
i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat is
off
No indicator lamp on
automatically set to the highest level if activated
via summer opening feature (컄 page 253).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
Switching off seat ventilation
왘
1 Seat ventilation switch
Press seat ventilation switch 1.
Press seat ventilation switch 1
repeatedly until all blue indicator lamps
go out.
i If one or more of the indicator lamps on the
seat ventilation switch 1 are flashing, there is
insufficient voltage due to too many electrical
consumers being switched on. The seat ventilation switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
126
Controls in detail
Memory function
왔 Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver
should check and adjust the seat height,
seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate
control, reach and comfort. The head
restraint should also be adjusted for
proper height. See also the section on
air bags (컄 page 65) for proper seat
positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
adequate rear vision.
With the memory function you can store up
to three different configuration.
Warning!
Each stored position on the driver’s side
includes the following settings:
앫
Seat position
앫
Steering wheel position
앫
Exterior rear view mirror position
앫
Multicontour seat*: previously saved
setting
G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Each stored position on the passenger side
includes the following setting:
앫
Seat position
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2.
127
Controls in detail
Memory function
The memory button and memory position
switch are located on the door.
1 Memory button
2 Memory position switch
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
or
왘
Storing positions into memory
Recalling positions from memory
왘
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
exterior rear view mirrors to the
desired position (컄 page 42).
왘
Turn memory position switch 2 to the
desired memory position.
! Do not operate the seats using the memory
button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to
front or rear seats.
왘
Press memory button 1.
왘
Release memory button 1 and press
memory position switch 2 within
3 seconds.
All settings are stored to the selected
position.
First move the seat backrest to an upright
position.
왘
Turn memory position switch 2 to the
desired memory position.
왘
Press and hold memory position
switch 2 until the seat, steering wheel
and exterior rear view mirrors have
completely moved to the stored
positions.
i Releasing the memory position switch stops
Open the respective door and insert
the SmartKey in the starter switch.
128
movement to the stored positions immediately.
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 55)
and “Turn signals” (컄 page 56).
Exterior lamp switch
6 B Low beam headlamps or high
beam headlamps.
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive
on the other side of the road than the country
where the vehicle is registered, you must have
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
7 ‡ Front fog lamps
8 † Rear fog lamp
i If you hear a warning signal you have
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon*
headlamps:
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps monitor your
steering angle and driving speed, then
automatically shift their beams to either side to
better follow the curvature of the road ahead,
increasing usable illumination over conventional
headlamps.
5 C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
1 ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
2 ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left
one stop)
3 M Off
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 131)
4 U Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 131)
forgotten to switch off the low beam headlamps
or the parking lamps before opening the driver’s
door.
In addition the message Switch Off Lights
appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the low beam headlamps or the parking lamps.
If the message Switch Off Lights or Remove Key appears in the multifunction display
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or
switch off the automatic headlamp mode.
! Failure to switch off the exterior lamps when
leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged
battery.
129
Controls in detail
Lighting
Low beam headlamps
The low beam headlamps can be switched
on and off with the exterior lamp switch using the manual headlamp mode.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The following lamps switch on:
앫
Low beam headlamps
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light:
앫
Low beam headlamps
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
130
Warning!
G
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others,
activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
times.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U.
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button pressed once, the
tail and parking lamps, the license
plate lamps and the side marker lamps
will switch on and off depending on the
brightness of the ambient light.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
side marker lamps will switch on and
off depending on the brightness of the
ambient light.
i Canada only:
High beam headlamps are only available with the
exterior lamp switch in position B.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
Canada only
The daytime running lamp mode is
mandatory and therefore in a constant
mode.
i With the exterior lamp switch in
position M or U, you cannot switch on the
high beam headlamps.
USA only
In the USA the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated by default. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control
system, see “Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)” (컄 page 162).
The high beam flasher is available at all times.
i With the daytime running lamp mode
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B to permit activation of
the high beam headlamps.
activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position M, you cannot switch on the high
beam headlamps.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps are switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the
following lamps will switch on
additionally:
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
i With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, you cannot
switch off the low beam headlamps manually.
When the engine is running, and you shift
from a driving position to position N or P,
with the vehicle at a standstill the low
beam headlamps will switch off with a delay of 3 minutes.
When the engine is running, and you
앫
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C, the low beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the
license plate lamp and the side marker
lamps switch on.
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 129).
The high beam flasher is available at all times.
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B or U to permit
activation of the high beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, and you turn
the exterior lamp switch to position C
or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 129).
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
mode has priority over the daytime
running lamp mode.
131
Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting and night security
illumination
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the “Control system” section, see “Setting locator lighting”
(컄 page 163) and “Setting night security illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off)”
(컄 page 164).
Fog lamps
Warning!
G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding
permissible lamp operation.
i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
exterior lamp switch in position U. To switch
on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B first.
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B (컄 page 55).
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
second stop.
The front fog lamps and the rear fog
lamp switch on.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 129).
Front fog lamps
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C or B (컄 page 55).
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The front fog lamps switch on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 129).
왘
Push in the exterior lamp switch.
The front fog lamps switch off.
132
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
i Fog lamps will operate with the parking
왘
Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The rear fog lamp switches off.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Combination switch
High beam
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B (컄 page 129).
왘
Push the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 28).
왘
Combination switch
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to its original position to
switch off the high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
goes out.
High beam flasher
왘
Pull the combination switch briefly in
the direction of arrow 2.
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*
(With Bi-Xenon* headlamps only)
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
improve illumination of the area in the
direction into which you are turning.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
operate with the engine running and with
앫
the exterior lamp switch in
position B (컄 page 129)
or
앫
the exterior lamp switch in
position U (컄 page 129)
or
앫
the daytime running lamp mode
activated (컄 page 131)
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only come on in low ambient lighting conditions.
i If you are driving faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps switched
on, the corner-illuminating front fog lamps
function is not available.
133
Controls in detail
Lighting
Driving forward
i If you have switched on the turn signal for
Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
one side but turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction, the corner-illuminating front
fog lamp comes on for the side indicated by the
turn signal.
왘
Switch on the left or right turn signal
(컄 page 56), depending on whether
you are turning left or right.
The respective front fog lamp comes on
and illuminates the area in the
direction into which you are turning.
or
왘
Turn steering wheel in desired
direction.
The front fog lamp on the side of your
steering direction comes on.
134
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp remains lit
for a maximum of three minutes. Afterward, it
goes out even if the turn signal is still switched
on.
Switching off corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
The combination switch for the turn signal
resets automatically after major steering
wheel movements. This will switch off the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
where activated by switching on the left or
right turn signal.
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps tem- If the turn signal should stay on after
porarily come on, on both sides of the vehicle if
you turn the steering wheel in one direction and
then again in the other direction shortly
thereafter.
making the turn, the turn signal and the
corner-illuminating front fog lamp can be
switched off by returning the combination
switch to its original position.
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
come on automatically depending on the
steering angle, even if you did not switch on
either turn signal.
If the corner-illuminating front fog lamps came
on automatically, they will also go out
automatically depending on the steering angle.
i There may be a brief delay before the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Driving in reverse
Hazard warning flasher
Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter switch
or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle.
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position R.
The front fog lamp opposite to your
steering direction comes on.
Switching off corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
왘
The hazard warning flasher switches on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
The hazard warning flasher switch is
located on the center console.
Switching on hazard warning flasher
왘
Press hazard warning flasher
switch 1.
All turn signal lamps are flashing.
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either left or
right turn, only the respective left or right turn
signals will operate when the ignition is switched
on (컄 page 40).
Switching off hazard warning flasher
Place the gear selector lever out of
position R.
왘
The respective front fog lamp goes out.
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
again.
activated automatically, press hazard warning
flasher switch 1 once to switch it off.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
135
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
Deactivating automatic control
Activating automatic control
i The interior lighting is factory-set to auto-
왘
matic mode.
왘
1 Rear interior lighting on/off
(CLK coupe only)
2 Right front reading lamp on/off
3 Rocker switch for automatic control
system
4 Left front reading lamp on/off
! An interior lamp switched on manually does
not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged battery.
136
Press rocker switch 3 to center
position.
Press the = symbol on rocker
switch 3.
The interior lighting switch on in darkness, when you
The interior lighting remains switched
off in darkness, even when you
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
open a door
앫
open the trunk
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
open a door
앫
open the trunk
The interior lighting switches off after approximately 10 seconds, see “Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off”
(컄 page 165).
i If a door remains open, the interior lighting
switches off automatically after approximately
5 minutes.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control
Switching front interior lighting on and
off
왘
Press the W symbol on rocker
switch 3.
The front interior lighting comes on.
왘
Press rocker switch 3 to center
position to activate the automatic
control.
Switching rear interior lighting on and
off (CLK coupe only)
왘
Press button V.
The lighting in the rear passenger
compartment comes on.
왘
Press button V again.
The lighting in the rear passenger
compartment goes out.
Switching front reading lamps on and off
왘
Press the left or right button X to
switch on the desired front reading
lamp.
왘
Press the left or right button X
again to switch off the respective front
reading lamp.
Door entry lamps
For better orientation in the dark, the corresponding door entry lamps will switch on
in darkness when you open a door and the
automatic control is activated.
The door entry lamps will switch off when
the corresponding door is closed.
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for
approximately 5 minutes.
Trunk lamp
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is
opened.
If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk
lamp switches off automatically after
approximately 10 minutes.
137
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
(컄 page 28).
1 Reset button
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
앫
open a door
앫
switch on the ignition (컄 page 40)
앫
press the reset button 1
앫
switch on the exterior lamps
You can change the instrument cluster
settings in the Instrument cluster submenu
of the control system (컄 page 158).
138
Warning!
G
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
Use the reset button 1 to adjust the
illumination brightness for the instrument
cluster.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
i The instrument cluster illumination is
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also be
adjusted automatically when you switch on the
vehicle’s exterior lamps.
To brighten illumination
왘
Turn reset button 1 clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
To dim illumination
왘
Turn reset button 1 counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature indicator
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
The coolant temperature indicator is on
the right side in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 28).
warning in the multifunction display
(컄 page 406) and the red coolant warning lamp
in the instrument cluster comes on
(컄 page 383).
Warning!
앫
앫
G
Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
Resetting trip odometer
왘
Make sure you are viewing the standard display in the multifunction display (컄 page 147).
The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so
may cause serious engine damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
왘
If it is not displayed, press button è
or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears (컄 page 142).
i During severe operating conditions, e.g.
왘
Press and hold the reset button on the
instrument cluster (컄 page 138) until
the trip odometer is reset.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
139
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer
(컄 page 28) denotes excessive engine
speed.
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as
it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
Clock
In vehicles with Audio 20, the clock can be
set via the control system (컄 page 160).
i Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the time in COMAND,
refer to the separate COMAND operating
instructions.
140
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is indicated in the
multifunction display (컄 page 141).
The outside temperature sensor is located
in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or
engine heat during idling or slow driving.
This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by
comparison to a thermometer placed next
to the sensor, not by comparison to external displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button is in
position 1. The control system enables you
to
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.
i The displays for the audio systems (radio,
CD player etc.) will appear in English, regardless
of the language selected.
Warning!
G
Multifunction display
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions
permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
1 Outside temperature
2 Trip odometer
3 Current shift program mode
4 Main odometer
5 Current gear selector lever position/gear range
For more information on menus displayed
in the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(컄 page 144).
141
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel (컄 page 30).
1 Multifunction display
Operating the control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting the
volume:
Press button
æ up / to increase
ç down / to decrease
3 Telephone*:
Press button
s to take a call
to dial
to redial
t to end a call
to reject an incoming call
142
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu:
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display
Controls in detail
Control system
Depending on the selected menu
(컄 page 144), pressing the buttons on the
multifunction steering wheel will alter what
is shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, and accompanying functions or submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under Audio, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
앫
If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
앫
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the Settings... menu, instead of functions you will find a number of submenus
for calling up and changing settings. For
instructions on using these submenus, see
“Submenus in the Settings menu”
(컄 page 156).
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
143
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
144
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Commands/submenus
Menu 1
Menu 2
1
Menu 3
Menu 4
AUDIO
NAV*
Standard display
AMG
(컄 page 147)
(컄 page 148)
(컄 page 151)
(컄 page 153)
Run Flat Indicator
(Canada only)
Engine oil temperature
Selecting radio station
Show route guidance instructions, current direction traveled
Tire Pressure Monitoring
(USA only)
Vehicle supply voltage
Selecting satellite radio station*
Digital speedometer
RACETIMER
Operating CD player
Call up maintenance service
display
Overall analysis
Lap analysis
1
AMG vehicles only
Table continued on next page.
145
Controls in detail
Commands/submenus
Control system
Menu 5
Menu 6
Menu 7
Menu 8
Vehicle status message
memory1
Settings
Trip computer
TEL*
(컄 page 154)
(컄 page 155)
(컄 page 167)
(컄 page 169)
Fuel consumption statistics
since start
Load phone book
Instrument cluster submenu
Fuel consumption statistics
since the last reset
Search for name in phone book
Time/Date submenu
Call up range
Calling up vehicle malfunction, Reset to factory settings
warning and system status
messages stored in memory
Lighting submenu
Vehicle submenu
Convenience submenu
1
The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
i The headings used in the menus table are
designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those
shown in the control system displays.
The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system
you are in.
146
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu
The following functions are available:
In the standard display, the outside temperature and the trip odometer are shown
in the multifunction display.
Function
Page
Run Flat Indicator
(Canada only)
342
i You can have the digital speedometer displayed instead of the outside temperature in the
standard display. You can select the setting in
the submenu Instr. Cluster via the function
Basic Display (컄 page 159).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
(USA only)
344
Call up digital speedometer
147
Call up maintenance service 366
display
Display digital speedometer
왘
1 Outside temperature
2 Trip odometer
If you see another display, press
button è or ÿ repeatedly until the
standard display appears.
왘
Press button j or k until the
digital speedometer appears in the
multifunction display.
1 Digital Speedometer
2 Status line with outside temperature
3 Trip odometer
i You can have the digital speedometer displayed instead of the outside temperature in the
status line. You can select the setting in the submenu Instr. Cluster via the function Status
Line Display (컄 page 159).
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display and the status line appears.
Press button k or jto select
the functions in the standard display
menu.
147
Controls in detail
Control system
AMG menu
i This function is only available in AMG
왘
Press button k or j to select
the following functions in the AMG
menu:
Vehicle supply voltage
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the AMG menu appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until the
vehicle supply voltage appears in the
multifunction display.
vehicles.
The main screen of the AMG menu shows
you the gear currently engaged as well as
the engine oil temperature.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the AMG menu appears in the
multifunction display.
Function
Page
Vehicle supply voltage
148
RACETIMER
149
Overall analysis
150
Lap analysis
151
i If the engine reaches the overspeed range in
the manual shift program, the menu will be
shown in red. In addition, you will see UP next to
gear indicator 1 as a reminder to upshift.
1 Gear indicator
2 Engine oil temperature
i The engine oil temperature value and unit
flash if the engine oil temperature has not yet
reached 176°F (80°C). During this time, avoid
driving at full engine speed.
148
1 Gear indicator
2 Vehicle supply voltage
Controls in detail
Control system
Displaying intermediate time
RACETIMER
Warning!
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on
roads and in conditions where high speed
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads
is prohibited under all circumstances and
the driver is and must always remain responsible for following posted speed limits.
The RACETIMER allows you to time and
save driving stretches in hours, minutes
and seconds.
왘
왘
왘
G
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the AMG menu appears in the
multifunction display.
Press button j repeatedly until the
RACETIMER appears in the
multifunction display.
Press button ç while the timer is
running.
The intermediate time is shown for
5 seconds.
1 Gear indicator
2 RACETIMER
3 Lap
Stopping the RACETIMER
왘
The timer stops.
i You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 (컄 page 38).
i While the RACETIMER is being displayed,
you can not adjust the volume using button æ
or ç.
Starting the RACETIMER
왘
Press button æ.
The timer starts.
Press button æ.
i When you stop the vehicle and turn the
SmartKey to position 1 (컄 page 38) or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine and
do not open the driver’s door, the RACETIMER
stops timing. Timing is resumed when you switch
the ignition back on (컄 page 38) or restart the
engine (컄 page 52) and then press
the æ button.
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
i You can save up to 9 laps.
왘
Press button ç while the timer is
running.
149
컄컄
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄
The intermediate time is shown for
5 seconds.
왘
Resetting current lap
Overall analysis
왘
i These functions are only available if you
Press button ç within the next
5 seconds.
The intermediate time shown will be
saved as a lap time.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new
lap. The new lap begins to be timed as
soon as the intermediate time is called
up.
Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
왘
Press button ç.
have saved at least one lap and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the AMG menu appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until the
overall analysis appears in the
multifunction display.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
Deleting all laps
i It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
왘
Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
1 Gear indicator
2 RACETIMER
3 Best lap time
4 Lap number
왘
Press the reset button twice
(컄 page 138).
왘
Press button æ.
The timer starts. The saved laps are
deleted.
i When you turn off the engine, the
RACETIMER will be reset to “0” after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted.
150
1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER
2 Overall driving time
3 Maximum speed
4 Overall distance driven
5 Average speed
Controls in detail
Control system
Lap analysis
i These functions are only available if you
have saved at least two laps and have stopped
the RACETIMER.
i Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
왘
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the currently tuned station
appears in the multifunction display.
AUDIO menu
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the AMG menu appears in the
multifunction display.
The functions in the Audio menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until the
lap analysis appears in the
multifunction display.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message Audio Off appears in the
multifunction display.
1 Waveband setting
2 Station frequency
The following functions are available:
왘
1 Lap number
2 Lap time
3 Maximum speed
4 Lap length
5 Average speed during lap
왘
Press button k or j to see other lap analysis.
Function
Page
Selecting radio station
151
Selecting satellite radio
station*
152
Operating CD player
152
Selecting radio station
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station or the desired
stored station is found.
The station search depends on the selected setting in the Vehicle submenu
of the control system (컄 page 165).
Pressing button k or j will either start a frequency scan or select
the next stored radio station.
Turn on the radio (컄 page 216) and select radio. Vehicles with COMAND*:
Refer to separate operating instructions.
151
Controls in detail
Control system
i You can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio
(컄 page 223).
Vehicles with COMAND*:
Refer to separate operating instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the usual
manner.
Selecting satellite radio station*
The satellite radio is treated as a radio
application.
왘
Select satellite radio with the
corresponding soft key (SAT) in the
radio menu.
왘
i For more information on satellite radio operation, see “Satellite radio*” (컄 page 225).
Vehicles with COMAND*:
Refer to separate operating instructions.
Operating the CD player
i The COMAND* system and the
CD changer* can play audio CDs as well as CDs
with MP3 files.
Selecting CD track
왘
왘
1 SAT mode and preset number
2 Setting for station selection using
memory
3 Channel name or number
152
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired channel is found.
Turn on the radio and select CD
(컄 page 233) or CD changer*
(컄 page 233). Vehicles with
COMAND*: Refer to separate
operating instructions.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played appear in the multifunction display.
1 Current CD (with additional number
from 1 to 6 when running from
CD changer*)
2 Current track
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i To select a CD from the CD changer* magazine, press a number on the audio system or the
COMAND* system key pad located in the center
console.
For more information on CD operation, see
“CD mode” (컄 page 229) and for the
CD changer*, see “CD changer*”
(컄 page 233).
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting CD MP3-track (vehicles with
COMAND* and/or CD changer*)
왘
Turn on the radio and select the CD
changer* (컄 page 233) or turn on
COMAND* and select CD or
CD changer*. Vehicles with
COMAND*: Refer to separate
operating instructions.
i A CD with MP3 files insert in the
CD changer* is handled by the
audio/COMAND* system like an audio CD. Information contained on the CD with MP3 files
will not shown in the multifunction display or in
the audio/COMAND* display.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played appear in the multifunction display.
Navi* menu
The Navi menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
1 MP3 mode (vehicles with COMAND*)
2 Current track
왘
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the message Navi appears in the
multifunction display.
앫
If COMAND* is switched off, the message Navi off appears in the multifunction display.
앫
With COMAND* switched on but route
guidance not activated, the direction of
travel and, if available, the name of the
street currently traveled on appear in
the multifunction display.
앫
With COMAND* switched on and route
guidance activated, the direction of
travel and maneuver instructions appear in the multifunction display.
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i Level of information displayed will vary depending on the information contained on the CD
with MP3 files insert in the single CD player of
the COMAND* system.
To select a CD from the CD changer* magazine,
press a number on the audio system or the
COMAND* system key pad located in the center
console.
For more information on MP3, see “MP3
notes” (컄 page 230), and for operating,
see “MP3 playback” (컄 page 231)
Please refer to the COMAND* manual for
instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system*.
153
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle status message memory menu
Warning!
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the
system. Such messages appear in the
multifunction display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system recorded.
The vehicle status message memory menu
only appears if there are any messages
stored.
G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 392).
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the vehicle status message
memory appears in the multifunction
display.
If the vehicle status message memory
menu does not appear, then there are
no messages stored.
154
Vehicle status messages have been
recorded
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction
display:
1 Number of messages
왘
Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be
displayed in the order in which they
have occurred.
For malfunction and warning messages, see “Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display” (컄 page 392).
Controls in detail
Control system
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunction display when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch. With
KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine by
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button and open the driver’s door.
i The vehicle status message memory will be
cleared when you switch on the ignition
(컄 page 40). You will then only see high-priority
messages in the multifunction display
(컄 page 392).
Settings menu
In the Settings... menu there are two
functions:
앫
The function Reset to factory
settings?, with which you can reset all
the settings to the original factory
settings.
앫
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings... menu appears in
the multifunction display.
Resetting all settings
You can reset all the functions of all
submenus to the factory settings.
왘
Press the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 138) for
approximately three seconds.
The request to press the reset button
once more to confirm appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press the reset button once more.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
155
Controls in detail
Control system
i The settings you have changed will not be re- The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Resetting the functions of a submenu
set unless you confirm the action by pressing the
reset button a second time. After approximately
five seconds, the Settings... menu reappears
in the multifunction display.
For each submenu you can reset all the
functions to the factory settings.
For safety reasons, the following function is not
reset while driving:
앫
the Headlamp Mode function in the
Lighting submenu.
Submenus in the Settings menu
왘
Press button j.
The collection of the submenus
appears in the multifunction display.
Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
with button æ.
With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use button j to access the
individual functions within that submenu.
Once within the submenu, you can use
button j to move to the next function
or button k to move to the previous
function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
왘
Move to a function in the submenu.
왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 138) in
the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds.
The request to press the reset button
once more to confirm appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press the reset button once more.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
i The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the
reset button a second time. After approximately
five seconds, the Settings... menu reappears
in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
156
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following
pages.
Instrument Cluster
Time/Date
Lighting
Vehicle
Convenience
(컄 page 158)
(컄 page 160)
(컄 page 162)
(컄 page 165)
(컄 page 166)
Selecting speedometer
display mode
Setting time (hours)
Setting daytime running Selecting audio search Activate easy-entry/exit
lamp mode (USA only) function
feature
Selecting language
Setting time (minutes)
Setting locator lighting Setting automatic
locking
Selecting display (speed Setting the date (month) Setting night security
display or outside
illumination
temperature) for status
indicator
Selecting display (speed Setting the date (day)
display or outside temperature) for standard
display
Setting interior lighting
delayed shut-off
Setting the date (year)
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting speedometer display mode
Selecting language
Access the Instr. Cluster submenu via
the Settings... menu. Use the Instr.
Cluster submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Instr. Cluster submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Instr. Cluster submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Display Unit
Speed-/odometer appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Language appears in
the multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Selecting speedometer display
mode
158
Selecting language
158
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Selecting display (speed display 159
or outside temperature) for
status line
Selecting display (speed display 159
or outside temperature) for
standard display
158
왘
Press button æ or ç to set
speedometer unit to KM or Miles.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button æ or ç to select
the language to be used for the
multifunction display messages.
Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for status line
Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for standard display
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Instr. Cluster submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Instr. Cluster submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Status Line Display appears in the multifunction
display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Basic Display
appears in the multifunction display.
Available languages:
앫
German
앫
English
앫
French
앫
Italian
앫
Spanish
앫
Dutch
앫
Danish
앫
Swedish
앫
Portuguese
앫
Turkish
앫
Russian (Canada only)
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
왘
Press button æ or ç to select
the desired setting.
Press button æ or ç to select
the display mode shown in the basic
display.
i You will see the status line when you have
called up a different display from the standard
display.
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu
Setting time (hours)
Access the Time/Date submenu via the
Settings... menu. Use the Time/Date
submenu to change the instrument cluster
display settings.
This function can only be seen in vehicles
with audio system.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Setting the time (hours)
160
Setting the time (minutes)
160
Setting the date (month)
161
Setting the date (day)
161
Setting the date (year)
162
i Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the time in COMAND,
refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Time - Hours Press
R To Confirm appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the hour
setting.
i The Time/Date
submenu is not shown in
vehicles with COMAND*.
왘
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (컄 page 138) to confirm.
The hour is set and stored.
Setting time (minutes)
This function can only be seen with audio
system.
i Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the time in COMAND,
refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Time - Minute(s)
Press R To Confirm appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the minutes
setting.
왘
160
Press button æ or ç to set the
hour.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
minutes.
왘
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (컄 page 138) to confirm.
The minutes are set and stored.
Setting the date (month)
Setting the date (day)
This function can only be seen with audio
system.
This function can only be seen with audio
system.
i Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the date in COMAND,
refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions.
i Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the date in COMAND,
refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Set Date Month
appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Set Date Day
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the month
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
month.
The selection marker is on the day
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
day.
161
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting the date (year)
Lighting submenu
This function can only be seen with audio
system.
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings... menu. Use the Lighting
submenu to change the lamp and lighting
settings on your vehicle.
i Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the date in COMAND,
refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions.
왘
왘
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)
162
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Set Date Year
appears in the multifunction display.
Setting locator lighting
163
Setting night security
illumination
164
The selection marker is on the year
setting.
Setting interior lighting delayed
shut-off
165
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
i This function is not available in countries
where the daytime running lamp mode is
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Headlamp Mode appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
year.
162
Press button æ or ç to select
manual operation (Manual) or daytime
running lamp mode (Constant).
Controls in detail
Control system
With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position M or U, the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the
engine is running.
In low ambient light conditions the
following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
For more information on the daytime running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 129).
i For safety reasons, resetting the Lighting
submenu to factory settings (컄 page 156) while
driving will not deactivate the daytime running
lamp mode.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Cannot be completely reset to factory
settings while driving.
Setting locator lighting
왘
With the locator lighting feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U, the following lamps will
switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked using button Πon the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened.
If you do not open a door after unlocking
the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
will switch off automatically after
approximately 40 seconds.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Surround Light.
Function appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the locator lighting function On or Off
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is
activated.
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
163
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)
Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to remain on for
15 seconds during darkness after exiting
the vehicle and closing all doors.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Headlamps Delayed
Shut-off appears in the multifunction
display.
With the headlamps delayed shut-off
feature activated and the exterior lamp
switch in position U before the engine
is turned off, the following lamps will
switch on when the engine is turned off:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
If after turning off the engine you do not
open a door or do not close an opened
door, the lamps will automatically switch
off after 60 seconds.
왘
Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
왘
Then turn it to position 2 and back
to 0.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The headlamps delayed shut-off
feature is deactivated. It will reactivate
as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in
the starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
On or Off.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the
engine.
The headlamps delayed shut-off
feature is activated.
164
You can temporarily deactivate the headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever
(컄 page 40).
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
Vehicle submenu
Use this function to set whether you would
like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
Settings... menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to make general vehicle settings.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Interior Lighting
Delayed Shut-off appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the interior lighting delayed shut-off
feature On or Off.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Selecting audio search function 165
Setting automatic locking
166
Selecting audio search function
Use of the Audio Search Function to
select a radio station (컄 page 151) will
enable you to start a frequency scan
(Frequenc.) or select a radio station stored
in memory (Memory).
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Audio Search Function appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
audio search function to Frequenc.
or Memory.
To select a radio station, see “Selecting radio station” (컄 page 151).
165
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting automatic locking
Convenience submenu
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the
automatic central locking system
activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
Access the Convenience submenu via the
Settings... menu. Use the Convenience
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
(컄 page 45).
Function
Page
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu.
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature
166
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Automatic Door
Locking appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the automatic central locking On or Off.
166
submenu to change the settings for the
easy-entry/exit convenience feature.
Warning!
G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
the following:
앫
Move steering wheel adjustment stalk
(컄 page 45).
앫
Press the memory position switch
(컄 page 128).
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Convenience submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Easy-entry Function appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the easy-entry/exit feature On or Off.
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle.
The following information is available:
Function
Page
Fuel consumption statistics
since start
167
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
168
Resetting fuel consumption
statistics
168
Distance to empty
168
Fuel consumption statistics since start
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip computer menu appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message From Start appears
in the multifunction display.
1 Distance driven since start
2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
i All statistics stored from the last engine
start will be reset approximately four hours after
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
167
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption since last reset
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
Distance to empty
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip computer menu appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message From Reset appears
in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip computer menu appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Range: appears in
the multifunction display.
왘
왘
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last
reset
168
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip computer menu appears in the
multifunction display.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the reading that you want to reset
appears in the multifunction display.
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 138) until
the value is reset to 0.
The calculated remaining driving range
based on the current fuel tank level
appears in the multifunction display. If
the remaining fuel in the tank is sufficiently low, a fuel pump is shown instead of the range.
Controls in detail
Control system
TEL* menu
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic
conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a
vehicle.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system,
possibly resulting in an accident and /or
personal injury.
You can use the functions in the Tel menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘
Switch on the telephone and audio or
COMAND*.
왘
Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
message Tel appears in the
multifunction display.
Which messages will appear in the
multifunction display depends on whether
your telephone is switched on or off:
앫
If the telephone is off, the message
Tel Off appears in the multifunction
display.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
169
Controls in detail
Control system
앫
If the telephone is on:
Answering a call
Dialing a number from the phone book
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the multifunction display is empty.
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the multifunction display you will see the
message, or if available, the caller ID
(name and number):
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, the message READY appears in
the multifunction display.
왘
Press button s.
You have answered the call. The
duration of the call appears in the
multifunction display.
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can
operate it using the control system.
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
call
왘
170
Press button t.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message Tel appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take several minutes. The
message Please Wait appears in the
multifunction display.
When the message Please Wait
disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
The stored names are displayed in
ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
왘
Press button s.
Redialing
The system dials the selected phone
number.
The control system stores the most
recently dialed phone numbers. This
eliminates the need to search through
your entire phone book.
앫
If the connection is successful and
this feature is supported by your
network provider, the name of the
party you are calling (if stored in
your phone book) and the duration
of the call will appear in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message Tel appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button s.
The first number in the redial memory
appears in the multifunction display.
1 Name from phone book
왘
i If you press and hold button j or k
for longer than one second, the system scrolls
rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by pressing t.
앫
If no connection is made, the
control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
i If you do not want to use the telephone,
press button t.
왘
Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
171
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an
automatic transmission, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 51).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its shift program.
i During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic
converter to heat up more quickly to operating
temperature.
Warning!
G
Make sure absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure the pedals still have
sufficient clearance.
Gear selector lever
The gear selector lever is located on the
lower part of the center console.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between or beneath the pedals. You could then no longer
brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
i The current gear selector lever position P,
R, N or D appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 174).
172
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
An additional indication of the current gear
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate.
Shifting procedure
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
앫
앫
gear selector lever position D
(컄 page 174) with gear ranges
(컄 page 177)
the selected program mode (C/S)
(컄 page 178)
or
(M/C/S) (CLK 63 AMG only)
(컄 page 182)
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 176)
앫
the vehicle speed
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel when driving off
on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When the gear selector lever is in drive
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by:
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
The indicators come on when you activate
a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or
opening a door) and go out after approximately 15 minutes.
173
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever positions
The current gear selector lever position
appears in the multifunction display.
1 Current gear selector lever position
Effect
ì Park position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in park
position P only when vehicle is
stopped. The park position is not
intended to serve as a brake
when the vehicle is parked.
Rather, the driver should always
set the parking brake in addition
to placing the gear selector lever
in park position P to secure the
vehicle.
Effect
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
park position P. With the
SmartKey removed, the gear
selector lever is locked in park
position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in park position P
(컄 page 429).
í Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
174
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Effect
ë Neutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage neutral
position N while driving.
If the ESP® is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to neutral position N only if the vehicle
is in danger of skidding, e.g. on
icy roads.
ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
reason with gear selector lever in neutral
position N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle without shifting
into park position P is dangerous. Also, park
position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving,
possibly hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake (컄 page 59) in
addition to shifting to park position P.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could move the
gear selector lever from park position P,
which could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Getting out of your vehicle without taking
the above measurements to secure it is
dangerous.
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
175
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Driving tips
Stopping
Maneuvering
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
When you maneuver in tight areas,
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
Accelerator position
왘
Leave the transmission in gear.
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
왘
Hold the vehicle with the brake.
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
When you stop for a longer period of time
with the engine idling and/or on a hill:
More throttle
Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
transmission shifts into a lower gear.
왘
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
176
왘
Set the parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
왘
Control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes.
왘
Accelerate gently.
왘
Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
Working on the vehicle
Warning!
G
When working on the vehicle, set the
parking brake and move gear selector lever
to park position P. Otherwise the vehicle
could roll away.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
The selected gear range appears in the
multifunction display.
With the gear selector lever in drive
position D and driving in program mode C
or S (컄 page 178), you can select a gear
range for the automatic transmission to
operate within.
è The transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
ç The transmission shifts through
Gear selector lever (컄 page 179):
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the gear selector lever to the right (D+).
Steering wheel gearshift control*
(컄 page 180):
You can limit the gear range by pulling the
left gearshift paddle on the steering wheel
gearshift control, and reverse the gear
range limit by pulling the right gearshift
paddle on the steering wheel gearshift
control.
Effect
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving
1 Current gear range
Effect
ï The transmission shifts through
sixth gear only.
î The transmission shifts through
fifth gear only.
é The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
æ The transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
177
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic shift program
The selected program mode appears in the
multifunction display.
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
Program mode selector switch
(CLK 63 AMG only)
Program mode selector switch
C Comfort
For comfort driving
S Sport
For standard driving
M Manual
For manual gear shifting
(컄 page 182)
1 Selected program mode (comfort,
sport, or manual (CLK 63 AMG only))
C Comfort
For standard driving
S Sport
For sporty driving
! Never change the program mode when the
gear selector lever is out of park position P. This
could result in a change of driving characteristics
for which you may not be prepared.
i The last selected program mode (C or S) is
switched on when the engine is restarted.
178
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왘
Press program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the letter of the
desired program mode appears in the
multifunction display.
Select C for comfort driving
(CLK 63 AMG: for standard driving):
앫
앫
앫
The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
Select S for standard driving
(CLK 63 AMG: for sporty driving):
앫
The vehicle starts out in first gear.
앫
Upshifts occur later.
Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting
With the gear selector lever in drive position D and driving in program mode C or S,
you can limit or extend the gear range.
If your vehicle is equipped with manual
shift program M, you can use the gear
selector lever to manually shift the gears.
i For information on using the gear selector
lever in program mode M, see “Manual shift program CLK 63 AMG” (컄 page 182).
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel when driving off
on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Limiting gear range
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the transmission (컄 page 177).
i To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
gear if the engine’s max. speed would be
exceeded.
The following instructions describe operation of the gear selector lever when driving
in the automatic program mode C or S.
179
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Extending gear range
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the transmission.
i If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
Canceling gear range limit
왘
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
the multifunction display (컄 page 174).
The transmission will shift from the
current gear range directly to gear
range D.
180
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D- direction.
The transmission will automatically
select the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more
gears.
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting*
With the gear selector lever in drive
position D and driving in program mode C
or S, you can limit or extend the gear
range.
If your vehicle is equipped with manual
shift program M, you can use the steering
wheel gearshift control to manually shift
the gears.
i For information on using the steering wheel
gearshift control in program mode M, see “Manual shift program CLK 63 AMG” (컄 page 182).
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel when driving off
on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Limiting gear range
Warning!
Extending gear range
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
Gearshift paddles
(example illustration CLK 550)
1 Left shift paddle: limiting gear range or
downshift (in program mode M)
2 Right shift paddle: extending gear
range or upshift (in program mode M)
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
gearshift paddles when the gear selector lever is
in position P, N or R.
The following instructions describe operation of the steering wheel gearshift control
when driving in the automatic program
mode C or S.
왘
Briefly pull left shift paddle 1.
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the transmission (컄 page 177).
i To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
gear if the engine’s max. speed would be
exceeded.
왘
Briefly pull right shift paddle 2.
The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the
transmission.
i If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
Canceling gear range limit
왘
Pull and hold right shift paddle 2
until D reappears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 174).
The transmission will shift from the
current gear range directly to gear
range D.
181
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
Pull and hold left shift paddle 1.
The transmission will automatically
select the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more
gears.
Manual shift program CLK 63 AMG
In addition to the automatic shift
program C or S, your vehicle is equipped
with the manual shift program M.
In the manual program mode M,
system-controlled automatic gearshifting
is switched off and you need to change the
gears by manually upshifting or downshifting using the steering wheel gearshift
paddles (컄 page 181) or the gear selector
lever.
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel when driving off
on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
182
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
Program mode selector switch
M Manual
For manual gear shifting
C Comfort
For standard driving
S Sport
For sporty driving
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
The selected program mode appears in the
multifunction display (컄 page 178).
i For information on automatic program
modes C or S, see “Automatic shift program”
(컄 page 178), “Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting” (컄 page 179), and “Steering wheel
gearshift control one-touch gearshifting*”
(컄 page 180).
Activating manual shift program
왘
Press program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the M for manual program mode M appears in the multifunction display.
The transmission switches to the
manual program mode M. Automatic
shifting is switched off. The gear range
is not limited.
You can change the gears manually when
the gear selector lever is in drive
position D. You can upshift or downshift
through the gears in succession.
i The manual program mode M will not be
stored. When the engine is turned off with the
manual program mode M selected, the transmission will go to the automatic program mode
(C or S) when the engine is restarted.
Upshifting
! In the manual program mode M, the transmission will not upshift, even if the engine has
reached its overrevving range. Shift up to the
next gear before the engine has reached its overrevving range. Make absolutely certain that the
engine speed does not reach the red marking on
the tachometer (컄 page 28). Otherwise the
engine could be damaged which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
If, instead of the manual program mode
symbol M, the p symbol appears in the
multifunction display (컄 page 178), shift to
the next higher gear. The fuel supply will
otherwise be interrupted to prevent the
engine from overrevving.
If you are driving in the manual program
mode M, upshift indicator 2 in the multifunction display advises you to upshift before the engine reaches the overspeed
range. Thus you can drive at the maximum
engine speed for each gear without overrevving the engine.
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
or
왘
Briefly pull right shift paddle 2
(컄 page 181).
1 Gear indicator
2 Upshift indicator
컄컄
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
183
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
컄컄왘
Shift to the next higher gear.
i When you brake or stop, the transmission
The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevving.
shifts down to a gear from which you can easily
accelerate or take off.
Using the kickdown when driving in the
manual program mode M is not possible.
Downshifting
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
or
왘
Briefly pull left shift paddle 1
(컄 page 181).
The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.
184
Kickdown
Deactivating manual shift program
왘
Press the program mode selector
switch (컄 page 182) repeatedly
until C or S appears in the multifunction
display.
or
왘
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in limp-home (emergency
operation) mode. In this mode only second
gear and reverse gear can be selected.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to
position D (for second gear) or
position R.
왘
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Restart the engine.
The transmission will go to the
automatic program mode (C or S).
The manual program mode M is not
stored.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔 Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers,
see “Windshield wipers” (컄 page 56).
Headlamp cleaning system*
The button is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
i The headlamps will automatically be
Rear view mirrors
cleaned when you have
앫
switched on the headlamps
and
앫
operated the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid fifteen times
For more information on setting the rear
view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 47).
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
position
When you switch off the ignition, the counter
resets.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 496).
1 Headlamp washer button
1 Lever
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
왘
Press button 1.
Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position
by moving lever 1 towards the windshield.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
185
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors*
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
앫
the ignition is switched on (컄 page 40),
and
앫
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror.
The rear view mirror will not react if
앫
reverse gear R is engaged
앫
the interior lighting is turned on
186
Warning!
G
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the rear window sun
shade* is in raised position, or if the wind
screen is installed.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirror in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
왘
Swing sun visor 4 down when you
experience glare.
1 Vanity mirror lamp
2 Vanity mirror cover
3 Mounting
4 Sun visor
왘
To use the illuminated vanity mirror, lift
up vanity mirror cover 2.
i If sun visor 4 is disengaged from
mounting 3 with vanity mirror cover 2 open,
vanity mirror lamp 1 will switch off.
If sunlight enters through a side window:
왘
Disengage sun visor from mounting 3.
왘
Pivot sun visor to the side.
The sun visors are extendable.
왘
Adjust the sun visors by pushing or
pulling in the direction of the arrows.
! Close vanity mirror cover 2 (if open) before
you disengage the sun visor 4 from
mounting 3 and pivot it to the side.
187
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window sunshade*
(CLK coupe: Canada only)
Raising the sunshade
왘
Press switch 1 briefly.
The sunshade is raised completely.
The switch is located in the center console.
Stopping the raising procedure
왘
Press switch 1 again.
The sunshade stops.
Lowering the sunshade
왘
Press switch 1 briefly.
Warning!
G
When operating the rear window sunshade,
make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the raising or lowering
procedure.
The raising or lowering procedure can be
immediately halted by briefly pressing the
switch 1.
Briefly press switch 1 again to raise or lower the rear window sunshade completely.
The sunshade is lowered completely.
1 Rear window sunshade switch
! Make sure the movement of the rear window sunshade is not restricted by objects on the
rear window shelf. Otherwise, the sunshade or
the objects could be damaged.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against the window frame.
188
Stopping the lowering procedure
왘
Press switch 1 again.
The sunshade stops.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the
defroster as soon as the rear window is
clear. The defroster is automatically
deactivated after approximately
6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on
the outside temperature.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
Warning!
G
왘
Press button F or 1 in the
climate control panel (컄 page 191) or
automatic climate control panel
(컄 page 201).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
! If the rear window defroster switches off too
soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, this
means that too many electrical consumers are
operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear
window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
rear window defroster automatically switches on
again.
Press button F or 1 again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before
driving. Visibility could otherwise be
impaired, endangering you and others.
189
Controls in detail
Climate control
CLK 350 Canada
190
Controls in detail
Climate control
Item
Item
1 Left side air vent, adjustable
1 Air volume control
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for center air vents
2 Left side temperature control
3 Right side air vent, adjustable
4 Air distribution control
4 Climate control panel
5 Rear window defroster
5 Right center air vent, adjustable
6 AC cooling on/off
6 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side center air vent
7 Air distribution and air volume
(automatic mode)
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side center air vent
8 Air recirculation
8 Left center air vent, adjustable
3 Right side temperature control
9 Front defroster
i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for the side air vents and center air vents to the
middle position.
191
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate the climate control system in either the
automatic or manual mode. The system
cools or heats the interior depending on
the selected interior temperature and the
current outside temperature.
Warning!
G
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature).
This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air
vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the
air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution control (컄 page 191) to direct the air to
air vents in the vehicle interior that are not
in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
192
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
Warning!
G
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume to
the interior and the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others. Have a clogged filter replaced as
soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(컄 page 198).
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the
air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear
window.
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off, see “Summer opening
feature” (컄 page 253). The climate control will
then adjust the interior temperature to the set
value much faster.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Warning!
G
When the climate control is switched off, the
outside air supply and circulation are also
switched off. Only choose this setting for a
short time. Otherwise the windows could
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering
you and others.
Deactivating
왘
Set air volume control 1 (컄 page 191)
to position 0.
Reactivating
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
왘
Set air volume control 1 (컄 page 191)
to any speed.
왘
i When operating the climate control system
Use temperature controls 2 and 3
(컄 page 191) to separately adjust the
air temperature on each side of the
passenger compartment.
in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to
adjust the temperature, air volume and air
distribution.
The temperature of the vehicle interior
is adjusted automatically.
Operating the climate control system
in automatic mode
Deactivating the climate control
system
In automatic mode, the dehumidify function is
switched on when the system is cooling. If necessary, this function can be switched off by
pushing the 2 button.
Activating
왘
Press button U (컄 page 191) while
the engine is running.
Deactivating
왘
Press button U (컄 page 191) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The automatic operation of air volume and air distribution switches off.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
193
Controls in detail
Climate control
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 2 and 3
(컄 page 191) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
The climate control will adjust to the set
temperature as fast as possible.
Increasing
왘
Turn temperature control 2
and/or 3 (컄 page 191) slightly clockwise.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air
temperature.
i If you turn the temperature control fully
clockwise for one side of the vehicle, you are increasing the temperature for the other side of
the vehicle as well.
194
Decreasing
왘
Turn temperature control 2
and/or 3 (컄 page 191) slightly
counterclockwise.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air
temperature.
i If you turn the temperature control fully
counterclockwise for one side of the vehicle, you
are decreasing the temperature for the other
side of the vehicle as well.
Adjusting air distribution
Use air distribution control 4
(컄 page 191) to adjust the air distribution.
The following symbols are located on the
controls:
Symbol
Function
a
Directs air through the center,
side and rear passenger
compartment air vents
Z
Directs air to the windshield
and the side defroster vents
b
Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
Y
Directs air to the footwells
Controls in detail
Climate control
왘
Press button U (컄 page 191).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The automatic air distribution is
switched off. The air distribution is
controlled according to the selected
control setting.
왘
Turn thumbwheels 2, 6 and 7
(컄 page 190) upward.
The side air vents 1 and 3 and center air vents 5 and 8 are open.
Closing center and side air vents
왘
Front defroster
Six blower speeds are available.
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
왘
Turn thumbwheels 2, 6 and 7
(컄 page 190) downward.
The side air vents 1 and 3 and center air vents 5 and 8 are closed.
Press button U (컄 page 191).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The automatic air volume control
is switched off. The air volume is controlled according to the currently
selected control setting.
Turn air distribution control 4
(컄 page 191) to the desired symbol.
Opening center and side air vents
왘
Adjusting air volume
왘
Use the air volume control 1
(컄 page 191) to adjust the air volume.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear again.
Activating
왘
Press button P or 0
(컄 page 191).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning switches
automatically to the following functions:
앫
cooling on to dehumidify
앫
maximum blowing and heating
power
앫
air flows onto the windshield and
the front side windows
앫
the air recirculation mode is
switched off
195
Controls in detail
Climate control
i If you have switched on the defrost function
using the P or 0 button, you cannot
make any other settings.
Deactivating
왘
Press button P or 0
(컄 page 191) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
i The cooling remains switched on.
Windshield fogged on the outside
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield is clear again.
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 56).
If the automatic mode of the climate control is switched off:
왘
Turn air distribution control 4
to a or Y (컄 page 191).
196
Air recirculation mode
i The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e.g. before driving
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when
the air recirculation mode is automatically
switched on.
A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.
Deactivating
Warning!
G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 198) is activated, or
press button P or 0.
Activating
왘
Press button , (컄 page 191).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
왘
Press button , (컄 page 191).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:
앫
after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
below approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
turned off
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air recirculation mode with convenience closing or opening feature
Warning!
G
Never operate the side windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe) if there is
the possibility of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure.
When using the air recirculation mode with
convenience closing feature, should the upward movement of a window be blocked by
some obstructions including but not limited
to arms, hands, fingers. etc., the automatic
reversal feature will not operate.
In the event that the procedure causes
potential danger, the closing of the side
windows can be immediately halted by
releasing the , button or by pressing or
pulling the respective window switch.
CLK coupe:
The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof* can
be immediately halted by releasing the ,
button or by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof*
switch in the overhead control panel in any
direction.
Convenience closing
왘
Press and hold button ,
(컄 page 191) until the windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe) are
closed or have reached the desired position. The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air recirculation mode is
activated.
Convenience opening
왘
Press and hold button ,
(컄 page 191) until the windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe) have
return to their previous position or they
have reached the desired position. The
indicator lamp on the button goes out.
The air recirculation mode is
deactivated.
i A side window or the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(CLK coupe) will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position
using the respective side window switch or
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe) switch after it
was closed with button ,. A side window or
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe) that was
moved will remain in its current position if
button , is used to re-open the remaining
side windows or tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK
coupe).
197
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating
Air conditioning
The cooling function, is only operational
when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
thus preventing the windows from fogging
up.
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i Condensation may drip out from underneath
The cooling function switches off after
a short delay.
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction.
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
198
Press button 2 (컄 page 191).
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press button 2 (컄 page 191) again.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning uses the
refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free
of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone
layer.
! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned
itself off.
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents
The air vents for the rear passenger
compartment are located in the rear
center console.
Adjusting air distribution
왘
The air conditioning for the rear passenger
compartment is controlled via the climate
control panel (컄 page 191).
Push the slide for the left center
vent 2 or right center vent 3 to the
left, right, up or down.
The air flow is directed in the corresponding direction.
i The temperature at the center air vents 2
i For draft-free ventilation, move the slider for
and 3 for the rear passenger compartment
(컄 page 199) is the same as at the dashboard
center air vents.
the center air vents 2 and 3 upward.
Adjusting air volume
왘
1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents
2 Left center air vent
3 Right center air vent
Turn thumbwheel 1 to the left or right.
The air volume is increased or
decreased.
199
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Except CLK 350 Canada
200
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Item
Item
1 Left side air vent, adjustable
3 Temperature control, left, raising
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for center air vents
4 Display
3 Right side air vent, adjustable
6 Temperature control, right, raising
4 Automatic climate control panel
7 Rear window defroster
5 Right center air vent, adjustable
8 Right side air distribution control
6 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side center air vent
5 Air volume control, raising
USA only
9 Charcoal filter
a AC cooling on/off
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side center air vent
Residual heat/ventilation
(Canada only)
8 Left center air vent, adjustable
b Temperature control, right, lowering
i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
c Air volume control, lowering
for the center air vents and side air vents to the
middle position.
d Temperature control, left, lowering
e Air recirculation
Canada only
Item
1 Left side air distribution control
f Automatic climate control on/off
(complete system)
g Air distribution and air volume
(automatic mode)
2 Front defroster
201
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the automatic climate control system in either the automatic or manual
mode. The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior
temperature and the current outside
temperature.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate
control, the air that enters the passenger
compartment through the air vents can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate
area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient
distance between unprotected parts of the
body and the air vents. If necessary, use the
air distribution controls (컄 page 201) to
direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
202
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air
enters the passenger compartment
through the air distribution system.
Warning!
G
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will
reduce the air volume to the interior and the
windows could fog up, impairing visibility
and endangering you and others. Have a
clogged filter replaced as soon as possible
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(컄 page 210).
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for
heating and cooling given on the following
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the
air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear
window.
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off, see “Summer opening
feature” (컄 page 253). The automatic climate
control will then adjust the interior temperature
to the set value much faster.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating the automatic climate
control system
Warning!
G
When the automatic climate control is
switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
windows could fog up, impairing visibility
and endangering you and others.
Operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode
i When operating the climate control system
in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to
adjust the temperature, air volume and air
distribution.
In automatic mode, the dehumidify function is
switched on when the system is cooling. If necessary, this function can be switched off by
pushing the button 2 or 9 (컄 page 201).
Deactivating
왘
Press button ´ (컄 page 201).
Activating
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
왘
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
왘
Press button ´ (컄 page 201).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The previous settings are once
again in effect.
왘
i You can switch the automatic climate control system on and off for each side of the
passenger compartment as desired.
Reactivating
1 Temperature, left
2 Blower speed
3 Temperature, right
The temperature of the vehicle interior
is adjusted automatically.
Press button U (컄 page 201) while
the engine is running.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
Use temperature controls 3
and d or 6 and b (컄 page 201) to
separately adjust the air temperature
on each side of the passenger compartment.
Deactivating
왘
Press button U (컄 page 201) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The automatic operation of air volume and air distribution switches off.
203
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 3 and d for
the left side or 6 and b for the right side
(컄 page 201) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
The automatic climate control will adjust
to the set temperature as fast as possible.
204
Increasing
Decreasing
왘
왘
Press and hold temperature button 3
and/or 6 (컄 page 201) until the desired temperature appears in the
display 4 (컄 page 201).
Press and hold temperature button b
and/or d (컄 page 201) until the desired temperature appears in the
display 4 (컄 page 201).
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
i If you increase the temperature for one side
i If you decrease the temperature for one side
of the vehicle to the highest adjustable value
then you will see the message HI in the display.
This also increases the temperature for the other
side of the vehicle.
of the vehicle to the lowest adjustable value then
you will see the message LO in the display. This
also decreases the temperature for the other
side of the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Adjusting air distribution
Use the air distribution controls 1 and 8
(컄 page 201) to separately adjust the air
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are
located on the controls:
Symbol
Function
Z
Directs air to the windshield
and the side defroster vents
b
Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
Y
a
Directs air to the footwells
왘
Turn air distribution control 1 or 8
(컄 page 201) to the desired symbol.
Opening center and side air vents
왘
The indicator lamp on the button U
goes out.
The automatic air distribution is
switched off. The air distribution is
controlled according to the selected
control setting.
i You can also turn the air distribution control
to a position between two symbols.
Turn thumbwheels 2, 6 and 7
(컄 page 200) upward.
The center air vents 5 and 8 and side
air vents 1 and 3 (컄 page 200) are
open.
Closing center and side air vents
왘
Turn thumbwheels 2, 6 and 7
(컄 page 200) downward.
The center air vents 5 and 8 and side
air vents 1 and 3 (컄 page 200) are
closed.
Directs air through the center,
side and rear passenger
compartment air vents
205
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Adjusting air volume
Front defroster
Use button U (컄 page 201) for automatic mode or air volume controls or Q (컄 page 201) to adjust air volume
manually.
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
Seven blower speeds are available.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
왘
windshield or the side windows are clear again.
Press button to decrease
or Q (컄 page 201) to increase air
volume to the desired level.
The indicator lamp on the button U
goes out.
The automatic air distribution remains
switched on.
using the P or 0 button, you cannot
make any other settings.
Deactivating
왘
왘
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
Press button P or 0
(컄 page 201).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
앫
cooling on to dehumidify
앫
maximum blowing and heating
power
앫
air flows onto the windshield and
the front side windows
앫
the air recirculation mode is
switched off
Press button P or 0
(컄 page 201) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Activating
The air conditioning switches
automatically to the following functions:
206
i If you have switched on the defrost function
i The cooling remains switched on.
Windshield fogged on the outside
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield is clear again.
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 56).
If the automatic mode of the automatic climate control is switched off:
왘
Turn air distribution control 1 or 8
to a or Y (컄 page 201).
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
Air recirculation mode
If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U (컄 page 201) and there is a
high need for cooling, the display
“MAXCOOL” appears.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e.g. before driving
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
i The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when side windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof* or soft top are
closed).
The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when
the air recirculation mode is automatically
switched on.
A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.
Deactivating
Warning!
G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 210) is activated, or
press button P or 0.
Activating
왘
왘
Press button , (컄 page 201).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:
앫
after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
below approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
turned off
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
Press button , (컄 page 201).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
207
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air recirculation mode with convenience closing or opening feature
Warning!
G
Never operate the side windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe) if there is
the possibility of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure.
When using the air recirculation mode with
convenience closing feature, should the upward movement of a window be blocked by
some obstructions including but not limited
to arms, hands, fingers. etc., the automatic
reversal feature will not operate.
In the event that the procedure causes
potential danger, the closing of the side
windows can be immediately halted by
releasing the , button or by pressing or
pulling the respective window switch.
208
CLK coupe:
The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof* can
be immediately halted by releasing the ,
button or by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof*
switch in the overhead control panel in any
direction.
Convenience closing
왘
Press and hold button ,
(컄 page 201) until the windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe) are
closed or have reached the desired position. The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air recirculation mode is
activated.
Convenience opening
왘
Press and hold button ,
(컄 page 201) until the windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe) have
return to their previous position or they
have reached the desired position. The
indicator lamp on the button goes out.
The air recirculation mode is
deactivated.
i A side window or the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(CLK coupe) will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position
using the respective side window switch or
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe) switch after it
was closed with button ,. A side window or
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe) that was
moved will remain in its current position if
button , is used to re-open the remaining
side windows or tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK
coupe).
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Charcoal filter
i If you press and hold button e, the side
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* will close.
An activated charcoal filter markedly
reduces bad odors and removes pollutants
from air entering the passenger compartment. The charcoal filter can be activated
or deactivated.
The system switches automatically to the
air recirculation mode, if the
앫
charcoal filter is switched on
앫
carbon monoxide (CO) or nitrogen
oxide (NOX) concentration of the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level
i The automatic air recirculation mode does
not function if the A/C (indicator lamp on
button 2 or 9 not lit) mode is deactivated, or if the outside temperature has fallen
below 41°F (5°C).
Activating
왘
Press button e (컄 page 201).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
i The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on the inside,
or if the passenger compartment needs to be
quickly heated or cooled down.
Warning!
G
Never operate the side windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe) if there is
the possibility of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure.
When using the air recirculation mode with
convenience closing feature, should the upward movement of a window be blocked by
some obstructions including but not limited
to arms, hands, fingers. etc., the automatic
reversal feature will not operate.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by
releasing the e button or by pressing or
pulling the respective window switch.
CLK coupe:
The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof* can
be immediately halted by releasing the e
button or by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof*
switch in the overhead control panel in any
direction.
Deactivating
왘
Press button e (컄 page 201).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i If you press and hold button e, the side
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK
coupe) will return to their previous position.
A side window or tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK
coupe) will only return to its previous position if
it has not been moved to another position using
the respective side window switch or tilt/sliding
sunroof* (CLK coupe) switch after it was closed
with button e. A side window or tilt/sliding
sunroof* (CLK coupe) that was moved will remain in its current position if button e is
used to re-open the remaining side windows or
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe).
209
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air conditioning
The cooling function, only operational
when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
thus preventing the windows from fogging
up.
i Condensation may drip out from underneath
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction.
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
210
Deactivating
Activating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the
vehicle will then no longer be cooled or
dehumidified.
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air
conditioning.
왘
Press button 2 or 9
(컄 page 201).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The cooling function switches off after
a short delay.
왘
Press button 2 or 9
(컄 page 201) again.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned
itself off.
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Residual heat and ventilation*
(Canada only)
Activating
Deactivating
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
왘
Press button 9 (컄 page 201).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Press button 9 (컄 page 201).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫
when the ignition is switched on
depends on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
the coolant temperature
앫
if the battery voltage drops
앫
the temperature set by the operator
i How long the system will provide heating
The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless
of the air distribution control setting.
211
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents
The air vents for the rear passenger
compartment are located in the rear
center console.
Adjusting air distribution
왘
The air conditioning for the rear passenger
compartment is controlled via the automatic climate control panel (컄 page 201).
Push the slide for the left center
vent 2 or right center vent 3 to the
left, right, up or down.
The air flow is directed in the corresponding direction.
i The temperature at the center air vents 2
i For draft-free ventilation, move the slider for
and 3 for the rear passenger compartment
(컄 page 212) is the same as at the dashboard
center air vents.
the center air vents 2 and 3 upward.
Adjusting air volume
왘
1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents
2 Left center air vent
3 Right center air vent
212
Turn thumbwheel 1 to the left or right.
The air volume is increased or decreased.
Controls in detail
Audio system
왔 Audio system
Audio and telephone*, operation
Operating safety
These instructions are intended to help
you become familiar with your
Mercedes-Benz audio system. They contain useful tips and a detailed description
of the user functions.
Warning!
G
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, the driver should enter
system settings with the vehicle at a
standstill and operate the system only when
road and traffic conditions permit. Always
pay full attention to traffic conditions first
before operating system controls while
driving.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
Warning!
Sound system*
G
Your vehicle is equipped with a sound system. The subwoofer in the CLK cabriolet is
located between the rear seats.
Any alterations made to electronic
components can cause malfunctions.
The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite
radio*, and telephone* are interconnected.
When one of the components is not operational or has not been removed/replaced
properly, the function of other components
may be impaired.
This condition might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service
work on electronic components carried out
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Make sure no objects fall into the openings
of the subwoofer between the rear seats.
If necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to remove any objects
which may have fallen into the openings.
213
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating and display elements
214
Controls in detail
Audio system
Item
1 CD changer mode selector
AUX mode selector
2 Single CD mode selector
Page
229
219
231
3 Radio mode selector
4 Mute function (radio)
Pause (CD)
224
235
5 Volume distribution
218
6 Sound settings
216
Item
Page
9 Speed dialing memory (telephone) in descending order
Item
Page
g Soft keys
216
h Volume
216
a Accepting a call
(telephone)
240
j Switching on/off
216
b Telephone mode selector
236
k Manual tuning / seek
tuning (radio)
222
c Speed dialing memory (telephone) in ascending order
237
d Terminating a call
(telephone)
241
7 Display
e CD slot
8 Alphanumeric keypad
f CD ejection
Track search, reverse (CD)
234
l Manual tuning / seek
tuning (radio)
222
Track search,
fast forward (CD)
234
232
215
Controls in detail
Audio system
Button and soft key operation
In these instructions, the alphanumeric
keypad (right side of radio panel) and the
function buttons (left side of radio panel)
are referred to as “buttons”. The four keys
below the display panel are referred to as
“soft keys”.
왘
Press M button.
i If the radio is switched on without the key in
the starter switch, it will automatically switch off
again after approximately 30 minutes.
If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone, the
display may prompt you to enter your PIN (GSM
network) or code (TDMA or CDMA network).
! Do not press directly in the display face.
Otherwise, the display will be damaged.
Switching off
Operation
or
왘
왘
Switching the unit on/off
Switching on
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
왘
If the audio system was on as you
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch, the audio system will
automatically come back on as you
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2.
or
216
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
Press M button.
i Should excessively high temperatures occur
while the audio system is being operated, the
display will dim. If temperatures continue to rise,
HIGH TEMP will appear in the display, after which
the audio system will be switched off for a
cooling-down period.
Adjusting the volume
왘
Turn rotary control of N button.
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
i If your vehicle equipment includes a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile phone*, you can
adjust its volume separately from the volume of
the audio system while the telephone is being
used.
Adjusting sound functions
The bass and treble functions are called up
by pressing the O button.
Settings for bass and treble are stored
separately for the AM and FM wavebands,
weather band, CD mode and telephone
mode.
Bass
왘
Press O button repeatedly until
BASS appears in the display.
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘
Press + or – soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly.
왘
or
왘
Adjusting treble
왘
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after
the last soft key is pressed.
Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass
tones to their center level.
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after
the last soft key is pressed.
Press O button repeatedly until
TREBLE appears in the display.
Press RES soft key briefly to reset treble
tones to their center level.
Sound system*
왘
Press X or Y soft key repeatedly
until the desired sound setting has
been reached.
The sound is set accordingly.
or
왘
Press RES soft key briefly.
You can either program the sound settings
manually (컄 page 216) or choose settings
via preset sound characteristics.
The sound setting is reset depending
on the sound source activated.
앫
Radio mode: STANDARD
You can select from among the following
settings:
앫
CD/AUX mode: SURROUND
앫
Telephone: SPEECH
앫
STANDARD: conventional stereo sound.
앫
SURROUND: the sound is set for better
three-dimensional acoustic characteristics.
앫
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after
the last soft key is pressed.
SPEECH: the sound is optimized for the
spoken word.
왘
Press + or – soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly.
왘
Press O button repeatedly until
STANDARD, SURROUND or SPEECH appears
in the display.
or
217
Controls in detail
Audio system
Returning sound functions to factory
settings
왘
Press O button to call up settings
menu in the display.
앫
Radio mode: STANDARD
앫
CD/AUX mode: SURROUND
앫
Telephone: SPEECH
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu four seconds after the
last soft key is pressed.
The volume is distributed accordingly
between the front and rear of the vehicle.
or
왘
The fader is reset to its center level.
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after
the last soft key is pressed.
Adjusting volume distribution
Call up fader and balance functions by
pressing the P button.
왘
Press RES soft key briefly; the respective sound function is reset to its center
level.
Adjusting balance
Fader
왘
Press P button repeatedly until
FADER appears in the display.
왘
Press V or W soft key.
or
왘
Press and hold RES soft key until RESET
appears in the display.
The sound settings for bass and treble
are returned to their center level and
the volume is set to a predefined level.
Vehicles with sound system*:
The sound setting is reset depending
on the sound source activated.
218
Press RES soft key briefly.
왘
Press P button repeatedly until
BALANCE appears in the display.
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘
Press X or Y soft key.
왘
The volume is distributed between the
left and right sides of the vehicle.
or
or
왘
Press RES soft key briefly.
The balance is reset to its center level.
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after
the last button is pressed.
Returning volume distribution to factory settings
왘
Press RES soft key briefly; the respective volume distribution is reset to its
center (flat) level.
Press P button to call up settings
menu in the display.
왘
Press and hold RES soft key until RESET
appears in the display.
The volume distribution settings for
fader and balance are set to their center level.
Connecting an external audio source
(AUX) to the radio
An external audio source (AUX) can be
connected to the audio system. The
cinch-connector for connecting the external audio source (AUX) is located in the
glove box. Please contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for more information.
The radio switches back to the standard radio menu four seconds after the
last soft key is pressed.
Telephone* muting
If your vehicle equipment includes a
Mercedes-Benz specified mobile phone*,
you can adjust its volume separately from
the volume of the audio system while the
telephone is being used.
1 External audio source (AUX)
cinch-connector
219
Controls in detail
Audio system
Warning!
G
Only operate an external audio source (AUX)
when the vehicle is stationary. There is a risk
of accident by being distracted from road
and traffic conditions if you operate an external audio source (AUX) while the vehicle
is in motion.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
G
Due to the different volumes of the external
audio sources, system messages (e.g. traffic
and navigation announcements) may be
much louder. You may need to disable these
system messages or adjust the volume of
these messages manually.
220
Press and hold Q button until AUX
appears in the display.
The device connected with the external
audio source cinch-connector is heard,
provided it is switched to playback.
i Please refer to the relevant manufacturers
operating instruction for the external audio
source device.
You can adjust the volume (컄 page 216),
the sound settings (컄 page 216) and the
volume distribution (컄 page 218) for the
AUX input.
The following settings can be made in the
audio AUX mode:
Calling up AUX mode
Warning!
왘
앫
Volume (컄 page 216)
앫
Sound settings (컄 page 216)
앫
Volume distribution (컄 page 218)
i The volume of external audio sources is extremely variable. It is possible that a device connected as an external audio source will sound
quieter or louder in the vehicle or that the usual
maximum volume cannot be achieved. On certain devices the volume can be set separately. In
this case, start at a moderate volume and increase it slowly. In this way, you can determine
whether the system is capable of playback without distortion, even at high volume.
Canceling AUX mode
왘
Press any audio source button.
The AUX mode is canceled.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Radio operation
Calling up wavebands for radios without
SAT*
Selecting radio mode
왘
왘
Press b button.
The FM and AM wavebands are called
up one after another.
Calling up wavebands
You can choose from among the FM, AM
and WB wavebands.
or
왘
Weather band (컄 page 224).
i FM waveband:
AM waveband:
Press FM or AM soft key to switch between FM and AM.
Press WB soft key.
The weather band menu is called up.
87.7......107.9 MHz
The waveband currently selected
appears in the upper left-hand corner
of the display.
530......1710 KHz
Calling up wavebands for radios with
SAT*
왘
Press FM, AM or WB soft key repeatedly
until desired waveband has been selected.
The FM, AM and WB wavebands are
called up one after another.
The waveband currently selected
appears in the upper left-hand corner
of the display.
Selecting a station
The following options are available for selecting a station:
앫
Direct frequency input (컄 page 222)
앫
Manual tuning (컄 page 222)
앫
Automatic seek tuning (컄 page 222)
앫
Scan search (컄 page 222)
앫
Station memory (컄 page 223)
앫
Automatic station memory (Autostore)
(컄 page 223)
The station search proceeds in the following frequency increments:
앫
200 kHz in FM range
앫
10 kHz in AM range
221
Controls in detail
Audio system
Direct frequency input
Manual tuning
Scan search
왘
왘
Select desired waveband.
앫
왘
Press S or T button for approximately three seconds.
왘
Press button repeatedly until desired
frequency has been reached.
Select desired waveband.
왘
Press * button.
왘
Enter desired frequency with buttons
1 to R.
Step-by-step station tuning takes place
in ascending or descending order. Each
time the button is pressed, the radio
tunes further by 0.2 MHz. During manual tuning, the radio is muted.
왘
Select desired waveband.
왘
Press SC soft key.
SC will appear in the display. The ra-
i You can only enter frequencies within the re-
Automatic seek tuning
spective waveband.
왘
Select desired waveband.
If a button is not pressed within four seconds,
the radio will return to the last station tuned.
왘
Press S or T button briefly.
The radio will tune to the next highest
or next lowest receivable frequency.
i If no station is received after two
consecutive scans of the complete frequency
range, then the scan stops at the frequency from
which it began.
222
Starting scan search
dio briefly tunes in all receivable
stations on the waveband selected.
앫
Ending scan search
왘
Press SC soft key or S or T.
The station last played will be selected and SC disappears from the
display.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Station memory
Autostore – automatic station memory
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations
in the memory.
The Autostore memory function provides
an additional memory level. The station
memory for manually stored stations is not
overwritten.
앫
Storing stations
왘
Tune in desired station.
왘
Press and hold desired station
button 1 to R until a brief
signal tone is heard.
The frequency is stored on the selected station button.
앫
앫
왘
The radio switches to the Autostore
memory level. AS and SEARCH appear in the display and the radio
finds the ten stations with the
strongest signals. These stations
are stored on the station buttons
1 to R in order of signal
strength.
Calling up Autostore memory level and
storing stations
앫
Calling up stations
왘
Calling up stations
왘
Press desired station button 1
to R briefly.
Press AS soft key briefly.
앫
Press desired station button 1
to R.
Leaving the Autostore memory level
왘
Press FM or AM soft key briefly.
223
Controls in detail
Audio system
Interrupting radio mode
The radio mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone* (컄 page 240)
앫
왘
Mute on
왘
Mute off
왘
Press U button.
The radio mode is again active.
Search
왘
Press S or T button to tune in
the next receivable weather band station.
three consecutive scans of the complete frequency range, then the scan stops at the channel with which it began and NO WB FOUND
appears in the display.
If this happens, switch back to standard radio
mode.
왘
Press WB soft key.
The weather band station last received
is tuned in.
224
앫
Select desired weather band station
with buttons 1 to 7.
i If no weather band station is received after
Weather band
Scan search
Starting scan search
왘
Press SC soft key.
SC will appear in the display. The ra-
If a station cannot be tuned in, a search
is automatically started.
Press U button.
The radio mode is interrupted and
MUTED appears in the display.
앫
Selecting a weather band station
directly
dio briefly tunes in all receivable
weather band stations.
앫
Ending scan search
왘
Press SC soft key or S or T.
The weather band station last
played will be selected and SC disappears from the display.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Satellite radio*
SIRIUS satellite radio provides over 100
channels of digital-quality radio. That includes music, sports, news, and entertainment, free of commercials. SIRIUS satellite
radio uses three high-orbit satellites to
broadcast 24 hours per day, coast to
coast.
This diverse, satellite-delivered programming is available for a monthly subscription fee.
For more information and service
availability, call the SIRIUS Service Center
(1-888-539-7474), or contact
www.siriusradio.com for USA or
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canada.
i Additional satellite radio equipment and a
Program categories
subscription to a satellite radio service provider
are required for the satellite radio operation described here.
The channels are categorized. Categories
allow you to tune to stations broadcasting
a certain type of program (category mode)
(컄 page 227).
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for details and availability for your vehicle.
Note that categories and channels shown in illustrations are dependent on programming content
delivered by the service provider. Programming
content is subject to change. Therefore, channels and categories shown in illustrations and
descriptions contained in this manual may differ
from the channels and categories delivered by
the service provider.
i Satellite radio service may be unavailable or
interrupted from time to time for a variety of reasons, such as environmental or topographic conditions and other things beyond the service
provider’s or our control. Service might also not
be available in certain places (e.g., in tunnels,
parking garages, or within or next to buildings) or
near other technologies.
Calling up the SAT main menu
왘
Press SAT soft key.
SAT is displayed in the upper left-hand
corner of the display.
Prior to activation of the satellite radio
service (컄 page 226).
After activation of satellite radio service (컄 page 226).
225
Controls in detail
Audio system
Prior to activation of the satellite radio
service
After activation of the satellite radio
service
The satellite radio main menu appears.
The radio station selected last is audible,
provided it can be received.
i The system will tune to a default station if no
Selecting a station
The following options are available:
앫
Selecting a station using the selected
category (컄 page 227),
앫
Tuning via station presets
(컄 page 226),
앫
Tuning via scan search (컄 page 228),
앫
Tuning via manual channel input
(컄 page 227),
앫
Tuning via the program category list
(컄 page 227).
station had been selected previously.
The telephone number of the SIRIUS
Service Center (888-539-7474) is displayed.
왘
Press ESN soft key.
The twelve-digit electronic serial number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* installed in
your vehicle is displayed.
This information is required to call the
SIRIUS Service Center for an activation request.
i Credit card information may also be required for your application.
The activation process takes approximately five
to ten minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service
Center.
226
Tuning via station presets
The first channel 001 is called up and the
PTY system changes to All categories.
If no station can be received, ACQUIRING
appears in the display.
If the Satellite radio service is not
activated, ACQUIRING will also appear in the
radio display and NO SAT will appear in the
multifunction display.
Ten satellite radio station presets are available.
You can access the presets via number
keys.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Accessing via number keys
The system tunes to channel 16.
왘
The station you have selected begins to
play.
Enter number of preset you wish to select, e.g. 1.
The radio plays the station stored under this number and the PTY function
changes to the category corresponding
to the station.
Tuning via manual channel input
왘
This switches between the individual categories.
When changing the category, the channel selected last in the new category
becomes audible.
i You can only enter available channel numbers.
Tuning via the program category list
The system will automatically switch to
a station of the selected category if the
currently selected station is not of the
selected category. Otherwise, the currently selected station remains tuned.
The category list contains all currently receivable categories of programs. It is
arranged alphabetically.
앫
Selecting a category
왘
Press PTY soft key.
앫
Press *.
Input line appears in the main radio
menu.
왘
Use number keys to enter desired
channel within eight seconds,
e.g. 1 6.
Tuning a station within the selected
category
The channels identified for the currently selected category are arranged
numerically. Only one entry is visible at
a time.
Example: tuning in channel 16
왘
Press <<< or >>> soft key.
왘
The current PTY category of the station is displayed.
Press S or T button briefly.
The next station within the category
is started.
컄컄
or
227
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘
컄컄
Press and hold S or T button for approximately three seconds until desired station has been
reached.
Tuning via scan search
Obtaining additional text information
Additional text information (artist, title) related to the current channel can be displayed.
왘
Scan search is characterized as follows:
앫
Scan search plays a channel for approximately eight seconds and then
skips to the next channel within the
current category.
앫
Scan search can be terminated manually.
왘
Press SC soft key.
The search starts. SC appears in the
display.
왘
Press SC soft key again.
The search stops.
왘
Press INF soft key.
i There are ten presets available.
The title being played is displayed.
An existing entry is overwritten in the memory
list when a new entry is given.
Press INF soft key again.
The name of the artist performing the
title being played is displayed.
i If a button is not pressed within
Calling up the ESN information menu
왘
Press INF soft key.
왘
Press ESN soft key.
four seconds, the radio will return to the standard display.
The twelve-digit electronic serial number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* installed in
your vehicle is displayed.
Storing stations
왘
Tune in desired station.
왘
Press and hold desired station button
1 to R until a brief signal tone is
heard.
The frequency is stored on the selected
station button.
228
The radio saves the current station at
the memory preset selected. The memory preset selected appears in the status line, e.g. S3.
왘
Press RET soft key to exit the menu.
Controls in detail
Audio system
CD mode
Warning!
Safety precautions
Warning!
G
The single CD player and the CD changer*
are Class 1 laser products. There is a danger
of invisible laser radiation if the housing is
opened or damaged.
Do not open the housing. The single CD
player and the CD changer* do not contain
any parts that can be serviced by the user.
For safety reasons, have any necessary service work performed only by qualified
personnel.
G
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, the driver should insert
CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the audio system only if permitted by
road, weather and traffic conditions.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car covers a
distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
every second.
General notes
The system may not be able to play audio
CDs with copy protection.
Playing copied CDs may cause
malfunctions during playback.
! If you affix stickers to the CDs, they can become warped due to the heat that develops in
the CD drive or CD changer.
In certain situations, the CDs can then no longer
be ejected and cause damage to the drive. Such
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
! Your CD drive or CD changer* has been designed to play CDs which correspond to the
EN 60908 standard. You can therefore only use
CDs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g. ones that
have data on both sides (one side with DVD data,
the other side with audio data), they cannot be
ejected and will damage the drive.
Do not use CDs with an eight cm diameter,
not even with a CD adapter. Attempting to
play CDs with an eight cm diameter or
playing such CDs with an adapter may
cause damage to the CD drive. Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Should excessively high or low temperatures occur while in CD changer mode*,
CD ERROR will appear in the display, and the
CD will be muted until the temperature has
reached an acceptable level for the system
to continue operation.
The single CD player play audio CDs, the
CD changer* can play audio CDs as well as
CDs with MP3 files.
229
Controls in detail
Audio system
Tips on handling CDs
Information on MP3 data carriers
앫
i CD media, CD burning software and
Handle CDs carefully to prevent
interference during playback.
앫
Avoid scratches, fingerprints and dust
on the CDs.
앫
Do not write on CDs or apply any labels
or other material to them.
앫
Clean CDs from time to time with a
commercially available cleaning cloth.
Never wipe the CD in a circular motion;
instead, wipe it in a straight line starting in the center and moving outward.
Do not use solvents, anti-static sprays,
etc. for cleaning.
앫
Replace the CD in its case after use.
앫
Protect CDs from heat and direct
sunlight.
CD writers are available in great variety. Due to
this variety, it cannot be guaranteed that the CD
changer will be able to play every user-written
CD.
Use Romeo or Joliet. Depending on file
format used, up to 128 characters are
possible
The following compression methods are
compatible:
The burning process can lead to data errors and
aging of the medium may result in data loss.
Therefore, the CD changer may be restricted in
its ability to play MP3 data carriers; it may play
them with reduced sound quality, or it may not
be able to play them at all.
앫
MP3
앫
WMA
앫
WAV
Problems may be encountered during playback
of user-written CDs with a storage capacity of
more than 700 MB. These CDs do not meet valid
standards as of this printing.
Compatible bit and sampling rates
Compatible MP3 data carriers
The CD changer can read the following
data carriers in MP3 mode:
MP3 notes
앫
CD-DA
The CD changer* can play audio CDs as
well as CDs with MP3 files.
앫
CD-R
앫
CD-RW
230
Compatible file systems and compression methods
Fixed and variable bit rates of up to
320 kBit/s are possible.
The following table lists possible sampling
rates:
Controls in detail
Audio system
MPEG1
Audio Layer 3
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
32 kHz
MPEG2
Audio Layer 3
22.5 kHz, 24 kHz,
16 kHz
MPEG 2.5
Audio Layer 3
11.025 kHz,
12 kHz, 8 kHz
WMA
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz
i Only use MP3 tracks with a bite rate of
128 kBit/s or higher and with the specified sampling rates.
The use of rates other than those specified may
lead to noticeably inferior sound quality.
Information on copyright
The music tracks that you create for use in
MP3 mode or that you play in MP3 mode
are subject to copyright laws under
applicable international and national
regulations.
In many countries, the reproduction of
copyrighted materials is not permitted,
even if only for personal use, without the
express prior consent of the copyright
holder.
Please check the current copyright laws
for your country and comply with them.
These restrictions do not apply, for example, to your own compositions and recordings, or for recordings for which
authorization has been obtained from the
copyright holder.
MP3 playback
You can play an CD with MP3 files on the
CD changer* as you would play any standard audio CD. All of the functions described for the CD changer also apply for
the playback of CDs with MP3 files. Keep
in mind that the single CD player in the audio system unit is not able to read CDs with
MP3 files.
The first 99 tracks on the CD, including
tracks in subdirectories, are recognized
and played. Any additional tracks will not
be played.
i Due to the branched data structure, playback of the first track may be delayed slightly.
Operating the single CD player in the
audio system unit
Loading a CD
The single CD player in the audio system
unit has capacity for one CD. The CD slot
for loading the drive is located underneath
the soft keys.
i Keep in mind that the single CD player in the
audio system unit is not able to play CDs with
MP3 files.
왘
Make sure the system is switched on.
왘
Insert CD into CD slot. The label side of
the CD must face upwards.
The system automatically pulls the CD
into the CD slot. The audio CD begins
to play.
컄컄
231
Controls in detail
Audio system
컄컄! If a CD is already loaded, it must be ejected
before inserting a new CD. Inserting a second
CD in the slot with another CD still loaded will
cause damage to the CD drive not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot be read, WRONG CD ERROR will appear in the
display.
Operational readiness of CD changer*
If a CD changer has been installed in the
vehicle, it can be operated from the front
control panel of the audio system. A loaded magazine must be installed to play CDs.
The CD changer is located in the glove box.
Ejecting a CD
왘
Make sure the system is switched on.
왘
Press EJECT button.
1 CD
2 CD changer
3 CD tray
4 CD magazine
The system ejects the CD. NO CD will
appear in the display.
왘
왘
Remove magazine 4 and pull
CD tray 3 fully out.
왘
Place CD 1 in recess of tray, label side
up.
왘
Push tray into magazine in the direction
of arrow.
Remove CD from slot.
i If you do not take the CD out of the CD slot
1 CD changer
within approximately 15 seconds, the system automatically pulls the CD back in and plays it.
Loading/unloading the CD magazine
If a CD is pulled back in, press the EJECT button
for five seconds; the CD will then be ejected.
232
i The CD changer* may not be able to play audio CDs with copy protection.
왘
Slide changer door to the right and
press g button.
왘
Magazine will be ejected.
i Improperly inserted or unreadable CDs will
not be played.
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘
Push magazine into CD changer* 2 in
the direction of arrow and close sliding
door.
After the last track on a CD has finished,
the next CD is automatically played.
Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD
changer*
Playing tracks
Playing CDs
You have the following options:
앫
Audio system with CD changer*: selecting CDs
앫
Direct track entry
앫
Track skip forward/reverse
앫
Fast forward/reverse
앫
Scan
CD changer*
앫
Random tracks
왘
앫
Repeat track
Single CD player in the audio unit
왘
Press i button.
CD 0 will appear in the upper left-hand
corner of the display.
The CD will resume playback at the point
where it was switched off.
Press Q button.
CD and the selected magazine slot num-
ber appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display.
If you have not removed a CD since the last
time the CD audio source was activated,
the last CD listened to will begin to play at
the point where it was switched off.
왘
You can select from among the
inserted CDs with buttons
R to 6.
R = CD player in the audio unit
1 to 6 = CDs in the
CD changer*
The magazine slot number of the selected CD appears next to CD in the display, and the number of the currently
played track appears next to TRACK.
i If there is no CD in the selected magazine
slot, NO CD appears in the display with the corresponding slot number.
233
Controls in detail
Audio system
Direct track entry
Skipping tracks forward/backward
Fast forward/reverse
앫
앫
Skipping tracks forward
왘
Fast forward
왘
Press S button briefly.
The next track will be played.
앫
Skipping tracks backward
왘
You can make a direct selection from
among the tracks on a CD.
왘
Press * button.
왘
Enter track number using buttons 1
to R.
The number of the track being played
appears next to TRACK in the display.
You can only enter available track numbers.
앫
If the track has been playing for
more than ten seconds, the unit
skips back to the beginning of the
track currently playing. If less than
ten seconds have been played, the
unit skips back to the beginning of
the previous track.
Reverse
왘
Press T button briefly.
Press and hold T button until
desired point has been reached.
i The track number and the relative time of
the track is shown in the display during the
search.
Scan
앫
Starting scan
왘
Pressing the T or S button repeatedly will result in multiple tracks being
skipped.
Press SC soft key.
SC will appear in the display.
Each track on the current CD will be
played for approximately eight seconds in ascending order.
앫
Ending scan
왘
234
Press and hold S button until
desired point has been reached.
Press SC soft key or T or S.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Random play
앫
왘
The random function (RDM) plays the
tracks of the current CD in random order.
i When you start the RDM function, the RPT
function is automatically switched off.
앫
Switching on random
왘
Press RDM soft key.
Switching off repeat
Track and time display
Press RPT soft key again.
Pause function
The CD changer mode is interrupted by an
incoming call on the telephone*
(컄 page 240).
앫
Switching on pause function
RDM appears in the display. A ran-
왘
The number of the track being played
and the elapsed playing time appear in
the display.
domly selected track is played.
앫
Switching off random
왘
Press RDM soft key again.
왘
The track being played is repeated until the
repeat function is switched off.
왘
function is automatically switched off.
Switching on repeat
왘
Press RPT soft key.
RPT appears in the display.
Press U button.
The CD changer mode is interrupted and PAUSE appears in the display.
i When you start the RPT function, the RDM
앫
Press T soft key again.
The total number of tracks and the total
playing time of the CD appear in the
display.
Repeat
앫
Press T soft key.
왘
Press T soft key.
The standard CD playback menu appears in the display.
Switching off pause function
왘
Press U button.
The CD changer mode is active
again.
235
Controls in detail
Audio system
GSM network phones
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 13.5 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
236
Using your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile phone*, a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and
displayed in the audio system display.
Switching on the telephone
Switching on the telephone
왘
Further operating instructions not covered
here can be found in the operating instructions for the multifunction steering wheel
and the cellular telephone*.
If your audio system is set up for telephone
operation, the t symbol will appear in
the display.
When you insert your Mercedes-Benz
specified mobile phone* into the telephone cradle, you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds (컄 page 237).
This display disappears when you press
any button.
When your mobile phone is inserted into
the telephone cradle, you will see the reception strength in the upper right-hand
corner of the display.
Press h button.
If the telephone was previously
switched off, PROCESSING appears in
the display and you will then be
prompted to enter your PIN.
Switching off the telephone
왘
Press h button for approximately
three seconds.
PROCESSING appears in the display until
the telephone is off. Afterward,
PHONE OFF appears in the display.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Adjusting the volume
PIN entry
왘
Turn rotary control of N button during
a telephone call.
Placing a call
Entering a telephone number and
starting the dialing process
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
i The volume can be adjusted separately for
telephone mode and audio mode.
왘
Enter PIN number using buttons 1
to R.
왘
If necessary, correct number entered
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
briefly to delete the last digit entered;
press soft key and hold to delete the
complete number.
왘
Press OK soft key after entering correct
PIN.
왘 READY or ROAMING will appear
Adjusting sound
왘
Adjust sound during a telephone call.
Sound adjustment (컄 page 216).
왘
The number can have up to 32 digits,
but only twelve of these are visible in
the display.
왘
If necessary, correct number entered
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
briefly to delete the last digit entered;
press soft key and hold to delete the
complete number.
왘
After correct telephone number has
been entered, press s button.
in the dis-
play.
i If the PIN is entered incorrectly three times,
NEED PUK will appear in the display. Enter PUK
via your telephone. Please refer to the separate
telephone operating instructions for more information.
Enter desired telephone number using
buttons 1 to R.
237
Controls in detail
Audio system
i If the telephone number has been saved to-
왘
Press and hold button ‚
or ƒ until desired initial letter
has been reached.
왘
Press button ‚ or ƒ repeatedly until desired entry has been
reached.
gether with a name in the telephone book, the
name will appear in the display.
or
Phone book
The numbers stored in the phone book of
the telephone can be called up either by
name or number.
In addition, incoming calls are stored in the
phone book.
왘
Press MEM soft key or press ‚
or ƒ.
왘
Press desired numerical key 2
to 9.
i This is only possible, however, when the call
information transmitted includes the number of
the person calling. If the telephone number is not
transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the
phone book.
앫
Searching and calling up telephone
book entries by name
You can access your mobile phone’s
phone book using the audio system.
You can access both the main entries
and the sub-entries of your phone
book.
238
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of
the initial letters (e.g. for
S -Schneider, press button 7
four times).
or
왘
Press and hold button ‚
or ƒ.
The system jumps from one initial
letter to the next in ascending or
descending order.
The stored entries are selected in
alphabetical order with the sub-entries.
i Several sub-entries can be stored for each
main entry (name). These entries are marked by
a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the
upper left-hand corner of the display. The following abbreviations for sub-entries are possible:
CEL = Mobile phone
HOM = Home
WOR = Work
FAX = Fax
PAG = Pager
TEL = Main
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
왘
Viewing the telephone number of a
telephone book entry
왘
Search for desired entry.
왘
Press NUM soft key.
왘
Returning calls received
왘
Select desired telephone number
with button ‚ or ƒ.
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
The call will be made.
Speed dial
If you have stored telephone numbers
as speed dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with
buttons 1 to R on the radio
head unit.
The letter R and the number of the
memory position appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display.
The numbers are stored in the order
of the calls received.
The telephone number of the phone
book entry appears in the display.
앫
앫
The number of received calls and
then the call last received appear
briefly in the display.
The call will be made.
앫
Press RCV soft key (received calls).
왘
Press desired button 1 to R
briefly.
왘
Press s button.
The call will be made.
앫
Turbo dial
If you have stored telephone numbers
as turbo dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with
buttons 1 to R on the radio
head unit.
왘
왘
Press MEM soft key or press ‚
or ƒ.
Press desired button 1 to R
until the call is made.
239
Controls in detail
Audio system
Redial
The letter L and the number of the
memory position appears in the
left-hand corner of the display. The
numbers are stored in the order of
the calls made.
If the number you have dialed is busy, you
can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial
function.
i If you have activated the automatic redial
function on your telephone, the number of the
person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal.
Refer to the separate operating instructions for
the mobile phone.
앫
Manual redial
왘
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
The call will be made.
Accepting an incoming call
If the telephone is active in the background
(reception symbol is visible in the display),
the audio source is muted when an incoming call is received. A ringing tone can be
heard and the caller’s telephone number,
or the name under which the telephone
number has been saved in the phone book,
appears in the display. If the caller’s number is not transmitted with the call, CALL
will appear in the display.
왘
Press s button.
The call is accepted.
왘
Press s button.
The telephone number last dialed
will appear in the display.
왘
240
Select desired telephone number
with button ‚ or ƒ.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Muting a call
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is
then no longer able to hear you.
앫
Mute on
왘
Press MUT soft key.
왘 MIC MUTE will
앫
appear in the display.
Mute off
왘
Press MUT soft key again.
Talking with two callers at the same
time
If you wish to receive or place another call
during an already active call, you can accept or place the second call and switch
between the callers or combine them into
one call. Note that the features described
here are depending on availability from
your mobile phone service provider.
앫
Terminating a call
왘
Press t button.
The current call is terminated and the
muted audio source becomes active
again.
You are connected with the second
caller; the first caller is kept on hold.
앫
왘
Place new call by entering telephone number manually.
왘
Press s button.
앫
왘
Press s button to accept a second call.
i You will be notified of the second call acoustically, but you will not see this in the display.
Terminating a call
왘
Press t button.
The current call is terminated. You
are again connected with the caller
previously placed on hold.
앫
You are connected to the second
caller; the first caller is kept on
hold.
or
Press 2 and s buttons.
This switches between the calls.
The non-active call is kept on hold.
Placing/accepting a second call
왘
Switching between calls
Combining two calls
왘
Press 3 and s buttons.
The calls are combined into one
call.
앫
Terminating a combined call
왘
Press t button.
The connection to both callers is
terminated.
241
Controls in detail
Audio system
TDMA or CDMA network phones
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 13.5 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
242
Using your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile phone*, a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and
displayed in the audio system display.
Switching on the telephone
Switching on the telephone
왘
Further operating instructions not covered
here can be found in the operating instructions for the multifunction steering wheel
and the mobile phone*.
Press h button.
If you have programmed an unlock
code for the telephone, you must now
enter the code.
If your audio system is set up for telephone
operation, the t symbol will appear in
the display.
When you insert your Mercedes-Benz
specified mobile phone* into the telephone cradle, you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds (컄 page 237).
This display disappears when you press
any button.
When your mobile phone is inserted into
the telephone cradle, you will see the reception strength in the upper right-hand
corner of the display.
왘
Enter code using buttons 1
to R.
왘
If necessary, correct number entered
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
briefly to delete the last digit entered;
press soft key and hold to delete the
complete number.
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘
Press OK soft key after entering correct
code.
Adjusting the volume
왘
The telephone is unlocked. If you have
entered an incorrect code, you must
enter the correct code.
Switching off the telephone
왘
Press h button for approximately
three seconds.
PROCESSING appears in the display until
the telephone is off. Afterward, PHONE
OFF appears in the display.
Turn rotary control of N button during
a telephone call.
Placing a call
Entering a telephone number and
starting the dialing process
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
i The volume can be adjusted separately for
telephone mode and audio mode.
Adjusting sound
왘
Adjust sound during a telephone call.
Sound adjustment (컄 page 216).
왘
Enter desired telephone number using
buttons 1 to R.
The number can have up to 32 digits,
but only twelve of these are visible in
the display.
왘
If necessary, correct number entered
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key
briefly to delete the last digit entered;
press soft key and hold to delete the
complete number.
왘
After correct telephone number has
been entered, press s button.
243
컄컄
Controls in detail
Audio system
왘
컄컄i If the telephone number has been saved to-
gether with a name in the phone book, the name
will appear in the display.
The system jumps from one initial
letter to the next in ascending or
descending order.
Phone book
The numbers stored in the phone book of
the mobile phone can be called up either
by name or number.
In addition, incoming calls are stored in the
phone book.
i This is only possible, however, when the call
information transmitted includes the number of
the person calling. If the telephone number is not
transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the
phone book.
앫
Searching and calling up phone book
entries by name
You can access your mobile phone’s
phone book with the audio system. You
can access both the main entries and
the sub-entries of your phone book.
244
Press and hold button ‚
or ƒ.
왘
Press MEM soft key or press ‚
or ƒ.
왘
Press desired numerical key 2
to 9.
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of
the initial letters (e.g. for
S -Schneider, press button 7
four times).
or
왘
Press and hold button ‚
or ƒ until desired initial letter
has been reached.
왘
Press button ‚ or ƒ repeatedly until desired entry has been
reached.
or
The stored entries are selected in
alphabetical order with the sub-entries.
Controls in detail
Audio system
앫
i Several sub-entries can be stored for each
main entry (name). These entries are marked by
a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the
upper left-hand corner of the display. The following abbreviations for sub-entries are possible:
CEL = Mobile phone
HOM = Home
WOR = Work
FAX = Fax
PAG = Pager
TEL = Main
왘
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
If you have stored telephone numbers
as speed dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with
buttons 1 to R on the radio unit.
왘
Press MEM soft key or press ‚
or ƒ.
왘
Press RCV soft key (received calls).
The number of received calls and
then the call last received appear
briefly in the display.
The call will be made.
앫
Viewing the telephone number of a
phone book entry
왘
Search for desired entry.
왘
Press NUM soft key.
왘
Returning calls received
Select desired telephone number
with button ‚ or ƒ.
The letter R and the number of the
memory position appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display.
The numbers are stored in the order
of the calls received.
The telephone number of the phone
book entry appears in the display.
앫
Speed dial
왘
왘
Press desired button 1 to R
briefly.
왘
Press s button.
The call will be made.
앫
Turbo dial
If you have stored telephone numbers
as turbo dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with
buttons 1 to R on the radio unit.
왘
Press desired button 1 to R
until the call is made.
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
The call will be made.
245
Controls in detail
Audio system
Redial
If the number you have dialed is busy, you
can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial
function.
왘
왘
i If you have activated the automatic redial
function on your mobile phone, the number of
the person being called is automatically redialed
after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal.
Refer to the separate operating instructions for
the mobile phone.
앫
Manual redial
Press s button.
Accepting an incoming call
The telephone number last dialed
will appear in the display.
If the telephone is active in the background
(reception symbol is visible in the display),
the audio source is muted when an incoming call is received. A ringing tone can be
heard and the caller’s telephone number,
or the name under which the telephone
number has been saved in the telephone
book, appears in the display. If the caller’s
number is not relayed, CALL will appear in
the display.
Select desired telephone number
with button ‚ or ƒ.
The letter L and the number of the
memory position appears in the
left-hand corner of the display. The
numbers are stored in the order of
the calls made.
왘
When you have selected a number,
press s button.
왘
Press s button.
The call is accepted.
The call will be made.
Muting a call
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is
then no longer able to hear you.
앫
Mute on
왘
Press MUT soft key.
왘 MIC MUTE will
앫
Mute off
왘
246
appear in the display.
Press MUT soft key again.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Terminating a call
왘
앫
왘
Press t button.
The current call is terminated and the
muted audio source becomes active
again.
앫
Terminating a call
왘
Accepting a second call
왘
Place new call by entering telephone number manually.
i You will be notified of the second call acoustically, but you will not see this in the display.
You are connected to the second
caller; the first caller is kept on hold.
앫
Terminating a call
왘
Press t button.
앫
Placing a second call
If you wish to place another call during an
already active call, you can place the second call and switch between the callers or
combine them into one call. Note that this
feature is dependent on availability from
your mobile phone service provider.
앫
Placing a second call
왘
Press t button.
The current call is terminated. The
connection to the caller previously
kept on hold is also interrupted;
however, reconnection is indicated
by an acoustic signal.
The current call is terminated. The
connection to the caller previously
kept on hold is also interrupted;
however, reconnection is indicated
by an acoustic signal.
If you receive another call during an already active call, you can accept the second call and switch between the two.
Press s button.
You are connected to the second
caller; the first caller is kept on
hold.
Press s button.
This switches between the calls.
The non-active call is kept on hold.
Accepting a second incoming call
앫
왘
Switching between calls
Combining two calls
왘
Press s button.
The calls are combined into one
call.
앫
Terminating a combined call
왘
Press t button.
The connection to both callers is
terminated.
Place a new call by entering telephone number manually.
247
Controls in detail
Audio system
Emergency calls “911”
The following conditions must be met for a
“911” emergency call:
The following describes how to dial a “911”
emergency call using the audio system
head unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified
mobile phone* is inserted in the phone
cradle*. Unless otherwise specified, the
descriptions refer to the audio system
head unit.
Consult the separate telephone operating
instructions that came with your mobile
phone* for information on how to place a
“911” emergency call on the mobile
phone*.
Warning!
G
The “911” emergency call system is a public
service. Using it without due cause is a criminal offense.
248
GSM network phones
앫
Telephone must be switched on.
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone locked
앫
The corresponding mobile communications network must be available.
왘
i Emergency calls may not be possible with all
telephone networks or if certain network services and/or telephone functions are active. Check
with your local service providers.
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
will have to initiate rescue measures yourself.
Press h button to switch to telephone operation.
PIN? appears in the audio display.
왘
Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit.
왘
Press OK soft key or s button for
dialing to begin.
DIALING appears in the audio display
while the telephone establishes the
connection.
왘
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone unlocked
왘
왘
왘
Press h button to switch to telephone operation.
TDMA/CDMA network phones
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone locked
왘
Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit.
Press s button for dialing to begin.
왘
왘
Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit.
왘
Press OK soft key or s button for dialing to begin.
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
i If no SIM card is in the mobile phone, NO
SERVICE appears in the audio display. In that
case, you only can make an emergency call on
the mobile phone itself, without the use of the
head unit.
왘
Press h button to switch to telephone operation.
왘
Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit.
왘
Press s button for dialing to begin.
CODE? appears in the audio display.
DIALING appears in the audio display
while the telephone establishes the
connection.
Press h button to switch to telephone operation.
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone unlocked
DIALING appears in the audio display
while the telephone establishes the
connection.
왘
DIALING appears in the audio display
while the telephone establishes the
connection.
왘
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
249
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning!
The side windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all the side
windows are on the driver’s door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the front passenger door and the rear
side trim panels.
G
When closing the windows, make sure there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
The closing of the rear side windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch.
1 Left front window
2 Right front window
3 Right rear window
4 Left rear window
5 Rear window override switch
(컄 page 88)
250
The door windows are equipped with the express-close and automatic reversal function. If a door window encounters an
obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the
resistance point and released it to close the
window, the automatic reversal function will
stop the window and open it slightly.
If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling and
holding the switch, by pressing and holding
button ‹ on the SmartKey, by pressing
and holding the lock button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) on an outside door handle,
CLK cabriolet: by operating the soft top
switch, or by pressing and holding
button , or e on the climate control
panel, the automatic reversal function will
not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Power windows
i You can also open or close the windows us-
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
Warning!
ing the:
앫
앫
SmartKey (summer opening/convenience
feature) (컄 page 253)
왘
CLK cabriolet: Soft top switch (컄 page 255).
Depending on current position, the windows may
also open or close when:
앫
the air recirculation button , in the control panel of the climate control
(컄 page 191) or automatic climate control
(컄 page 201) is pressed and held
or
앫
the charcoal filter button e in the control
panel of the automatic climate control
(컄 page 201) is pressed and held
i Operating the rear side windows from the
rear is not possible if you activate the override
switch (컄 page 88).
G
Opening the windows
Press switch 1 to 4 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
Closing the windows
왘
Pull switch 1 to 4 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
If you pull and hold the switch up when
closing the window, and upward movement
of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands,
fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not
operate.
Fully opening the door windows
(Express-open)
왘
Press switch 1 or 2 past the
resistance point and release.
The corresponding window opens
completely.
i After switching off the ignition (컄 page 38)
or removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch, the power windows can be operated:
앫
until you open a door
앫
for at least 5 minutes if no door was opened
251
Controls in detail
Power windows
Fully closing the door windows
(Express-close)
왘
Pull switch 1 or 2 past the
resistance point and release.
The corresponding window closes
completely.
! If the upward movement of a door window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the door
window will stop and open slightly.
Remove the obstruction, pull the switch again
past the resistance point and release.
If the door window still does not close when
there is no obstruction, then pull the switch and
hold it. The door window will then close without
the obstruction sensor function.
Warning!
G
Driver’s door only:
If within five seconds you again pull the
switch past the resistance point and release, the automatic reversal will not
function.
Synchronizing power windows
The power windows must be resynchronized each time
앫
after the battery has been
disconnected.
앫
Stopping windows during
Express-operation
if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
왘
Pull the power window switches until
the side windows are closed.
왘
Hold the switches for approximately
one second.
Press or pull the respective power window switch again.
The power windows are synchronized.
252
Controls in detail
Power windows
앫
Summer opening feature
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows and/or the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe), or soft top
(CLK cabriolet), if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
turning on the seat ventilation* for the
driver’s seat
왘
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle. The
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proximity to the diver’s door handle.
왘
Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle until the windows
and the tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK
coupe) have reached the desired position or the soft top (CLK cabriolet) is
fully open.
i The seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat is
automatically set to the highest level if activated
via summer opening feature.
In the event that the procedure causes
potential danger, the procedure can be
immediately halted by releasing the button
on the SmartKey. To reverse direction of
movement, press Œ for opening or ‹
for closing.
The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
(CLK coupe) or soft top (CLK cabriolet)
begin to open after approximately one
second.
CLK cabriolet: The message Top In Operation appears in the multifunction
display.
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously:
앫
opening the side windows
앫
opening the tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK
coupe)
앫
opening the soft top (CLK cabriolet)
왘
Release button Πto interrupt
procedure.
CLK cabriolet: Make sure the soft top is
fully opened.
253
Controls in detail
Power windows
Convenience closing feature
Warning!
앫
G
When closing the side windows and/or the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe), or soft top
(CLK cabriolet), make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
The windows will not automatically re-open
if blocked during convenience closing.
When you lock the vehicle, you can close
the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(CLK coupe), or soft top (CLK cabriolet) simultaneously.
왘
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
앫
Release button ‹ to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold
button Œ. To continue the closing
procedure after making sure that there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure, press and hold
button ‹.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫
Release the lock button (컄 page 62) on
exterior door handle to stop the closing
procedure.
254
왘
The windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe), or soft top (CLK cabriolet) begin to close after
approximately one second.
Immediately pull on the same outside
door handle and hold firmly. The side
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(CLK coupe), or soft top (CLK cabriolet)
will open for as long as the door handle
is held but the door is not opened.
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle
(컄 page 253). The SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
in close proximity to the driver’s door
handle.
Press and hold button ‹ until the
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(CLK coupe), or soft top (CLK cabriolet)
are completely closed.
The message Top In Operation appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Release button ‹ to interrupt
procedure.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (컄 page 62) until
the side windows and the tilt/sliding
sunroof* (CLK coupe) are completely
closed.
왘
Release the lock button on the outside
door handle to interrupt procedure.
Make sure all side windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK coupe), or soft
top (CLK cabriolet) are properly closed before leaving the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing all side windows
with the soft top switch (CLK cabriolet)
The soft top switch is located in the center
console.
Warning!
G
왘
Never operate the windows if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
opening or closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the soft top switch. To open
the windows again, press the soft top switch
twice. Press the switch briefly the first time.
Then press the switch a second time and
hold it until the side windows have reached
the desired position.
1 Soft top switch
Opening
왘
Press soft top switch 1 twice. Press
the switch briefly the first time. Then
press the switch a second time and
hold it until the side windows have
reached the desired position.
Closing
왘
Pull soft top switch 1 twice. Pull the
switch briefly the first time. Then pull
the switch a second time and hold it
until the side windows have reached
the desired position.
Switch on the ignition.
As an alternate method to using the power
window switches, all side windows can be
opened or closed using the soft top
switch 1.
255
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* (Coupe)
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened and
closed electrically. The switch for the
tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead
control panel.
With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
sunroof open, the screen will also retract.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.
Screen
Sunroof switch
1 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
2 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
3 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
4 Push back to slide sunroof open
256
switch was moved past the resistance point
and released, by moving the switch in any
direction.
Warning!
G
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately
halted by releasing the switch or, if the
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury
for occupants wearing their seat belts
properly as entire body parts or portions of
them may protrude from the passenger
compartment.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* (Coupe)
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can
stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in
malfunctions.
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed
manually should an electrical malfunction occur
(컄 page 430).
! Please keep in mind that weather conditions
can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to
close the tilt/sliding sunroof when leaving the
vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior,
vehicle electronics could be damaged which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, resonance noises may result in addition to the usual
wind noises. They are caused by minimal pressure changes in the passenger compartment. To
reduce or eliminate these noises, change the position of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side
window slightly.
sunroof using the:
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
앫
왘
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
SmartKey (summer opening/convenience
feature) (컄 page 253)
Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding
sunroof may also open or close when:
앫
the air recirculation button , in the control panel of the climate control
(컄 page 191) or automatic climate control
(컄 page 201) is pressed and held
or
앫
the charcoal filter button e in the control
panel of the automatic climate control
(컄 page 201) is pressed and held.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
To open, close, raise, or lower the
tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
switch to resistance point in the
required direction of arrows 1 to 4.
Release the sunroof switch when the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
Fully opening (Express-open) and
closing (Express-close) the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
왘
To open, close, raise, or lower the
tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
switch past the resistance point in the
required direction of arrow 1 to 4
and release.
The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
completely.
257
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* (Coupe)
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
during Express-operation
왘
Move the sunroof switch in any
direction.
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked during the Express-close procedure, the
tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and re-open slightly.
Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding
sunroof
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Move and hold the sunroof switch in
the direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 256)
until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully
raised at the rear.
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be
synchronized each time after:
앫
the battery has been disconnected or
discharged
앫
the tilt/sliding sunroof has been closed
manually (컄 page 430)
앫
the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
smoothly
앫
258
왘
a malfunction
Hold the sunroof switch for
approximately one second.
왘
Check the Express-open feature
(컄 page 257).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens
completely, the tilt/sliding sunroof is
synchronized. Otherwise repeat the
above steps.
Controls in detail
Soft top (Cabriolet)
왔 Soft top (Cabriolet)
Opening and closing the soft top
Warning!
For safety reasons, the soft top can only be
opened and closed when the vehicle is
standing still.
Warning!
G
Before operating the switch for the soft top,
make sure no persons can be injured by the
moving parts (roll bars, soft top frame, and
soft top compartment cover).
Hands must never be placed near the roll
bar, soft top frame, upper windshield area,
shelf behind roll bar, or soft top storage
compartment while the soft top is being
raised or lowered. Serious personal injury
may occur.
If potential danger exists, release the soft
top switch. This immediately interrupts the
raising or lowering procedure. You then can
operate the soft top switch to raise or lower
the soft top away from the danger zone.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
! Never sit or place heavy objects on the rear
shelf. Doing so could cause damage to the soft
top and the rear shelf.
! Please keep in mind that weather conditions
can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to
close the soft top when leaving the vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics could be damaged which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! When opening and closing the soft top,
make sure:
앫
there is sufficient clearance for the soft top
to move up
앫
the luggage cover is engaged in place
(컄 page 264)
앫
the trunk is only loaded to the height of the
luggage cover
앫
the luggage/cargo does not push the closed
luggage cover up
앫
the trunk lid is closed
앫
nothing is placed on the soft top compartment cover
앫
the outside temperature is above +5°F
(-15°C)
Otherwise the soft top and other parts of the vehicle could be damaged.
259
Controls in detail
Soft top (Cabriolet)
Opening the soft top
i The soft top cannot be opened using the soft
top switch when the roll bars have been released. The roll bars need to be lowered before
the soft top can be operated again using the soft
top switch. If the roll bars have released and the
soft top is closed, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the roll bars lowered. Do not attempt to lower the roll bars manually with the soft top closed. Lowering the roll
bars manually with the soft top closed may impair the function of the roll bars (컄 page 82).
Before pulling on the soft top switch, you
must make sure:
If the roll bars have released and the soft top is
open, you can lower the roll bars manually
(컄 page 431) or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the roll bars
lowered.
앫
the parking brake is engaged
(컄 page 59)
왘
앫
the luggage cover is latched, see
“Latch luggage cover” (컄 page 264)
1 Soft top, opening
앫
the trunk lid is closed
앫
the ignition is switched on (컄 page 38)
Pull up on the soft top switch as indicated by the arrow 1 until the soft top
is completely lowered into its trunk
storage compartment.
During the opening procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top In Operation.
If you continuously pull on the soft top
switch, the windows will close.
260
However, the windows can also be
closed/opened later on, for more information see “Opening and closing all side windows with the soft top switch (CLK
cabriolet)” (컄 page 255), or see “Opening
and closing the windows” (컄 page 250).
i For safety reasons, the soft top cannot be
opened while driving.
Make sure the soft top is dry before you open it.
Otherwise water may enter the trunk interior.
! To prevent mildew, the soft top must be dry
before lowering it into the storage compartment.
Do not lower a frozen soft top until thawed and
dry. Lowering a frozen soft top may result in
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
Do not place anything on the soft top compartment cover.
The soft top compartment cover must never
be used by any persons as a seat bench.
Raising of the roll bars could result in serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Soft top (Cabriolet)
Closing the soft top
왘
Press the soft top switch as indicated
by the arrow 1 until the soft top is
completely closed and locked.
During the closing procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top In Operation.
If you continuously press on the soft
top switch the windows will close.
1 Soft top, closing
Before pressing the soft top switch, you
must make sure:
앫
the parking brake is engaged
(컄 page 59)
앫
the trunk lid is closed
앫
the ignition is switched on (컄 page 38)
However, the windows can also be
closed/opened later on, for more information see “Opening and closing all side windows with the soft top switch (CLK
cabriolet)” (컄 page 255) or see “Opening
and closing the windows” (컄 page 250).
i For safety reasons, the soft top cannot be
closed while driving.
i The soft top cannot be closed using the soft
top switch when the roll bars have been released. The roll bars need to be lowered before
the soft top can be operated again using the soft
top switch. If the roll bars have released and the
soft top is open, you can lower the roll bars manually (컄 page 431) or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the roll bars lowered.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the soft top either completely
closed and locked, or fully lowered into its
storage compartment.
If the soft top does not completely open or
close, a warning sounds. In the multifunction display you will see K, and the message Open/Close Top Completely
appears. After about 15 seconds the roof
hydraulics lose pressure if the ignition is
switched off.
Properly lock the soft top (컄 page 262) before continuing to drive.
261
Controls in detail
Soft top (Cabriolet)
Locking the soft top after raising/lowering
Warning!
G
The soft top is not fully closed and locked or
not fully opened if:
앫
the message Top In Operation is
shown in the multifunction display
앫
a warning sounds for 10 seconds when
starting to drive
To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the soft top either completely
closed and locked, or fully lowered into its
storage compartment.
If the soft top is not properly locked, lock it
as described below.
Unlocked status noticed when stopped
To lock the soft top in its fully opened
position, pull up on the soft top switch.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘
To lock the soft top in its fully closed
position, press soft top switch.
Warning!
To lock the soft top in its fully opened
position, pull up on the soft top switch.
If the soft top does not completely open or
close, the roof hydraulics will lose pressure
and the soft top will lower
or:
왘
Warning!
G
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so and lock the soft top before continuing to drive. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Leave the ignition switched on.
왘
To lock the soft top in its fully closed
position, press soft top switch.
G
앫
after approximately seven minutes
when the ignition is switched on.
앫
after approximately 15 seconds when
the ignition is switched off.
Unlocked status noticed while driving
or:
262
왘
Shortly before the soft top is lowered, a
warning will sound. In the multifunction display you will see K, and the message Top
Lowering appears.
앫
Properly lock the soft top (컄 page 262)
before continuing to drive.
Controls in detail
Soft top (Cabriolet)
Opening (Summer opening feature)
Opening and closing the soft top with
the SmartKey
왘
The windows will also be opened or closed
when you operate the soft top with the
SmartKey.
Warning!
The windows and soft top begin to
open after approximately one second.
During the opening procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top In Operation.
G
Before operating the soft top, make sure no
persons can be injured by the moving parts
(roll bar, soft top frame, and soft top compartment cover) due to negligence.
Hands must never be placed near the roll
bar, soft top frame, upper windshield area,
shelf behind roll bar, or soft top storage
compartment while the soft top is being
raised or lowered. Serious personal injury
may occur.
If potential dangers exists, release the respective button on the SmartKey. This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering
procedure. You then can operate Πto
lower or ‹ to raise the soft top away
from the danger zone.
Press and hold button Πuntil the
soft top is completely open.
왘
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle. The
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.
왘
Release transmit button Πto interrupt procedure.
Make sure the soft top is fully opened.
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
Press and hold button ‹ until the
soft top is completely closed.
The windows and soft top begin to
close after approximately one second.
During the closing procedure the multifunction display shows the message
Top In Operation.
왘
Release transmit button ‹ to interrupt procedure.
263
Controls in detail
Soft top (Cabriolet)
Make sure all side windows and the
soft top are properly closed before leaving
the vehicle.
Warning!
Luggage cover
The luggage cover is located in the trunk.
Properly lock the soft top (컄 page 262) before continuing to drive.
1 Luggage cover
왘
Open the trunk
Latch luggage cover
왘
264
왘
Press luggage cover 1 in direction of
rear seat.
! To prevent damage to the soft top or luggage/cargo when lowering the roof:
G
If the soft top does not completely open or
close, a warning sounds and the soft top
switch flashes. In the multifunction display
you will see K, and the message
Open/Close Top Completely appears.
After about 15 seconds the roof hydraulics
lose pressure.
Folding back luggage cover
Pull luggage cover 1 out in direction
of arrow until it engages in place.
앫
load trunk only to the height of the luggage
cover
앫
do not permit luggage/cargo to push up the
closed luggage cover
앫
do not place anything on the shelf behind the
roll bars
앫
do not place anything on the soft top compartment cover
! Never place anything behind the side nets
when the luggage cover has been folded back.
You could forget about objects placed there,
which could result in damage when operating the
soft top.
Controls in detail
Soft top (Cabriolet)
Wind screen
Installing
왘
Warning!
G
Remove the wind screen from its storage bag.
The wind screen can restrict the driver’s vision to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent a
possible accident when visibility is limited
(e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the wind
screen should be folded back.
The wind screen deflects drafts away from
the driver and passenger when the soft top
is lowered. It is stored in a separate storage bag in the trunk.
3 Catch
4 Retainer claw
5 Snap fastener
1 Upper section
2 Lower section
왘
Fold sections 1 and 2 together.
왘
Press retainer claw 4 on upper section into snap fastener 5 of lower section.
컄컄
265
Controls in detail
Soft top (Cabriolet)
왘
컄컄
왘
Pull catch 8 in position 9 and guide
left retaining pin into mounting fixture
on left side.
Fold upper section of wind screen up
toward head restraints until it stops.
Warning!
6 Retaining lugs
7 Mounting fixture on right side
8 Catch
Removing
왘
Fold upper section of wind screen back
down.
왘
Pull catch 8 in position 10 and pull
wind screen out toward front of vehicle. Be careful not to damage interior
trim with guide tabs.
왘
Fold retaining lugs 6 back.
G
Check for secure locking by pulling up on
the wind screen.
To prevent personal injury, remove wind
screen if rear seats are to be occupied by
passengers.
9 Locking
10 Unlocking
왘
Fold retaining lugs 6 out.
왘
Slide pre-assembled wind screen into
mounting fixture on right side 7 using
retaining pin on right side. Simultaneously, retaining lugs 6 should slide
into seat belt passage in rear bench
seat.
266
b Catch
왘
Press catch b to the right and fold upper and lower sections back.
왘
Place the wind screen back into the
bag.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
앫
Cruise control, with which the vehicle
can maintain a preset speed.
앫
Parktronic* (CLK 63 AMG (USA),
Canada all vehicles), which serves as a
parking assistant.
For information on the BAS, ABS, and
ESP®, see “Driving safety systems”
(컄 page 90).
Cruise control
Warning!
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time.
You can set or resume cruise control at any
speed over 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
G
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column (컄 page 26).
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
267
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the cruise control system.
Setting current speed
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
- your foot could become caught.
Keep in mind that cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver
during vehicle operation. The driver is and
must always remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake operation.
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume to last set speed
Warning!
G
Cruise control brakes automatically so that
the set speed is not exceeded. The brake
pedal depresses when the cruise control engages the brakes.
268
The current speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds, and the corresponding speedometer
segments from the selected speed to the
vehicle maximum speed are illuminated.
i On uphill or downhill grades, cruise control
may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control will hold
the set speed with braking from the vehicle’s
brake system.
In addition, on longer downhill grades the automatic transmission will automatically downshift.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Canceling cruise control
i Cruise control automatically switched off, if
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
앫
you step on the brake pedal.
앫
you press the parking brake pedal.
왘
In this case the segments in the multifunction display (컄 page 268) go out and no
warning sounds.
Step on the brake pedal.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
앫
the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h).
앫
ESP® is in operation or switched off with the
ESP® switch (컄 page 94).
앫
you move the gear selector lever in
position N while driving.
or
왘
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
i The last stored speed is canceled when you
turn off the engine.
The segments in the multifunction display
(컄 page 268) go out, and an acoustic warning
sounds.
! Moving gear selector lever to position N
while driving also cancels cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved
to position N while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy
roads).
Setting a higher speed
Warning!
G
If you increase the set vehicle speed, keep in
mind that it may take a brief moment until
the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments.
Increase the set vehicle speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions and legal
speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and
unexpected acceleration of the vehicle
could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
Lift cruise control lever in the direction
of arrow 1 and hold it up until the desired speed is reached.
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control will resume
the last speed set.
269
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Setting a lower speed
Warning!
G
If you decrease the set vehicle speed, keep
in mind that it may take a brief moment until
the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments.
Decrease the set vehicle speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions and legal
speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and
unexpected deceleration of the vehicle
could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
왘
Depress cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2 and hold it down
until the desired speed is reached.
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the brake system will automatically
brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
270
Faster
왘
Briefly tip cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1.
Slower
왘
Briefly tip cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2.
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or
serious injury to you and others.
왘
Briefly push cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4.
The cruise control resumes the last set
speed.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds, and the corresponding speedometer
segments from the selected speed to the
vehicle maximum speed are illuminated
(컄 page 268).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system (Parking assist)*,
CLK 63 AMG (USA), Canada all models
Warning!
G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always remains with the driver.
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash,
or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the
system to send erratic indications, and
should be taken into consideration.
! Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (e.g.
trailer couplings, painted posts, elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the
vehicle.
Warning!
G
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
! The operational function of the Parktronic
system can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice.
Make sure that the area on the bumpers around
the sensors is free of dirt, ice and/or slush, otherwise Parktronic may not function properly, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic system* sensors (CLK
63 AMG (USA), Canada all vehicles)”
(컄 page 372).
The Parktronic system deactivates at
speeds over approximately 11 mph
(18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic
system turns on again.
The Parktronic system also deactivates
when you place the gear selector lever in
position P.
The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition
(컄 page 38) and placed the gear selector
lever in position D, R, or N.
1 Sensors in the front bumper
271
Controls in detail
Driving systems
! During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located above or below the
height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer
hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect
such objects at close range and damage to your
vehicle or the object may result.
Range of the sensors
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to
scratch or damage the sensors, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic system* sensors
(CLK 63 AMG (USA), Canada all vehicles)”
(컄 page 372).
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g.
truck air brakes, car wash, or jackhammers) may
impair the operation of the Parktronic system.
Minimum distance
Front sensors
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
272
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the distance warning segments
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If
the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance may no longer be indicated by the system.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
front area is located above the center air
vents in the dashboard.
CLK coupe:
The warning indicator for the rear area is
integrated in the rear dome lighting.
CLK cabriolet:
The warning indicator for the rear area is
integrated between the rear backrests.
Each warning indicator is divided into six
yellow and two red distance segments for
either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic
system is ready when the border around
the indicator is illuminated.
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the
eighth distance segment illuminates, you
have reached the minimum distance.
The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be
activated.
앫
Front area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of two seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position P.
앫
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of two seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position D or P.
Gear selector lever position
Warning indicator
D
Front area activated
R or N
Front and rear area
activated
P
Neither activated
1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
273
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Parktronic system
on/off
Switching on the Parktronic system
왘
The Parktronic system can be switched off
manually.
The Parktronic switch is located in the upper part of the center console.
1 Parktronic switch
2 Indicator lamp
Switching off the Parktronic system
왘
Press Parktronic switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
274
Press Parktronic switch 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
i The Parktronic system is automatically
switched on when the ignition is switched on
(컄 page 38).
If only the red distance segments illuminate and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty or
there is an interference from other radio or
ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system
will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on.
Parktronic system malfunction
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38).
If only the red distance segments illuminate and a acoustic warning sounds,
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system. The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch
comes on.
왘
Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(컄 page 372).
왘
Switch on the ignition.
왘
Have the Parktronic system checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
or
왘
Check the Parktronic system operation
at another location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic
signals.
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Roof rack (CLK coupe only)
Warning!
Preparing roof rack installation
G
Only use roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly attached roof-rack system or its load could become detached from the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
220 lbs (100 kg).
Take into consideration that when the roof
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the
vehicles without the roof rack loaded.
왘
Open trim covers 1 at the trim strips
in the roof.
왘
Only attach the roof-rack system to the
anchorage points under the trim
covers 1.
Observe manufacturer’s instructions
for installation.
1 Trim cover
! Load the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle cannot be damaged while driving.
Make sure
앫
you can fully raise the tilt/sliding sunroof*
앫
you can fully open the trunk
275
Controls in detail
Loading
Ski bag* (Canada only)
Unfolding ski bag (CLK cabriolet)
왘
Close soft top completely
(컄 page 261).
왘
Open the trunk.
왘
Fold luggage cover back in direction of
the arrow.
276
1 Left hinge
2 Right hinge
3 Pull strap
4 Handle
5 Cover
6 Armrest
왘
Pull ski bag roller blind upward using
pull strap 3.
왘
Fold armrest 6 down (arrow).
왘
Manually fold left 1 and right
hinges 2 of ski bag roller blind all the
way up.
왘
Pull handle 4 and swing cover 5
down.
Controls in detail
Loading
Unfolding ski bag (CLK coupe)
7 Hook and loop fastener
왘
Unfasten hook and loop fastener 7.
왘
Pull ski bag into passenger compartment and unfold.
8 Flap
9 Catch
왘
Pull down catch 9.
왘
Open the flap 8 downwards in the direction of the arrow.
1 Handle
2 Cover
3 Armrest
왘
Fold armrest 3 down (arrow).
왘
Pull handle 1 and swing cover 2
down.
277
컄컄
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄
Loading
4 Hook and loop fastener
5 Button
왘
Unfasten hook and loop fastener 4.
왘
Open the trunk.
왘
Pull ski bag into passenger compartment and unfold.
왘
Press button 5.
The flap opens downward.
왘
From trunk, slide skis into ski bag.
Warning!
G
The ski bag is designed for up to four pairs
of skis in the CLK coupe and for two pairs of
skis in the CLK cabriolet. Do not load the ski
bag with other objects.
Always fasten the ski bag securely. In an accident, an unfastened ski bag can cause injury to vehicle occupants.
278
Controls in detail
Loading
Unloading and folding
6 Strap
왘
Tighten strap 6 by pulling at the loose
end (arrow) until the skis in the ski bag
are tightly secured.
7 Hook
8 Eye
왘
Connect hook 7 to eye 8 located on
center tunnel in front of rear seat
bench.
왘
Tighten strap by pulling at the loose
end (arrow).
왘
Loosen both straps.
왘
Disconnect hook 7 from eye 8.
왘
Unload skis.
왘
Close flap in trunk.
왘
Fold and flatten ski bag lengthwise.
왘
Place folded ski bag inside recess of
backrest.
왘
Fasten hook and loop fastener.
왘
Close ski bag compartment cover.
279
Controls in detail
Loading
Closing ski bag roller blind
Removing the ski bag
CLK coupe
CLK cabriolet
You can remove the ski bag for cleaning or
drying.
For ski bag removal, we recommend that
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning!
1 Left hinge
2 Right hinge
3 Pull strap
왘
Pull ski bag roller blind downward using
pull strap 3.
왘
Manually fold left 1 and right
hinges 2 of ski bag roller blind all the
way down.
왘
To snap ski bag roller blind into place,
press left and right hinges where the
word PRESS can be seen.
왘
Fold luggage cover back and close it
securely (컄 page 264).
280
G
Never drive vehicle with trunk open while
the ski bag is removed. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior,
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
i To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the trunk, always close the flap.
1 Button
2 Ski bag frame
3 Flap
왘
Open trunk lid.
왘
Press button 1.
The flap 3 opens downward.
왘
Press button 1 firmly until ski bag
frame 2 is released.
왘
Pull ski bag frame 2 with ski bag out.
Controls in detail
Loading
Warning!
G
Never drive vehicle with trunk open while
the ski bag is removed. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior,
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
i To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the trunk, always close the flap.
Installing the ski bag
Install the ski bag in the reverse order.
왘
Push ski bag frame 2 with ski bag inward until the ski bag frame snaps into
place.
왘
Close flap 3.
왘
Close trunk lid.
Split rear bench seat (CLK coupe only)
To expand the cargo area, you can fold
down the left and right rear seat backrests.
Folding the backrest forward
The release handle 1 is located in the
trunk.
The two sections can be folded down
separately.
Warning!
G
When expanding the luggage compartment,
always fold the seat cushions fully forward.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the backrests must remain properly locked in the upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
1 Release handle
왘
Pull release handle 1.
왘
Fully retract and fold rearward head restraint (컄 page 121).
컄컄
Always use the cargo tie down rings
(컄 page 284).
281
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄
Setting up rear seat bench
2 Release handle
왘
Pull release handle 2.
3 Seat cushion
4 Seat backrest
왘
Fold seat cushion 3 forward.
5 Indicator right
6 Indicator left
왘
Fold rear seat backrest 4 forward.
왘
Fold backrest 4 (컄 page 282) rearward until it engages.
왘
Fold seat cushions 3 (컄 page 282)
rearward until it locks into position.
! Always release the seat cushion and fold it
forward before folding the corresponding seat
backrest forward. The covering on the seat backrest may otherwise be damaged.
If a backrest is not locked into position,
a red indicator 5 or 6 will be visible.
왘
282
Check for secure locking by pushing
and pulling on the backrest.
Controls in detail
Loading
Warning!
G
Loading instructions
If a red indicator is visible with the backrest
up, then the backrest is not properly locked
into position.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possible since it influences the handling characteristics of
the vehicle.
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied, or the extended trunk compartment is not in use.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the backrest.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo.
i To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the trunk, always lock backrest in its upright position.
Always place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
! CLK cabriolet:
To prevent damage to the soft top or luggage/cargo when lowering the roof:
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the load limit indicated on the
corresponding Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (컄 page 334).
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
앫
load trunk only to the height of the luggage
cover
앫
do not permit luggage/cargo to push up the
closed luggage cover
앫
do not place anything on the shelf behind the
roll bar
앫
do not place anything on the soft top compartment cover
283
Controls in detail
Loading
Warning!
G
CLK coupe:
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using cargo tie-down rings and
fastening materials appropriate for the
weight and size of the load.
CLK cabriolet:
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible.
284
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
Cargo tie-down rings (CLK coupe only)
The four cargo tie-down rings are located
in the trunk.
i The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
CLK coupe: The enlarged cargo area should only
be used for items which do not fit in the trunk
alone.
Cargo tie-down rings
왘
Carefully secure cargo by applying
even load on all rings with rope of
sufficient strength to hold down the
cargo.
Always follow loading instructions
(컄 page 283).
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Storage compartments
Warning!
Glove box
Storage compartment in the dashboard
1 Glove box lid
2 Glove box lid release
1 Cover
G
Do not store any flammable substances inside the vehicle or in the trunk. Otherwise
the flammable substances could ignite and
start a fire inside the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
Opening storage box
Opening the glove box
왘
왘
Pull glove box lid release 2.
Push cover 1.
The storage box opens automatically.
The glove box lid 1 opens downward.
Closing storage box
Closing the glove box
왘
Push glove box lid 1 up to close.
왘
Push the storage box back until it
engages.
i Audio system/COMAND* with CD changer*: The CD changer and the AUX-socket are
located in the glove box.
285
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ruffled storage bags
The ruffled storage bag cannot protect
transported goods in the event of an
accident.
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
Storage bags are located on the rear side
of the front seats.
Warning!
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
ruffled storage bag. In an accident, during
hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they
could be thrown around inside the vehicle
and cause injury to vehicle occupants.
286
G
The parcel net is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
G
The ruffled storage bag is intended for storing light-weight items only.
Warning!
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Armrest in the rear passenger
compartment
Center armrest
The compartment in the center armrest
contains a cup holder and the telephone*
compartment.
1 Cover
Opening compartment
왘
1 Cover
2 Telephone* compartment
3 Cup holder
i The Roadside Assistance button •
(컄 page 298) and the Information button ¡
(컄 page 299) are located below the cover 1.
Slide cover 1 in direction of arrow.
Closing compartment
왘
Slide cover 1 back.
Opening telephone compartment
왘
왘
Pull the top of the armrest out and fold
it down.
i CLK coupe: The armrest contains a cup
holder (컄 page 288).
! Do not sit on or lean your full body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down, as
you could otherwise damage it.
Slide cover 1 in direction of arrow and
open it fully.
Closing telephone compartment
왘
Slide cover 1 back.
287
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holders
Warning!
G
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
do not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury.
Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
to you and others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident.
288
Keep in mind that objects placed in cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle
interior may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Cup holder in rear seat armrest
(CLK coupe only)
Cup holder in the center armrest
Opening cup holder
왘
Briefly press the front of cup holder.
The cup holder slides out slightly.
왘
Pull out the cup holder until it stops.
Closing cup holder
1 Cup holder in compartment
(컄 page 287)
2 Cup holder
왘
Slide cup holder back in the direction
of arrow 1 until it engages.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
Removing ashtray insert
Warning!
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move the gear
selector lever to position N and turn off the
engine.
1 Cover plate
2 Sliding button
3 Ashtray insert
Opening ashtray
왘
왘
Secure vehicle from movement by
setting the parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to
position N.
Push the ashtray insert 3 down into
the retainer until it engages.
왘
Push down cover plate 1 to close the
ashtray.
The cover plate engages.
Rear seat ashtray
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
왘
Briefly press the bottom of cover
plate 1.
The cover plate opens automatically.
왘
Push sliding button 2 to the right.
The ashtray is disengaged and slides a
short way in the direction of arrow 3.
왘
Remove the ashtray insert.
1 Button
2 Ashtray insert
3 Cover
Opening ashtray
왘
Pull at top of cover 3.
289
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing ashtray insert
왘
Push button 1 to disengage ashtray
insert 2 and remove it.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
왘
Push the ashtray insert 2 down into
the retainer until it engages.
왘
Push at top of cover 3 to close
ashtray.
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
Cigarette lighter
Warning!
G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
Hold the knob only.
Make sure any children traveling with you do
not injure themselves or start a fire with the
hot cigarette lighter.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you,
290
1 Cover
2 Cigarette lighter
왘
Briefly press the bottom of cover
plate 1.
The cover plate opens automatically.
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 2.
The cigarette lighter will pop out
automatically when hot.
왘
Push down cover plate 1 to close the
ashtray.
The cover plate engages.
! The lighter socket can accommodate 12V
DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum of
85 W) designed for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind, however,
that connecting accessories to the lighter socket
(for example extensive connecting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit properly)
can damage the lighter socket. With the socket
damaged, the lighter may no longer be able to be
placed in the heating (pushed-in) position, or the
lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not
hot enough.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical accessories designed for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V
power outlet (컄 page 291) in your vehicle whenever possible.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Power outlet in the rear passenger
compartment
Floormats*
Warning!
G
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets 4 and retainer pins 5.
1 Power outlet
2 Cover
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘
Pull at top of cover 2.
왘
Flip cover 1 to the left and insert
electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).
i The power outlet can be used to
accommodate electrical consumers (e.g. air
pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum
of 180 W.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal movement.
i To install or remove the floormat more easily, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible (컄 page 42).
Removing
왘
Pull floormats off of retainer pins 2 in
the direction of arrow 1.
왘
Remove the floormats.
Installing
왘
Lay down the floormat.
왘
Press the floormat eyelets 4 onto retainer pins 5 in the direction of
arrow 3.
291
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Warning!
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
292
G
Only operate the COMAND*1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
i Various mobile phone cradles can be installed in the front center armrest, see separate
installation instructions for the mobile phone
cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The functions and services available to you while
using the mobile phone depend on your service
provider and the type of mobile phone you are
using. See also separate operating manual for instructions on how to use your mobile phone.
When the mobile phone is inserted in the
cradle, you can operate the telephone using the following devices:
앫
mobile phone keypad
앫
COMAND* (see separate operating instructions)
앫
buttons s and t on the multifunction steering wheel (컄 page 142)
앫
audio system (컄 page 236)
Controls in detail
Useful features
Please note that these functions are only
available with Mercedes-Benz approved
mobile phones. Please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on features available for your
mobile phone of choice.
왘
If applicable, remove the cover for the
external antenna connection from the
back of the mobile phone and store it in
a safe place. Be sure to comply with the
mobile phone’s operating instructions
as well.
Open telephone compartment
(컄 page 287).
! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along
with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the
mobile phone cradle.
The mobile phone is connected to the
network via the external antenna.
The battery is charged depending on its
charge status and the position of the
SmartKey in the starter switch. The
charge procedure will be indicated in
the mobile phone’s display.
Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone
cradle
Once the mobile phone has been inserted
in the mobile phone cradle, you have to
use the hands-free device to respond during phone calls.
Push the top of the mobile phone in direction of arrow 1, until the lug on the
mobile phone release button engages.
The mobile phone is linked to the
hands-free device and the multifunction steering wheel.
The cradle is located in the front center
armrest.
왘
왘
Example illustration
1 Insert the mobile phone
2 Connector contact
3 Mobile phone cradle
왘
Slide the lower end of the mobile phone
into connector contact 2 on
cradle 3.
You can place or receive phone calls. You
can control other functions of the mobile
phone via the control system
(컄 page 169), audio system (컄 page 236),
COMAND* (see separate operating
instructions).
i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* out of the starter switch, the
mobile phone remains switched on for approximately 10 minutes. If you place or receive a call
during this time, the mobile phone switches off
10 minutes after the call has been completed.
293
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing mobile phone from mobile
phone cradle
Changing mobile phone cradle
If you require a different cradle for your
mobile phone, remove the present cradle
before installing a new one.
Installing a different mobile phone
cradle
Removing an existing mobile phone
cradle
Example illustration
Example illustration
1 Release catch for mobile phone
2 Mobile phone cradle
1 Contact plate
2 Recesses
3 Mobile phone cradle
i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open
flip top before removing from the cradle while a
call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be
disconnected.
왘
Press release catch in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of
mobile phone cradle 2.
294
Example illustration
1 To release the mobile phone cradle
2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
3 Mobile phone cradle
왘
Press release button in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone
cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2.
왘
Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into
recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
왘
Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward
until it engages.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid
! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system
may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance
call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete
either of these steps will result in a system that
is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding activation,
please call the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and
cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button ç. The volume can also be
adjusted using the volume knob on your
audio system or COMAND* head unit.
왘
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
i The SOS button is located in the overhead
앫
automatic and manual emergency
앫
roadside assistance and
The Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ are located in the center armrest below the cover (컄 page 287).
앫
information
control panel (컄 page 33).
Shortly after the completion of your
Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive
a user ID and password. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock and
more.
i The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If
either of these signals is unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other
means.
System self-check
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
malfunctions are detected and indicated
(the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ stay on longer
than 10 seconds or do not come on).
The message Tele Aid Inoperative appears in the multifunction display.
295
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button remain illuminated
constantly in red and/or message
Tele Aid Inoperative is displayed in the
multifunction display after the system
self-check, a malfunction in the system has
been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
296
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated
automatically following an accident in
which the emergency tensioning devices
(ETDs) or air bags deploy.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See (컄 page 297) for
instructions on initiating an emergency call
manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message Connecting Call
appears in the multifunction display and
the audio system is muted. When the
connection is established, the message
Call Connected appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the
emergency, such as the location of the
vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite
location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
The Response Center will attempt to
determine more precisely the nature of the
emergency provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫
it has been activated and is
operational. Activation requires a
subscription for monitoring services,
connection and cellular air time
앫
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the Response
Center
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from
the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Initiating an emergency call manually
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
왘
Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
왘
Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
Warning!
Should this occur, assistance must be
summoned by other means.
1 Cover
2 SOS button
왘
Briefly press on cover 1.
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they
receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle
occupants.
The cover will open.
왘
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
297
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button •
The Roadside Assistance button • is
located below the center armrest cover.
왘
Press and hold the • button (for
longer than 2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The • button will flash while the call
is in progress. The message
Connecting Call will appear in the
multifunction display and the audio
system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message Call Connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established.
왘
Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
298
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may
apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance
manual for more information.
The following is only available in the USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
i The indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button • remains illuminated in
red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on the ignition (together with the SOS button and the Information
button ¡).
See system self-check (컄 page 295) when the
indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays
on longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance
button • is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The
message Call Failed appears in the multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the audio system or the
COMAND* head unit.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡
The Information button ¡ is located
below the center armrest cover.
왘
Press and hold the ¡ button (for
longer than 2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The
¡ button will flash while the call is
in progress. The message
Connecting Call will appear in the
multifunction display and the audio
system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message Call Connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you
separately) to learn more (USA only).
i The indicator lamp on the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on the ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button •).
See System self-check (컄 page 295) when the
indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays
on longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Information
button ¡ is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call Failed appears in the multifunction
display.
Information calls can be terminated using
the t button on the multifunction steering
wheel or the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the audio system or the
COMAND* head unit.
! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing
after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system
has detected a malfunction or the service is not
currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
an Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system
checked or contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as
possible.
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be
established. Information regarding the
operation of your vehicle, the nearest
299
Controls in detail
Useful features
Call priority
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the
Remote door unlock
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are active, an Emergency call is still possible. In
this case, the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls.
audio system or the COMAND* system audio is
muted and the selected mode (radio or CD)
pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed)
switches off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord
and place the call. The COMAND* navigation
system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use,
and spoken commands are only available by
pressing the RPT button on the COMAND* head
unit. A pop-up window will appear in the
COMAND* display to indicate that a Tele Aid call
is in progress.
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
i The indicator lamp in the respective button
flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only
be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information calls,
which can also be terminated by pressing
button ton the multifunction steering wheel
or the respective button for ending a telephone
call on the audio system or the COMAND* head
unit.
! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or
the system does not reset, contact the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA), or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA, or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.
왘
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘
Then return to your vehicle and pull the
trunk recessed handle for a minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message Connecting Call
appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
300
Controls in detail
Useful features
i The remote door unlock feature is available
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
if the relevant cellular phone network is available.
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
The SOS button will flash and the message
Connecting Call will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock
command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center
specialist will attempt to establish voice contact
with the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more
than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you
must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk
recessed handle again.
왘
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered
incident report.
왘
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Response Center will
contact the local law enforcement and
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
provided to law enforcement.
Garage door opener*
The integrated remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices. It provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices such as
garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink® or
some other systems.
Before the integrated remote control can
be used, it must be programmed to the garage door opener, gate operator or other
device you wish to operate. See the following instructions for programming
information.
If you have any questions, please call the
Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
i When the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically
to the Response Center, see “Anti-theft alarm
system” (컄 page 97).
301
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control
1
Indicator lamp
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
Needed for programming (not part of
vehicle equipment):
5
Hand-held remote control of garage door opener, gate operator
or other device
6
Hand-held remote control
button
302
G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
down. When programming a gate operator,
the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
– signaling the door to stop and reverse –
does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
When programming a garage door opener,
park outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide
(CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Programming the integrated remote
control
Step 1:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
Step 2:
왘
If you have previously programmed a
signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to
step 3.
If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time, press
and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and release
them only when indicator lamp 1
Controls in detail
Useful features
mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
release the buttons until step 5 is completed.
begins to flash after approximately
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory.
If you later wish to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter
buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3.
Step 3:
왘
Hold the end of hand-held remote
control 5 of the device you wish to
train approximately 2 to 5 inches
(5 to12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be programmed, while keeping indicator
lamp 1 in view.
Step 4:
왘
If indicator lamp 1 stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the respective signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and
released.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the
first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start
flashing after 20 seconds.
Step 5:
왘
After indicator lamp 1 changes from a
slow to a rapidly flashing light, release
the hand-held remote control button
and the signal transmitter button.
i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about
2 seconds and then turns to a constant light,
continue with programming steps 8 through 12
as your garage door opener may be equipped
with the “rolling code” feature.
Step 7:
왘
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Step 6:
왘
Press and hold the just-trained signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe indicator lamp 1.
Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control
button 6 and the desired signal trans-
303
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 8:
왘
Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the
“training” button may also be referred
to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there
is difficulty locating the transmitting
button, refer to the garage door opener
Operator’s Manual.
Step 9:
왘
Press the “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
304
You have 30 seconds to initiate the
following step.
Step 12:
왘
Step 10:
왘
Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4).
Step 11:
왘
Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training
process.
i Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same
signal transmitter button a third time to complete the training process.
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 13:
왘
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 4:
i Upon completion of programming the inte-
Operation of integrated remote control
왘
grated remote control, make sure you retain the
hand-held remote control that came with the garage door opener, gate operator or other device.
You may need it for use in other vehicles, for future programming of an integrated remote control, or simply for continued use as a hand-held
remote control to operate the respective device
in other situations.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Select and press the appropriate
integrated signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote
controlled device.
왘
왘
Press and hold the signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been successfully trained.
While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
“cycle” your hand-held remote control
button 6 as follows: Press and hold
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release
it for 2 seconds, and again press and
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this sequence on the hand-held remote control until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds.
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Do not release the button.
왘
Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
signal transmitter button, proceed with
programming starting with step 3.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Simultaneously press and hold outer
signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4,
for approximately 20 seconds, until
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.
305
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming tips
앫
If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are
some helpful tips:
앫
앫
앫
Check the frequency of hand-held remote control 5 (typically located on
the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control is compatible
with radio-frequency devices operating
between 280-390 MHz.
Put a new battery in hand-held remote
control 5. This will increase the likelihood of the hand-held remote control
sending a faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control.
While performing step 3, hold
hand-held remote control 5 at different lengths and angles from the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 in
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.
306
앫
If another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
programming steps again using that
other hand-held remote control. Make
sure new batteries are in the hand-held
remote control before beginning the
procedure.
Straighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This
may help improve transmitting and/or
receiving signals.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Certain types of garage door openers are in- i Canada only:
compatible with the integrated remote control. If
you should experience further difficulties with
programming the integrated remote control,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
307
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find
detailed information on operating,
maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
308
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of
maximum rpm in each gear).
앫
Shift gears in a timely manner.
앫
Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
앫
Select mode C as the preferred shift
program (컄 page 178) for the first
1000 miles (1500 km).
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
앫
During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do
not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫
During this period, avoid engine speeds
above 4500 rpm in each gear.
앫
Shift gears at the correct time.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
to your vehicle type, also apply when
driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km)
after the engine or the rear differential has
been replaced.
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating
conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended tire
inflation pressures.
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and
deceleration.
앫
Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet and as required
by the Maintenance System. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
CLK coupe: Remove roof rack when not
in use.
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Warning!
G
Make sure absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure the pedals still have
sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between
or beneath the pedals. You could then no
longer brake or accelerate. This could lead
to accidents and injury.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.
309
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
310
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter
switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button* in position 0 or 1) when
Brakes
Warning!
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
If your brake system is normally only subject to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
앫
the parking brake is being tested on a brake
test dynamometer
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (컄 page 92).
앫
the vehicle is being towed with the front axle
raised
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid level in
the reservoir.
Active braking action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on and an
acoustic warning sounds although the
parking brake is released (컄 page 380).
Operation
Driving instructions
Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear
(컄 page 404).
Have the brake system inspected
immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
High-performance brake system
(CLK 63 AMG only)
The high-performance brake system is
designed to operate under the extremely
high operating demands required to
accommodate the performance capabilities of the vehicle. The brakes may
produce a squeaking-type noise depending
on the
! When driving down long and steep grades,
앫
vehicle speed
relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
앫
brake force applied
앫
ambient conditions, e.g. temperature
and humidity
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
park, so that the air stream can cool down
the brakes faster.
As with any brake system, the wear of individual brake system components such as
brake pads or discs strongly depends on
your driving style and the conditions under
which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style calling for high demand braking
will cause your vehicle’s brakes to wear
more quickly.
311
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
New vehicle brake pads and discs, and
replacement brake pads and discs may take
several hundred miles of driving until they
provide optimum braking efficiency. Until
that time, you may need to use increased
brake pedal pressure while braking. Please
be aware of this and adjust your driving and
braking accordingly during this break-in
period.
Excessive high demand braking will cause
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and brake condition messages in the multifunction display.
Especially for high performance driving, it is
important to maintain and have the brake
system checked regularly.
312
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine gradually. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended
period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake wear
and drivetrain wear.
Parking
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
damage to the vehicle or the vehicle
drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement,
always do the following before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle:
앫
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, always turn
the front wheels towards the road curb.
Operation
Driving instructions
앫
앫
Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
Tires
Warning!
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if the
tires are subject to extreme operating
conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads,
high ambient temperatures).
313
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
For more information, see “Tires and
wheels” (컄 page 331).
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
314
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(컄 page 362) with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise
appropriate caution.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Operation
Driving instructions
Tire speed rating
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use
prudent driving speeds appropriate to
prevailing conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
앫
CLK 350, CLK 550:
130 mph (210 km/h)
앫
CLK 63 AMG:
155 mph (250 km/h)
앫
CLK 63 AMG with increased top
speed*:
174 mph (280 km/h)
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
may have a tire speed rating above the
maximum speed permitted by the
electronic speed limiter.
For Information on how to identify the tire
speed rating on a tire’s sidewall, see “Tire
size designation, load and speed rating”
(컄 page 349).
If you are uncertain about the correct reading of the information given on a tire’s sidewall, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to assist you.
i For information on tire speed rating for winter tires, see “Winter tires” (컄 page 362).
For additional general information on tire speed
markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating”
(컄 page 351).
Make sure your tires have the required tire
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
the “Technical data” section (컄 page 482),
for example when purchasing new tires.
315
Operation
Driving instructions
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.
i For information on driving with snow chains,
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.
see “Snow chains” (컄 page 363).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 362).
316
Operation
Driving instructions
Standing water
! Do not drive through flooded areas or water
of unknown depth. Before driving through water,
determine its depth. Never accelerate before
driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive
slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage
to electrical components or wiring of the engine
or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake,
causing severe internal engine damage. Any
such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Control and operation of radio transmitters
Passenger compartment
Warning!
G
COMAND*, radio and telephone*
Always fasten items being carried as
securely as possible.
Warning!
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
1
Observe all legal requirements.
317
Operation
Driving instructions
Telephones* and two-way radios
Catalytic converter
Warning!
Warning!
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a mobile
phone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
318
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our
recommended maintenance instructions
as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
! To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded gasoline
in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation
should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and potentially
start a fire.
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay, or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments to the engine should therefore
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians.
Operation
Driving instructions
Engine adjustments should not be altered
in any way. Moreover, the specified service
jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open at all times.
Coolant temperature
Warning!
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant
temperature may rise close to
approximately 248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G
앫
Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids, which may have
leaked into the engine compartment, to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
319
Operation
At the gas station
Refueling
Warning!
G
i In cases where the central locking system is
왘
Turn off the engine
not releasing the fuel filler flap, or the opening
mechanism is clamping, notify Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Vehicles with SmartKey: Remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Open the
driver’s door (with driver’s door open,
starter switch is now in position 0,
same as with SmartKey removed from
starter switch). The driver’s door then
can be closed again.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
왘
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or clothing contact,
extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors can damage to your
health.
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
320
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by arrow 1.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
1 To open the fuel filler flap
2 To insert the fuel filler cap
왘
Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise and
hold on to it until possible pressure is
released.
Operation
At the gas station
왘
Take off the fuel cap and set it in the direction of arrow 2 in the recess on the
fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert the filler nozzle unit.
왘
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top off or
overfill.
G
i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
injury.
Information on gasoline quality can normally be
found on the fuel pump. Please contact gas station personnel in case labels on the pump cannot
be found.
Warning!
왘
Replace the fuel cap by turning it
clockwise until it audibly engages.
i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap before
locking your vehicle as the flap locking pin
prevents closing after you have locked the
vehicle.
왘
minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average
of 96 RON/86 MON).
For more information on gasoline, see “Premium
unleaded gasoline” (컄 page 492), or the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only),
or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap
open can cause the ú malfunction indicator
lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator lamp (Canada only) to illuminate.
More information can be found in the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 381).
Close the fuel filler flap.
321
Operation
At the gas station
Check regularly and before a long trip
Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). For more information,
see “Coolant” (컄 page 328) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”
(컄 page 489).
Engine compartment (CLK 550, example)
1 Coolant level
2 Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed)
3 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
i Opening the hood, see (컄 page 323).
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
For more information on filling up the
washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer
system and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 330).
Brake fluid
Engine oil level
Removing fuse box cover,
see (컄 page 473).
For more information on engine oil, see
“Engine oil” (컄 page 325).
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see also “Practical hints” (컄 page 380).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
“Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 443).
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” (컄 page 55).
Tire inflation pressure
For more information, see “Checking tire
inflation pressure” (컄 page 341).
322
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
Hood
Opening
Warning!
Warning!
G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others.
Warning!
G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature indicator indicates that the engine
is overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Warning!
G
You could be injured when the hood is open
- even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, let the engine cool off completely before touching any components on
the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
precautions.
G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
Warning!
G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if the ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually.
323
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing
The hood lock release lever is located to
the left of the steering wheel under the
dashboard.
Warning!
G
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
not to catch hands or fingers.
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
2 Lever for opening the hood
1 Hood lock release lever
왘
Pull lever 1 downwards.
The hood is unlocked.
왘
Push lever 2 under the hood upwards.
왘
Pull up on the hood and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged before driving off. Do not continue driving if the
hood can no longer engage after an accident, for example. The hood could otherwise
come loose while the vehicle is in motion
and injure you and/or others.
왘
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or
hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are
folded forward away from the windshield.
Let the hood drop from a height of
approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
The hood will lock audibly.
왘
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
324
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. More
information on this subject is available at any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Checking engine oil level
When checking the oil level
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground.
앫
with the engine at operating temperature yet, the vehicle must have been
stationary for at least 5 minutes with
the engine turned off.
앫
with the engine not at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been
stationary for at least 30 minutes with
the engine turned off.
CLK 350 / CLK 550
1 Oil dipstick
2 Upper (max) mark
3 Lower (min) mark
컄컄
325
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄
To check the engine oil level with the oil
dipstick, do the following:
CLK 63 AMG
1 Oil dipstick
2 Upper (max) mark
3 Lower (min) mark
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 323).
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1.
왘
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
왘
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
dipstick guide tube.
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
approximately 3 seconds to obtain accurate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is between the lower (min) mark 3 and
upper (max) mark 2 of oil dipstick 1.
i CLK 350:
The filling quantity between the upper and lower
marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
CLK 550 / CLK 63 AMG:
The filling quantity between the upper and lower
marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
왘
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil, see “Adding engine oil” (컄 page 327).
For more information on engine oil, see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”
(컄 page 489).
For more information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine
oil, see the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 409).
326
Operation
Engine compartment
Adding engine oil
왘
Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters
required for vehicles with Maintenance System.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle
literature portfolio, or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification
other than those expressly required for the
Maintenance System, or changing of oil and oil
filter at change intervals longer than those called
for by the Maintenance System will result in
engine or emission control system damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
CLK 350 / CLK 550
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
It could cause damage to the engine and emission control system not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
1 Filler cap
왘
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 489) and (컄 page 491).
Transmission fluid level
CLK 63 AMG
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the automatic transmission.
1 Filler cap
327
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant
앫
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
앫
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze.
When checking the coolant level,
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
앫
the coolant temperature must be below 158°F (70°C)
Warning!
G
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine
compartment.
In order to avoid potentially serious burns:
앫
앫
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature indicator
indicates that the coolant is overheated.
328
Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly
approximately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess
pressure.
왘
Continue turning the cap 2 counterclockwise and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
앫
for cold coolant: reaches the marking
(plastic bridge) inside the reservoir
앫
for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
왘
Add coolant as required.
왘
Replace and tighten cap 2.
More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 494).
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if the coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow the coolant
to cool down before removing cap.
The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid
and is under pressure.
왘
1 Coolant expansion tank
2 Cap
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
G
Warning!
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the
engine compartment on the right-hand
side (컄 page 464).
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated
service life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet
for battery maintenance intervals.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.
Wear eye protection.
Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a
physician if necessary.
Risk of explosion.
Keep children away.
If you use your vehicle mostly for
short-distance trips, you will need to have
the battery charge checked more
frequently.
Fire, open flames and smoking
are prohibited when handling
batteries. Avoid creating sparks.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and
faceguard.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator’s Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
329
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
water. Premix the windshield washer fluid
in a suitable container.
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts,
because it may ignite and burn. You could be
seriously burned.
왘
1 Washer fluid reservoir cap
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of:
앫
3.2 US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles with windshield washer system
앫
6.4 US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with heated
windshield washer system* and headlamp cleaning system*.
330
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
and water (or commercially available
premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below the freezing
point. Failure to do so could result in damage to
the washer system/reservoir.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
For more information, see “Windshield
washer system and headlamp cleaning
system*” (컄 page 496).
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and
purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged.
앫
The operating clearance of the wheels
and the tires may no longer be correct.
Warning!
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. The operating safety of the vehicle
cannot be assured when such tires are used.
Important guidelines
앫
Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as
required.
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
331
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance
Warning!
G
Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure see
“Recommended tire inflation pressure”
(컄 page 339).
332
Tire inspection
Life of tire
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫
excessive treadwear (컄 page 333)
앫
cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber
앫
bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation.
Spare tires will age and become worn over
time even if never used, and thus should be
inspected and replaced when necessary.
앫
Driving style
앫
Tire inflation pressure
앫
Distance driven
Warning!
G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
than 1/8 in (3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply
reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Storing tires
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and
gasoline.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫
Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
앫
Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor safety
laws consider a tire to be worn when the
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires
1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
333
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation
Loading the vehicle
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.
i Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced.
Always observe and follow applicable temporary
use restrictions and speed limitations indicated
on the spare wheel.
334
1) The Tire and Loading Information
placard can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar. This Tire and Loading
Information placard tells you important
information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the
total weight that can be carried in the
vehicle. It also contains information on
the proper size and recommended tire
inflation pressures for the original
equipment tires on your vehicle.
2) The certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel and cargo. The certification label
also tells you about the front and rear
axle weight capacity, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
is the total allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear).
Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
either the front axle or rear axle.
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the
Tire and Loading Information placard with
regards to loading your vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information
Warning!
Tire and Loading Information placard
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information
placard example are for illustration purposes
only. Load limit data is specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in the illustration
below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
왘
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard.
The combined weight of all occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load
(if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced in that statement.
Seating capacity
1 Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. The Tire and
Loading Information placard showing the
seating capacity is located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 334).
The Tire and Loading Information placard
showing the load limit information is
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
335
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information
Step 1
Step 5
placard example are for illustration purposes
only. Seating data are specific to each vehicle
and may vary from data shown in the illustration
below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
왘
왘
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information placard.
Step 2
Step 6 (if applicable)
왘
왘
Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
Step 3
왘
1 Seating capacity information on the
Tire and Loading Information placard.
Steps for determining correct load limit
The following steps have been developed
as required of all manufacturers under Title
49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part
575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
336
Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
Step 4
왘
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lbs passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs).
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 338).
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information placard (컄 page 335).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined weight limit
of occupants and cargo
from Tire and Loading
Information placard
Number of Seating
occupants configu(driver and ration
passengers)
Occupants weight
Combined
Available cargo/luggage
weight of all and trailer tongue weight
occupants
(total load limit weight
from Tire and Loading
Information placard minus
combined weight of all
occupants)
1
4
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
630 lbs
1500 lbs - 630 lbs = 870 lbs
1500 lbs
front: 2
rear: 2
2
1500 lbs
3
front: 1
rear: 2
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
540 lbs
1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
3
1500 lbs
1
front:1
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
150 lbs
1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 338).
337
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(컄 page 338) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure your
vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front
or rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and
GAWR from the certification label. The certification label can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar, see “Technical data”
(컄 page 478).
338
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
(컄 page 338) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if
applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on
a suitable commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects
the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
added to the weight of all occupants riding
and any cargo you are carrying in the
vehicle. The tongue load typically is ten
percent of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it.
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and their
cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire and
Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 334).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least three hours or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
In addition to the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
pressure label (if available) on the fuel filler
flap (컄 page 320) for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations. For more information, see
“Important notes on tire inflation
pressure” (컄 page 340).
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information
placard example are for illustration purposes
only. Tire data are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in the illustration
below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
339
Operation
Tires and wheels
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire inflation pressure drops
repeatedly:
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard
lists the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for maximum loaded vehicle
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
apply to the tires installed as original
equipment.
340
앫
Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the tire inflation pressure label on
the inside of the fuel filler flap (if available)
on how to adjust the cold tire inflation
pressure. If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can build up
and result in sudden tire failure.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire
inflation pressure label on the inside of the
fuel filler flap, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for proper tire inflation pressure.
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for
speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified
on the tire inflation pressure label (if available)
located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label (if available) located on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
air temperature change. Keep this in mind
Operation
Tires and wheels
when checking tire inflation pressure
where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least three hours or
driven less than one mile (1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting less
than three hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
underinflated.
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
왘
Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire.
왘
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.
왘
Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 334). If necessary, add air to
achieve the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the
valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the
tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.
왘
Install the valve cap.
왘
Repeat this procedure for each tire.
341
Operation
Tires and wheels
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)
While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the system to detect a significant loss of pressure in a tire.
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due
to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
see a corresponding warning message in
the multifunction display.
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a restricted manner or with a delay
앫
if snow chains are mounted to the
vehicle
앫
in presence of ice and snow
앫
if you are driving on a loose surface
(e.g. sand or gravel)
앫
if you are driving in a very sporty manner (involving rapid acceleration or high
speeds in curves)
앫
if you are driving with the roof loaded
(CLK coupe) or very heavy cargo
342
Warning!
G
When the multifunction display shows the
message Tire Pressure Check Tires,
one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. You should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, on the
tire inflation pressure label. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 334) or,
if available, on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(컄 page 320).
Warning!
G
The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar (컄 page 334) or, if available, on the
tire inflation pressure label located on the
inside of the fuel filler flap (컄 page 320).
The Run Flat Indicator does not replace
regular checks of the tire inflation pressures
since a gradual pressure loss in more than
one tire cannot be detected by the Run Flat
Indicator.
The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
maneuvers.
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘
Restarting the Run Flat Indicator
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
restarted in the following situations:
앫
If you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
앫
If you have replaced the wheels or tires
앫
If you have installed new wheels or
tires
왘
Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or,
if available, the tire inflation pressure
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap,
make sure the tire inflation pressure of
all four tires is correct.
Warning!
G
The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in
a reliable manner if you have set the correct
tire inflation pressures for each tire.
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was
set, the system will monitor the pressure
according to the incorrect value.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
If you wish to confirm activation:
Make sure the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 147).
왘
Press button æ.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the following message appears in
the multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
Restarted
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure values for all four tires.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
왘
Press the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 138).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Restart
Run Flat Indicator?
Cancel
Yes
Press button ç.
or
왘
Wait until the message
Restart
Run Flat Indicator?
Cancel
Yes
disappears.
343
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire pressure electronically
with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS), (USA only)
i This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Warning!
i The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the
supplemental tire pressure information on
the inside of the fuel filler flap.
(TPMS) is equipped with a combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 29). Depending on
how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS
system itself:
앫
앫
If the telltale illuminates continuously, one
or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. There is no malfunction in the TPMS.
If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system
itself is not operating properly.
344
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
are equipped with the proper electronic
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
tires.
G
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the Minispare, should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and
Loading Information placard or, if available,
on the tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute
and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunction develops, it may take up to 10 minutes
for the system to signal a malfunction using
the TPMS telltale flashing and illumination
sequence.
The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes
driving if the malfunction has been corrected.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to
malfunction.
345
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire inflation pressure warnings
If the system detects a significant loss of
tire inflation pressure in one or more than
one tire, a message appears in the multifunction display.
Example illustration
In addition, a warning signal sounds.
Restarting the TPMS
Warning!
G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might loose control over the vehicle.
The TPMS must be restarted when you
have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
a new level (e.g. because of different load
or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
recalibrated to the current tire inflation
pressures.
왘
346
i Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire in-
Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 334) or, if available, the
supplemental tire inflation pressure
information on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (컄 page 320), make sure the
tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
correct.
flation pressure to the inflation pressure recommended for the vehicle operating condition. Tire
pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 334). Some
vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation
pressure information for driving at high speeds
(컄 page 340) or for vehicle loads less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition
(컄 page 335). If such information is provided, it
can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 147).
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the following message appears in
the multifunction display:
Tire Pressure
Monitor Active
Menu: R-Button
왘
Press button k or j to
selected Yes.
왘
Press the æ button.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Restarted
왘
After driving a few minutes the current
tire inflation pressure values are
accepted as reference pressures and
then monitored.
Press the reset button (컄 page 138).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Restart tire
tire pressure
monitor?
Cancel
Yes
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
Underinflated tires can:
앫
cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫
adversely affect fuel economy
앫
lead to tire failure from being
overheated
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
Press button k or j to
selected Cancel.
왘
Press the æ button.
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
347
Operation
Tires and wheels
Overinflated tires
Overinflated tires can:
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
앫
cause uneven tire wear
앫
be more prone to damage from road
hazards
앫
adversely affect ride comfort
앫
increase stopping distance
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
348
MOExtended system*
Tire labeling
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there
is a total loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
You may only use the MOExtended system
in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator
(컄 page 342).
For information on driving in the event of
pressure loss in one or more tires (emergency mode), see the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 463).
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
Operation
Tires and wheels
1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 356)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(컄 page 353)
3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 354)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 355)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 357)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 349)
8 Load identification (컄 page 352)
9 Tire name
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(컄 page 482).
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
General:
Depending on the design standards used,
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation.
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
3 Radial tire code
4 Rim diameter
5 Tire load rating
6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
349
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire width
Rim diameter
The tire width 1 (컄 page 349) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.
The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 349) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
indicated in inches (in).
Aspect ratio
The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 349) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio
is arrived at by dividing section height by
section width.
Tire code
The tire code 3 (컄 page 349) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 351).
350
Warning!
G
Tire load rating
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR (컄 page 358) of your
vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the
result which may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury to you or others.
The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 349) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄 page 354) where the maximum load
associated with the load index is indicated
in kilograms and lbs.
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Operation
Tires and wheels
For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(컄 page 352).
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 349) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 349) are also referred
to as “service description”.
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 349) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 349) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Tire speed rating
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 349)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
앫
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description
is comprised of the tire load rating 5
(컄 page 349) and the tire speed
rating 6 (컄 page 349).
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 349) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed capability.
351
Operation
Tires and wheels
If a service description 5 and 6
(컄 page 349) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
앫
Any tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
“ZR” in the size designation AND the
service description must be placed in
parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed
capability of the tire as being above
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
352
All-season and winter tires
Index
Speed rating
Q M+S
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
1
Load identification
or M+S.for winter tires.
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use
show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These
tires meet specific snow traction performance
requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions.
1 Load identification
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
Operation
Tires and wheels
In addition to tire load rating, special load
identification 1 may be molded into the
tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating (컄 page 349).
No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
code” and “Date of manufacture”.
1 DOT
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
3 Tire size
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
353
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Tire type code
A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 353)
which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
The code 4 (컄 page 353) may, at the
option of the manufacturer, be used as a
descriptive code for identifying significant
characteristics of the tire.
Manufacturer’s identification mark
Date of manufacture
The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
(컄 page 353) denotes the tire
manufacturer.
The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 353)
identifies the week and year of manufacture.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (컄 page 331).
Tire size
The code 3 (컄 page 353) indicates the
tire size.
354
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
Maximum tire load
1 Maximum tire load rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Maximum tire inflation pressure
Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading
the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
For more information on tire load rating
(컄 page 350).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄 page 336).
G
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure (컄 page 339) for proper
tire inflation.
355
Operation
Tires and wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance
factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Traction
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
356
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning!
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning!
G
Tire ply material
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
357
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Bar
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Another metric unit for air pressure. There
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)
to 1 bar.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bars.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
358
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
the front and rear axle indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR indicated on the certification label
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Operation
Tires and wheels
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.
A standard unit of measure for air pressure
-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals
(kPa) to 1 bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
total load limit and production options
weight.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
The recommended tire inflation pressure is
listed on Tire and Loading Information
placard located on driver’s door B-pillar for
normal driving conditions and provides
best handling, tread life and riding comfort. If so equipped, supplemental information pertaining to special driving situations
can be found on the tire inflation pressure
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
359
Operation
Tires and wheels
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Tire speed rating
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”.
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire's traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire.
Tire load rating
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
360
Total load limit
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
remains.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires
Warning!
G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 334).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer’s recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 334).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Only use Genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
For information on wheel change, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 422) and
(컄 page 452).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
361
Operation
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your
vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service
includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” to a premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze
which is formulated for temperatures
below freezing point (컄 page 496).
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to make
sure the engine can be started even at
low ambient temperatures.
앫
Tire change.
362
Winter tires
Warning!
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated
tires provide special winter performance.
Make sure the tires you use show the
mountain/snowflake.marking on the
tire sidewall. These tires meet specific
snow traction performance requirements
of the Rubber Manufacturers Association
(RMA) and The Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) and have been designed
specifically for use in snow conditions. Use
of winter tires is the only way to achieve
the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and
the ESP® in winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.
G
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available at your tire dealer or any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
Winter driving
Warning!
G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Snow chains
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance for snow chains. To help avoid serious damage to your vehicle or tires, make sure the use of
snow chains is permissible as specified in the
“Technical data” section of this Operator’s Manual, see “Rims and tires” (컄 page 482).
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not higher
than 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
! If snow chains are mounted to the front
wheels, they may scrape against the body or axle
components. The tires or the vehicle could be
damaged as a result.
앫
Only use snow chains that are
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
be glad to advise you on this subject.
앫
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
Do not use snow chains on the spare
wheel (컄 page 482).
Block heater (Canada only)
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫
The engine is equipped with a block
heater.
앫
Using snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations
(컄 page 482).
i When driving with snow chains, you may
앫
Use snow chains in pairs and on rear
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer's
mounting instructions.
The electrical cable may be installed at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
wish to deactivate the ESP® (컄 page 94) before
setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve
the vehicle‘s traction.
CLK 63 AMG:
Do not switch off the ESP® when driving in snow
or with snow chains mounted.
363
Operation
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Maintenance Booklet at the times
called for by the maintenance service
indicator.
Maintenance service indicator
message
! Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
Starting approximately 1 month before the
next maintenance service is due, one of
the following messages will appear in the
multifunction display while you are driving
or when you switch on the ignition (example service A):
The type of maintenance service due is
indicated in the multifunction display:
Service A Due In XXXXX Miles (Km)
Service A Due In XXX Days
Service A Due Now
tracks distance driven and the time elapsed
since the last maintenance service and calculates other maintenance service work required.
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and
maintenance service indicator at the designated
times/mileage will result in vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
364
The maintenance service indicator message will notify you when the next maintenance service is due.
9
½
Basic service (A)
Extended service (B)
i The Maintenance System in your vehicle
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message is automatically cleared after approximately 30 seconds when you switch on
the ignition or when reaching the maintenance service threshold while driving.
You can also clear it yourself.
왘
Press reset button 1 on the
instrument cluster.
The maintenance service indicator
message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 147).
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term, you will see the
following message in the multifunction
display:
Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles (km)
Service A Exceeded By XXX Days
In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance
service.
1 Reset button
365
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator display
You can call up the maintenance service indicator display at any time to check when
the next maintenance service is due.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel
repeatedly until the standard display
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 147).
왘
Press button k or j until the
maintenance service indicator display
with the service symbol 9 or ½
and the service deadline appears in the
multifunction display.
i If the battery is disconnected, the days of
disconnection will not be included in the count
shown by the maintenance service indicator. To
arrive at the true maintenance service deadline,
you will need to subtract these days from the
days shown in the maintenance service indicator
message or maintenance service indicator
display.
Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator :.
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
In the event that the maintenance service
on your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
have the maintenance service indicator
reset. The automotive maintenance facility
carrying out the maintenance service will
find the information for resetting the
maintenance service indicator in the
maintenance-relevant information for your
vehicle. Such information is available from
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
directly from Mercedes-Benz.
i If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
been performed. Resetting the system without
performing the proper service as called for by
the maintenance service indicator will result in
engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
366
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle
Regular and proper care will help to
maintain the value of your vehicle. The
best way to protect your vehicle from
harmful environmental influences is to
wash it and use protective treatments
regularly.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by
extreme and varying climatic conditions,
but also by:
G
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the
particular container. Always open your
vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning
the inside.
앫
Tar
앫
Gravel and stone chipping
Warning!
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.
To avoid paint damage, you should
immediately remove:
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Bird droppings
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or
eliminates the aggressiveness and
potency of the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫
near the ocean
앫
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
앫
during winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a
thorough check is a washing of the
underbody followed by a thorough
inspection. Damaged areas need to be
re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the
factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the
body cavities which will last for the lifetime
of the vehicle. Post-production treatment
367
Operation
Vehicle care
is neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others
applied later.
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
368
Power washer
Paintwork, painted body components
! Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer on maintaining a
distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of
the power washer.
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape or
similar materials to painted body components
may damage the paintwork.
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires.
The intense jet of water can result in damage to
the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across the
surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts,
electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber
parts.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft
(approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
depending on the climate and washing
detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
왘
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Hand-wash
Automatic car wash
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical
components and connectors from contact
with water and cleaning agents.
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight.
You can have your car washed in an
automatic car wash from the start.
Automatic car washes without brushes are
preferable.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied to the
engine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control
linkage bushings and joints should be
lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys
should be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do
not forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close
proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft
(approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be
inadvertently locked or unlocked.
왘
왘
Only use a mild car wash detergent,
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
diffused jet of water.
Direct only a very weak spray towards
the ventilation intake.
왘
Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
왘
Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
dry with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
the finish.
! Do not use scouring agents on these parts.
왘
To protect the filter system, switch the
climate control or automatic climate
control to air recirculation mode, see
“Air recirculation” (컄 page 191) for
climate control or (컄 page 201) for
automatic climate control.
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
touchless car wash which uses caustic spray.
Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the
paint, ornamental moldings, or soft top
(CLK cabriolet).
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it
before running it through the automatic
car wash.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you nay scratch or damage the paint.
369
Operation
Vehicle care
! Make sure the windshield wiper switch is
set to 0 (컄 page 56). Otherwise, e.g. the rain
sensor could activate and cause the wipers to
move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle
damage.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior
rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
i After running the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
windshield (컄 page 373). This will prevent
smears and reduce wiping noise which can be
caused by residual wax on the windshield.
When leaving the car wash, make sure the mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate.
370
Soft top (CLK cabriolet)
i If the soft top is kept in the storage
Frequent cleaning reduces the
dirt-repellent effect of the soft top.
compartment for a lengthy period, raise it and air
out with the windows open about every
4 months.
Intensive cleaning with Mercedes-Benz
car-care products for convertible soft tops
can help to restore the dirt-repellent
effect. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for detailed
information.
Place a suitable cover over the soft top if you are
leaving the vehicle parked in the open for an
extended period of time.
! Remove bird droppings immediately. The
organic acid damages the material and causes
the soft top to leak.
Light colored soft tops should be cleaned
frequently to prevent spots and dirt from
setting in, which could stain and discolor
the soft top material permanently.
Never use a power washer to clean the soft top,
as you may damage the soft top material.
Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as
ageing, can cause the soft-top seams to
leak. Have the soft-top seams sealed at a
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Never use hot-wax when you run the vehicle
through an automatic car wash, as you may
damage the soft top material.
Do not use sharp-edged instruments for the
removal of ice and snow.
Operation
Vehicle care
i Depending on the operation mode of the car
Wet cleaning:
wash, there is the possibility of water drops
entering the vehicle’s interior. This is not an
indication of a defect or malfunction in
the soft top.
왘
Clean soft top with soft top raised and
locked. Lower the soft top into the storage
compartment only if the soft top is
completely dry.
Dry cleaning:
왘
Brush the dry top with a soft-bristled
brush.
Brush top always from front to rear.
Brush the top with a soft-bristled
brush.
Wash with clear water or with a mild
detergent and an ample supply of
lukewarm water by wiping with a
soft-bristled brush or sponge from
front to rear. Then rinse thoroughly
with clear water.
Wash the top only when heavily soiled.
If only parts of the top have been washed,
wet the entire top and allow it to air-dry
before lowering it into the storage
compartment.
For cleaning soft top or wind screen never
use:
앫
gasoline
앫
thinner
앫
tar and stain removers
앫
glass cleaner
앫
similar organic solvents
They will cause damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i In general, regular spraying or cleaning with
clear water is sufficient to keep the soft top
clean.
371
Operation
Vehicle care
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of
ornamental moldings, use a damp cloth.
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
moldings. Although ornamental moldings may
have chrome appearance, they could be made of
anodized aluminum that will be damaged when
cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a
damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you
are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome
cleaner. If in doubt whether an ornamental
molding is chrome-plated, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
turn signal lenses
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo, with plenty of water.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that are
suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window
cleaning solutions which are not suitable may
damage the plastic lamp lenses of the
headlamps. Therefore, do not use abrasives,
solvents or cleaners that contain solvents.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses.
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens
surface.
372
Cleaning the Parktronic system*
sensors (CLK 63 AMG (USA), Canada all
vehicles)
1 Parktronic system* sensors in front
bumper
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo, with plenty of water and a
soft, non-scratching cloth to clean
sensors 1 on the bumpers.
Operation
Vehicle care
! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor
covers. Applying strong pressure may damage
the sensor covers.
Follow the instructions provided by the power
washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance
between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
! To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth
when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to
wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades
왘
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
! Never open the hood when the wiper arms
are folded forward.
왘
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild
window cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
왘
Make sure the hood is fully closed.
왘
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (컄 page 38).
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle's on-board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning the windshield
and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
왘
An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey in
the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
! To clean the window interior, do not use a
dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners
containing solvents. Do not touch the inside of
the front, rear or side windows with hard objects
such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.
Fold the wiper arms forward until they
snap into place.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear.
373
Operation
Vehicle care
Chrome-plated exhaust tip*
Light alloy wheels
Plastic and rubber parts
Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated exhaust tips will help to maintain their
shine and the classy appearance.
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
왘
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution.
왘
Wipe with a cloth moistened in a
lukewarm solution.
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
Polishing Paste each time the vehicle
has been washed, especially during the
winter.
! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as wheel
cleaners as they could cause corrosion.
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
spray of water for cleaning the light
alloy wheels.
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid
may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.
! The vehicle should not be parked for an
extended period of time immediately after it has
been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims
have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner.
Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased
corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads.
Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage
the wheel paint if the car is not driven after
cleaning. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
should always be warmed-up before it is parked
after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle
for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire
Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
products, take care not to spray them on the
brake disks.
374
The surface may temporarily change
color. If this is the case, wait for it to
dry.
Warning!
G
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or
the steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents will make the surface porous and vehicle occupants could suffer serious injuries
from plastic parts coming loose in the event
of air bag deployment.
Operation
Vehicle care
! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Seat belts
these parts.
왘
왘
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface.
Carpets
왘
Hard plastic trim items
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
! Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry
thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
Care.
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet
and Fabric Care for cleaning the
carpets.
Headliner and shelf below rear window
왘
Use a soft bristle brush or a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of
excessive dirt.
Only use clear, lukewarm water and
soap.
! The seat belts must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat
belts at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in
direct sunlight.
Warning!
G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface.
375
Operation
Vehicle care
Upholstery
Leather upholstery
Wood trims
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently
discolored. By lining the seats with a
proper intermediate cover,
contact-discoloration will be prevented.
Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject to
a natural aging process. Leather
upholstery may also react to certain
ambient influences such as high humidity
or high temperature by showing wrinkles
for example.
왘
Warning!
G
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent
앫
deployment of the head-thorax air bags
(CLK cabriolet)
앫
activation of the active head restraints
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for availability.
376
왘
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
Care.
! Wipe with light pressure to avoid damage to
the upholstery.
Exercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside should
not become wet.
Dampen cloth using water and use
damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these
may be abrasive.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Where will I find...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
(Cabriolet)
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
377
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the
bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, have the respective bulb checked and
replaced if necessary.
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The ABS has detected a malfunction and has
switched off. The BAS and the ESP® are also
switched off (see messages in the multifunction display).
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels will lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘
Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display (컄 page 394).
-
The yellow ABS indicator lamp
comes on while the engine is
running.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the systems specified above.
왘 Have the system checked at an authoIf the ABS control unit is malfunctioning,
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
other systems such as the navigation
as possible.
system* or the automatic transmission may Failure to follow these instructions inalso be malfunctioning.
creases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts. The ABS has switched off. The BAS
and the ESP® are also switched off (see messages in the multifunction display)
The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
왘
Switch off electrical consumers that
are currently not needed, e.g. seat
heating*.
왘
If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
378
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
-
The yellow ABS indicator lamp
comes on while the engine is
running.
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The ABS is temporarily not available. The
ESP® and the BAS are also unavailable.
왘
The system’s self-diagnosis may not be
completed yet.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the systems specified above.
Drive a short distance with added
caution at a vehicle speed of above
12 mph (20 km/h).
When the ABS indicator lamp goes
out, the ABS, the ESP®, and the BAS
are available again.
If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
379
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
;
3
Warning!
Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and
(Canada only)
you hear a warning sound.
You are driving with the parking
brake set.
왘
Release the parking brake
(컄 page 53).
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving.
There is insufficient brake fluid
in the reservoir.
왘
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
(USA only)
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
could be seriously burned.
380
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
ú
±
Possible cause/consequence
(USA only)
The yellow engine There is a malfunction in:
malfunction indi(Canada only)
앫 The fuel management system
cator lamp comes
on while driving. 앫 The ignition system
앫
The emission control system
앫
Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may
switch the engine to its Limp-Home
Mode (emergency operation).
Suggested solution
왘
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is used by
the service station to link the vehicle to the
shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions
through the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left area of the
footwell next to the parking brake pedal.
i In some states you may be required by law
to have the vehicle serviced as soon as the
engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Check local requirements.
381
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
ú
±
Possible cause/consequence
(USA only)
(Canada only)
The yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on while
driving.
•
382
Suggested solution
A loss of pressure has been
왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 320).
detected in the fuel system. The fuel
If it is not closed properly:
cap may not be closed properly or
왘 Close the fuel cap.
the fuel system may be leaky.
If it is closed properly:
왘
Have the fuel system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Add coolant to prevent engine from overheating (컄 page 328).
If this warning lamp comes on frequently, there is a leak in the cooling
system.
왘
Have the cooling system checked.
If the coolant level is correct, the
electric radiator fan may be broken.
왘
If the coolant temperature is below 248°F
(120°C), you can continue driving to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving uphill)
and stop-and-go driving.
The red coolant warning lamp
There is insufficient coolant in the
comes on when the engine is run- reservoir.
ning.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
•
Possible cause/consequence
The red coolant warning lamp
The coolant temperature has exceeded
comes on while driving and you 248°F (120°C).
hear a warning sound.
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire.
You could be seriously burned.
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Suggested solution
왘
Stop in a safe location as soon as possible and allow the engine and coolant
to cool down.
! The engine should not be operated with the
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C).
Doing so may cause serious engine damage
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
383
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
v
Possible cause/consequence
The yellow ESP® warn- The ESP® has been switched off with the
ing lamp comes on while ESP® switch or has been switched off due
the engine is running.
to a malfunction.
Suggested solution
왘
Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 96).
Exceptions: (컄 page 94).
왘
If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road, weather and
traffic conditions.
Risk of accident!
When the ESP® is switched off it will not
stabilize the vehicle if the system recog- If the ESP® cannot be switched on:
nizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
a wheel is spinning.
왘 Observer additional messages that may appear in
The cruise control is deactivated and canthe multifunction display (컄 page 394).
not be switched on.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
v
The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while
driving.
The ESP® or traction control has come
into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire.
The cruise control is deactivated
왘
When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
왘
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
왘
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road, weather and traffic conditions.
왘
Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (컄 page 94).
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk
of an accident.
384
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 320).
A
The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp comes on while
driving.
C
The yellow roll bar warning lamp The roll bar system is malfunctioning.
comes on or flickers when the
engine is running.
왘
Release the roll bars manually.
왘
Have the system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your
on for a maximum of 6 seconds passengers to fasten your seat belts before
after starting the engine.
driving off.
왘
Fasten your seat belts.
You hear a warning chime for a
maximum of 6 seconds after
starting the engine.
왘
<
<
You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
Regardless of whether the seat belts
are fastened or not, the seat belt telltale always comes on and remains lit
for 6 seconds after starting the
engine.
Fasten your seat belt.
The warning chime stops sounding.
385
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
<
Possible cause/consequence
The red seat belt telltale comes You and/or your front passenger have foron while the vehicle is standing gotten to fasten your seat belts.
still and the engine is running or
during driving.
There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore the system senses the
front passenger seat as being occupied.
Suggested solution
왘
Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
왘
Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in a safe
place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
<
During driving the red seat belt
telltale flashes and you additionally hear an intermittent warning
chime with increasing intensity.
The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph
(25 km/h) and you and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat
belts.
왘
There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore the system senses the
front passenger seat as being occupied.
왘
Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in a safe
place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat
belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The
seat belt telltale will only go out if both,
386
the driver’s and the front passenger’s seat belt
are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a
door is opened.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
1
The red SRS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Warning!
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction in the supplemental
restraint systems. The air bags or Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to deploy in an accident.
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be deployed when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
387
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
H
Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction
telltale for the TPMS illuminates
continuously.
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least
one tire.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a
halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
braking maneuvers. Observe the
traffic situation around you.
왘
Read and observe messages in
the multifunction display.
If the tire inflation pressure in the
respective tire(s) has (have) been
corrected, the combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale
goes out after a few minutes of
driving.
H
Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction
telltale for the TPMS flashes
60 seconds and then stays
illuminated.
There is a malfunction in the TPMS.
왘
Read and observe messages in
the multifunction display.
왘
Have the TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
After the malfunction has been
remedied the combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale
goes out after a few minutes of
driving.
388
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 334) or, if
available, the tire inflation pressure label on
the inside of the fuel filler flap (컄 page 320).
If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute
and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
389
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Lamp in center console
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
56 The front passenger front air bag The system is malfunctioning.
off indicator lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual
on the front passenger seat.
Warning!
G
If the 56 indicator lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated with the weight of a
typical adult or someone larger than a small
individual on the front passenger seat, do
not have any passenger use the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
390
Suggested solution
왘
Have the system checked as soon as
possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 396).
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
56 The front passenger front air bag The system is malfunctioning.
off indicator lamp does not illuminate and/or does not remain
illuminated with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less
on the front passenger seat.
Warning!
G
If the 56 indicator lamp does not
illuminate or remains out with the
Suggested solution
왘
Make sure there is nothing between
seat cushion and child seat and check
installation of the child seat.
왘
Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat are
present.
왘
If the front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp remains out, have the
system checked as soon as possible
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
왘
Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display and follow corrective steps (컄 page 396).
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less on the front
passenger seat, do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
391
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display
Warning and malfunction messages
appear in the multifunction display located
in the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(컄 page 154) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display in red color.
392
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 138) or button k, j, è, or ÿ on the
steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and
messages of less immediate priority can
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 138) or
button k, j, è, or ÿ on the
steering wheel. They are then stored in the
vehicle status message memory
(컄 page 154). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the
message to appear.
Warning!
G
All categories of messages contain
important information which should be
taken note of and, where a malfunction is
indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property
damage or personal injury.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
i Switching on the ignition causes all
instrument cluster lamps (except low beam
headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps
unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and the
multifunction display are in working order before
starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may
appear in the display.
High priority messages appear in red color.
For your convenience the messages are
divided into two sections:
앫
Text messages (컄 page 394)
앫
Symbol messages (컄 page 403)
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
393
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Text messages
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ABS
The ABS and ESP® are not available due to
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels will lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
ABS, ESP
Unavailable
See Operator’s Man.
a malfunction.
The BAS is also deactivated.
The brake system is still functioning
normally but without but without the
systems specified above.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
Cruise Control And
SPEEDTRONIC
ESP
Inoperative
Cruise control is malfunctioning.
Have the cruise control checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Inoperative
See Operator’s Manual
The ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
The ABS and the BAS might not be operational.
The brake system is still functioning
normally but without the systems specified above.
394
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ESP
The ESP® is temporarily not available.
왘
Unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
The system’s self-diagnosis may not be
completed yet.
The ABS and the BAS might not be
operational.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the systems specified above.
Drive a short distance with added
caution at a vehicle speed of above
12 mph (20 km/h).
When the message disappears, the
ESP® is available again.
If the message does not disappear:
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts.
The ESP® has switched off.
The BAS may be switched off, too. The battery
may not be charged. The battery or the generator may be malfunctioning.
The ABS might not be operational.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ESP® is operational again.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the systems specified above.
395
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Front Passenger
Front passenger front air bag is
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the
Airbag Enabled
activated while driving even though front passenger seat for the following:
See Operator’s Manual a child, small individual, or object
below the system’s weight
threshold is on the front passenger
seat, or the front passenger seat is
empty. Objects on the seat or
forces acting on the seat may
make the system sense supplemental weight.
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘
Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and
properly secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint
if necessary.
왘
Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat
are present. The system may recognize such supplemental weight
and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a
greater weight than actually present.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and
switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
(Continued on next page)
396
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message Possible cause/ consequence Possible solution
Monitor the 56 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 31) and
the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫
the 56 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 72) has deactivated the
air bag.
앫
the message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator’s Manual or
the message Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual
should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary
check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 72),
the 56 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the
system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If the 56 indicator lamp remains
out even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any children 12 years
old and under and other small individuals
use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
397
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Front Passenger
Front passenger front air bag is
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the
Airbag Disabled
deactivated while driving even
front passenger seat for the following:
See Operator’s Manual though an adult or someone larger
than a small individual is
occupying the front passenger
seat. Forces acting on the seat
may make the system sense a
decrease in weight.
398
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 38).
왘
Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and
switch on the ignition (컄 page 38).
(Continued on next page)
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message Possible cause/ consequence Possible solution
Monitor the 56 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 31) and
the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫
the 56 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 72) has deactivated the
air bag.
앫
the message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator’s Manual or
the message Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual
should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary
check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 72),
the 56 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the
system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If the 56 indicator lamp remains
illuminated with an adult occupant on the
front passenger seat even after performing
the above corrective steps, do not have any
passenger use the front passenger seat until
the system has been repaired.
399
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
P
Selector Lever
In Park
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
You have turned off the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in gear
selector lever position N and opened the
driver’s door.
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
or
You have attempted to switch off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button while the gear selector lever was in
position R or D.
400
Please Shift To
N or P
You have attempted to start the engine
with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
while the gear selector lever was in
position R or D.
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position P or N.
Run Flat Indicator
Inoperative
Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the Run Flat Indicator checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Check tires,
then restart
Run Flat Indicator.
There was a warning message about a
loss in the tire inflation pressure and the
Run Flat Indicator has not been reactivated yet.
왘
Make sure the correct tire inflation
pressure is set for each tire.
왘
Then restart the Run Flat Indicator.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display message
Tire Pressure
Check Tires
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The Run Flat Indicator indicates that
the pressure is too low in one or more
tires.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe
the traffic situation around you.
왘
Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
required (컄 page 341).
왘
If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 452).
왘
Restart the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the
tire inflation pressure values (컄 page 343).
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Inoperative
The TPMS is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the TPMS checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Inoperative
No Wheel Sensors
There are wheels without appropriate
wheel sensors mounted (e.g. winter
tires).
왘
Have the TPMS checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Currently Unavailable
The TPMS is unable to monitor the tire As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been
pressure due to a nearby radio inter- removed, the TPMS automatically becomes active
ference source.
again after a few minutes of driving.
401
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
402
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Symbol messages
Display symbol
Display message
#
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
왘
앫
broken poly-V-belt
앫
alternator malfunctioning
Stop immediately in a safe location or
as soon as it is safe to do so and check
the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘
Drive immediately to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Low Voltage
Charge Battery
The battery has insufficient voltage.
왘
Start the engine (컄 page 51).
Low Voltage
Switch Off
Consumers
The battery has insufficient voltage.
왘
Turn off unnecessary electrical consumers.
403
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
2
Brake Wear
The brake pads have reached their
wear limit.
왘
Have the brake pads replaced as soon as
possible.
Release
Parking Brake
You are driving with the parking brake
set.
왘
Release the parking brake (컄 page 53).
There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.
왘
Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a safe
location or as soon as it is safe to do so
and notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will
not solve the problem.
;
!
;
3
(USA only)
(Canada only)
(USA only)
Check
Brake Fluid
(Canada only)
Level
Warning!
G
Driving with the message Check Brake
Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before
checking the brake system. Overfilling the
brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling
brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire. You could be seriously burned.
404
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ú
Visit workshop
There may be a malfunction in the
왘
Have the measuring system checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Add coolant (컄 page 328).
왘
If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
B
Warning!
Top Up
Coolant
See Operator’s Man.
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
앫
fuel injection system
앫
ignition system
앫
exhaust system
앫
fuel system
The coolant level is too low.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level
warning. Extended driving with the message and
symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant
in the cooling system. The engine will overheat,
causing major engine damage.
405
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
•
Coolant
Stop vehicle,
turn engine off.
The coolant is too hot.
왘
Among other possible causes, the
poly-V-belt could be broken.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or
as soon as it is safe to do so.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 59).
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘
Wait for the message to disappear before restarting the engine.
Doing otherwise could result in serious engine damage that is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
(Continued on next page)
406
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
•
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
왘
Observe the coolant temperature indicator in
the instrument cluster (컄 page 28).
If the temperature rises again:
왘
•
The cooling fan for the coolant is mal- Observe the coolant temperature indicator in the
functioning.
instrument cluster (컄 page 28).
왘
Warning!
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately.
G
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire.
You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with the
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
407
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
A
Gas Cap
Is Open
A loss of pressure has been detected in 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 320).
the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be
If it is not closed properly:
closed properly or the fuel system may be
왘 Close the fuel cap.
leaky.
If it is closed properly:
왘
±
408
Have the fuel system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Reserve Fuel
The fuel level has dropped below the
reserve mark.
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 320).
Display Malfunction
Service Required
Certain electronic systems are unable to
relay information to the control system.
The following systems may have failed:
왘
앫
Coolant temperature display
앫
Tachometer
앫
Cruise control display
Have the electronic systems checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
:
Check oil level
at next refueling.
The engine oil level has dropped to a
critical level.
왘
Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 325) and add oil as required
(컄 page 327).
왘
If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
When the message Check oil level at
next refueling. appears while the engine
is running and at operating temperature,
the engine oil level has dropped to
approximately the minimum level.
When this occurs, the warning is at first intermittent and then remains on if the oil
level drops further.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service station to refill the engine oil to the required level.
! Engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
For information on approved engine oils,
refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
409
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
I
Change
Key Batteries
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batteries are discharged.
왘
Change the batteries (컄 page 441).
Key Detected
In Vehicle
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the
vehicle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.
왘
Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
Key
Not Detected
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is momentarily not recognized.
왘
Change the position of the SmartKey
in the vehicle.
왘
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey
in the starter switch if necessary.
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 59).
Key
Not Detected
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not
recognized while the engine is running because
앫
앫
Please
get a new key.
410
the SmartKey is not in the vehicle
왘 Search for the SmartKey.
there is strong radio-frequency interOtherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
ference
locked nor can the engine be started
again after the engine has been stopped.
No additional code available for SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
I
Please don’t
forget your key
This display appears (for a maximum of
60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened
with the engine shut off and no SmartKey in
the starter switch.
Message is only a reminder.
왘
Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
왘
Take the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving
the vehicle.
Remove Key
You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Active Headlamps
Auxiliary Bulb On
The active headlamps are malfunctioning. Another light is being used.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Active Headlamps
Inoperative
The Bi-Xenon cornering lamps system is malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
AUTO-Light
Inoperative
The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps switch on automatically.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
.
To switch off the headlamps:
3rd
Brake Lamp
The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical
number of LEDs have stopped working.
왘
In the control system, set lamp operation to manual mode (컄 page 162).
왘
Switch off the headlamps using the
exterior lamp switch (컄 page 129).
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
411
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Brake Lamp
Left
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 448).
Brake Lamp
Right
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 448).
Front Foglamp
Left
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Front Foglamp
Right
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Front Left
Parking Lamp
The left front parking lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 447).
Front Right
Parking Lamp
The right front parking lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 447).
Front Left
Turn Signal
The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 447).
Front Right
Turn Signal
The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 447).
High Beam
Left
The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 446).
High Beam
Right
The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 446).
412
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
License Plate Lamp
Left
The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 449).
License Plate Lamp
Right
The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 449).
Low Beam
Left
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Halogen headlamp:
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 446).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘
Low Beam
Right
The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Halogen headlamp:
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 446).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Marker Lamp
Front Left
The front left side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Marker Lamp
Front Right
The front right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
413
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Rear Foglamp
Auxiliary Bulb On
The foglamp is malfunctioning. A backup
bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 448).
Reverse Lamp
Left
The left backup lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 448).
Reverse Lamp
Right
The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 448).
Switch Off Lights
You have removed the SmartKey from the
starter switch, opened the driver’s door
and left the headlamps on or removed the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the vehicle and left the headlamps on.
왘
Switch off the headlamps.
Switch Off Lights
Or
Remove Key
The exterior lamp switch is in
왘 Remove SmartKey or SmartKey with
position U, and the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO* from starter switch.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in the
or
starter switch. The parking lamps remains
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
on.
position M.
Tail Lamp
Left
Auxiliary Bulb On
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
backup bulb is being used.
414
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 448).
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Tail Lamp
Right
Auxiliary Bulb On
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
backup bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 448).
Left Mirror
Turn Signal
The turn signal in the left exterior rear
view mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number
of LEDs have stopped working.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Right Mirror
Turn Signal
The turn signal in the right exterior rear
view mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number
of LEDs have stopped working.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Turn Signal
Rear Left
Auxiliary Bulb On
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 448).
Turn Signal
Rear Right
Auxiliary Bulb On
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 448).
415
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
1
Restraint System
Malfunction
Service Required
The system is malfunctioning.
왘
Warning!
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
416
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately to have the system
checked; otherwise the SRS may not be deploy when needed in an accident, which
could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
\
Please Engage
Roll-over Bar
The roll bars are malfunctioning.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
[
Please Release
Roll-over Bar
The roll bars are malfunctioning.
왘
Operate the roll bars manually
(컄 page 430).
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
_
Warning!
Steering oil
Service Required
The steering gear oil level is too low. There
is a danger of steering gear damage.
G
If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is
too low, the steering power assistance could
fail. Much greater effort will then be needed
to turn the steering wheel.
Do not add steering oil without checking the
steering system.
Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
417
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
M
Skibag
Open
This message will appear when the soft
top is operated with the ski bag roller
blind in its upward position.
왘
Pull the ski bag roller blind downward
and secure it (컄 page 280).
L
Tele Aid
Inoperative
One or more main functions of the Tele
Aid system are malfunctioning.
왘
Have the Tele Aid system checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
t
Function
Unavailable
This display appears if button t or
s on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
418
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
H
Please correct
the tire pressure.
The tire pressure is too low in one
or more tires.
왘
Check and correct tire inflation pressure as
required (컄 page 344).
Tire Pressure
Caution
Tire Defect
One or more tires are deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 452).
Tire Pressure
Check Tires
The tire pressure in one or more
tires is already below the minimum value.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘
Check and adjust tire pressure as required
(컄 page 344).
왘
If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 452).
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
419
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
K
Open/Close Top
Completely
The soft top is not properly locked.
왘
Lock the soft top again (컄 page 262).
Top Lowering
The soft top is not completely open or
closed. The hydraulics are losing pressure.
왘
Open or close the soft top all the way.
Top
Operation
Only At Standstill
You have attempted to open or close the
soft top while driving.
왘
Pull over to the side of the road and repeat soft top operation while the vehicle is stationary.
M
Trunk Partition
Open
This message will appear when the soft
top is operated with the luggage cover
folded back.
왘
Pull out and latch the luggage cover
(컄 page 264).
W
Top Up
Washer Fluid
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of
total reservoir capacity.
왘
Add washer fluid (컄 page 330).
420
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
왔 Where will I find...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is located in the trunk on
the left side (CLK coupe) or on the right
side (CLK cabriolet), secured by a hook
and loop fastener.
Storage compartment underneath the
trunk floor
The TIREFIT kit (CLK 63 AMG only) or the
vehicle tool and the Minispare wheel are
located under the trunk floor.
1 Handle
3 Upper trunk lip
왘
Engage handle 1 on upper trunk
lip 3.
You can now access the TIREFIT kit
(CLK 63 AMG only) or the vehicle tool kit
and Minispare wheel.
왘
Loosen hook and loop fastener.
1 Handle
2 Push handle
왘
Remove first aid kit.
왘
Raising: Push in handle 1 in direction
of arrow 2. The other side of
handle 1 lifts up.
! To prevent damage, always disengage
handle 1 from upper trunk lip 3 and lower
trunk floor cover before closing the trunk.
왘
Take handle 1 and lift up the trunk
floor cover.
왘
Lowering: To disengage handle 1 lift
up the trunk floor.
왘
Disengage handle 1 from upper trunk
lip 3 and lower the trunk floor cover.
Example CLK coupe
i Check expiration dates and contents for
completeness at least once a year and replace
missing/expired items.
421
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
TIREFIT (CLK 63 AMG only)
Vehicle tool kit
The TIREFIT kit is located under the trunk
floor.
The vehicle tool kit is located in the storage
compartment underneath the trunk floor.
왘
The following is included:
Lift up trunk floor cover and engage the
handle in the upper edge of trunk
(컄 page 421).
1 Straps for soft top emergency operation, a pair of gloves
2 Electric air pump
3 Towing eye bolt
4 Vehicle jack
5 TIREFIT kit
6 Wheel wrench
7 Collapsible wheel chock
422
앫
Towing eye bolt
앫
Wheel wrench
앫
Alignment bolt
앫
Vehicle jack
앫
Collapsible wheel chock
앫
A pair of gloves
앫
Straps for soft top emergency operation (CLK cabriolet only)
The spare wheel bolts are fixed at the
Minispare wheel.
Removing the vehicle tool kit
왘
Example CLK coupe
1 Retaining screw
2 Storage well casing
왘
Loosen retaining screw 1 in the middle of storage well casing 2 by turning
it counterclockwise.
왘
Remove storage well casing 2.
i (CLK cabriolet) Hex wrench:
You will find the hex wrench for manually operating the roll bars (컄 page 430) or the soft top
(컄 page 432) at the lower edge of the storage
well casing.
Lift up trunk floor cover and engage the
handle in upper edge of trunk
(컄 page 421).
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
Storing the vehicle tool kit
왘
왘
Example CLK coupe
3 Arrow
4 Minispare wheel
5 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
6 Vehicle tool kit
왘
Remove vehicle tool kit 6.
Place vehicle tool kit 6 in vehicle tool
kit storage well casing 5.
Place storage well casing 2 over the
vehicle tool kit storage well casing 5
and turn retaining screw 1 clockwise
as far it will go to secure the Minispare
wheel.
i Arrow 3 on vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 5 must point in the direction of travel.
Otherwise you cannot place the storage well
casing 2 on top and secure the Minispare
wheel with retaining screw 1.
왘
Disengage the handle in upper edge of
trunk and lower trunk floor cover
(컄 page 421).
! To prevent damage, always disengage trunk
floor handle from upper edge of trunk and lower
trunk floor before closing the trunk.
Vehicle jack
Warning!
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
423
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock
The vehicle jack is located in the storage
compartment underneath the trunk floor.
The collapsible wheel chock serves to
additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
changing the wheel.
Operational position
왘
Storage position
왘
Remove vehicle jack from its
compartment.
왘
Turn crank handle in direction of arrow
as far as it will go.
Turn crank handle clockwise.
Before storing the vehicle jack in its
compartment:
앫
It should be fully collapsed.
앫
The handle must be folded in (storage
position).
1 Tilt the plate upward
2 Fold the lower plate outward
3 Insert the plate
424
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
왘
Tilt both plates upward 1.
Storing the Minispare wheel
왘
Fold the lower plate outward 2.
왘
왘
Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the
way into the openings of the base
plate 3.
Place Minispare wheel 3 in wheel
well.
왘
Place vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 4 over the Minispare wheel.
Make sure arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit
storage well casing 4 points in the
direction of travel.
For information on where to place wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting the vehicle” (컄 page 459).
Minispare wheel
The Minispare wheel is located in the
storage compartment underneath the
trunk floor.
Removing the Minispare wheel
왘
Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
trunk floor handle in upper edge of
trunk.
왘
Loosen the retaining screw in the middle of storage well casing by turning it
counterclockwise (컄 page 422).
왘
Remove the storage well casing
(컄 page 422).
Example CLK coupe
1 Vehicle tool kit
Wheel wrench
Jack
2 Arrow
3 Minispare wheel, Wheel bolts for
Minispare wheel
4 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
왘
Place storage well casing (컄 page 422)
over vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 4 and turn the retaining screw
(컄 page 422) clockwise as far it will go
to secure the Minispare wheel.
i Arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit storage well
왘
Remove vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 4.
casing 4 must point in the direction of travel.
Otherwise you cannot place the storage well casing (컄 page 422) on top and secure the Minispare wheel with the retaining screw
(컄 page 422).
왘
Remove Minispare wheel 3.
왘
Disengage trunk floor handle in upper
edge of trunk and lower trunk floor cover.
컄컄
425
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
컄컄! To prevent damage, always disengage trunk
앫
Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
to have the flat tire repaired or
replaced as appropriate.
앫
Do not operate vehicle with more than
one Minispare wheel mounted.
floor handle from upper edge of trunk and lower
trunk floor before closing the trunk.
Warning!
G
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted.
The Minispare wheel should only be used
temporarily, and should be replaced with a
regular road wheel as quickly as possible.
Warning!
Spare wheel bolts
Make sure to use the original length wheel
bolts when remounting the original wheel
after it has been repaired.
The spare wheel bolts are fixed at the
Minispare wheel.
In case of a flat tire, you may temporarily
use the Minispare wheel when observing
the following restrictions:
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
426
G
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(컄 page 482).
Do not switch off the ESP® when a Minispare wheel is mounted.
앫
! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the Minispare wheel. The use of any wheel
bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Minispare
wheel will physically damage the vehicle’s
brakes.
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel
(located in trunk with spare wheel)
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왔 Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the driver’s door
Unlocking the vehicle
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the
driver’s door and the trunk using the
mechanical key.
i Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
and/or the trunk with the mechanical key will
trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
앫
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
왘
Move locking tab 1 in the direction of
arrow.
왘
Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
housing.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫
Pull the outside door handle.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄 page 39).
1 Unlocking
2 Mechanical key
왘
Insert the mechanical key 2 into the
driver’s door lock until it stops.
왘
Turn the mechanical key 2 counterclockwise to position 1 until the locking knob moves up.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
왘
Pull the door handle to open the
driver’s door.
427
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the trunk
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) (CLK coupe) or 5.41 ft (1.65 m)
(CLK cabriolet) is required to open the
trunk lid.
The trunk lid lock is located next to the
handle above the rear license plate recess.
왘
Insert the mechanical key 3 into the
trunk lid lock until it stops.
왘
Turn the mechanical key 3
counterclockwise to position 1 and
hold it in this position.
왘
Pull the trunk lid handle 2 and lift the
trunk lid.
The trunk opens.
! The trunk lid swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
왘
1 Unlocking in an emergency
2 Handle
3 Mechanical key
428
Turn the mechanical key 3 back and
remove it from the trunk lid lock.
Locking the vehicle
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*, do the following:
왘
Close the passenger door and the
trunk.
왘
Press the central locking switch in the
center console (컄 page 118).
왘
Check to see whether the locking knob
on the passenger door has moved
down.
왘
If necessary, push it down manually.
왘
Remove the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 427).
왘
Check whether the trunk is locked.
왘
If necessary, lock the trunk with the
mechanical key (컄 page 118).
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle
should now be locked.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Manually unlocking the gear selector
lever
In case of power failure, the gear selector
lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow
the vehicle.
i The gear selector lever is locked again when
왘
Pull the tab 1 of the covering back in
direction of the center armrest compartment.
왘
Insert a tool 2 (e.g. flat blade screwdriver) into the opening.
왘
Perform the following two steps simultaneously:
moving it to position P.
1 Locking
2 Mechanical key
왘
Insert the mechanical key 2 into the
driver’s door lock until it stops.
왘
Turn the mechanical key 2 clockwise
to position 1.
The driver’s door is locked.
i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft
alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel filler flap.
왘
Push tool 2 down- and forward in
the direction of the arrow.
왘
Move gear selector lever from
position P.
왘
Remove the tool 2 from the opening.
왘
Push the tab 1 of the covering back.
1 Tab
2 tool (e.g. flat blade screwdriver)
429
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency (Cabriolet)
왘
Operating roll bars manually
Close the soft top (컄 page 261).
i With the roll bars released, the soft top canReleasing roll bars manually
If the roll bar system is malfunctioning, you
can release the roll bars manually.
not be operated using the soft top switch and the
rear head restraints cannot be lowered using the
rear head restraint lowering switch.
왘
Push hex wrench through
perforation 1 in trim of rear wall in
trunk.
Warning!
G
왘
Open the trunk (컄 page 110).
G
왘
Fold back the luggage cover
(컄 page 264).
Make sure no one is located in the roll bar’s
path of motion while the next steps are being carried out.
If the yellow roll bar warning lamp \ in
the clock does not go out after starting the
engine, or if it comes on while driving, then
the roll bar system is not operating properly
and may not activate in an accident. In this
case, raise the roll bars manually before
continuing to drive.
왘
Take hex wrench out of its storage
location in the storage well casing
(컄 page 422).
When the roll bar is manually released, the
rear head restraints and the roll bar underneath shoot up almost instantaneously.
Warning!
For safety reasons drive only with the roll
bars raised until the malfunction is repaired.
Have your vehicle checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Perforation
2 Hex wrench
430
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency (Cabriolet)
왘
왘
Insert long side of hex wrench 2 into
opening.
Using hex wrench 2, press release
catch down in direction of arrow.
The roll bar extends with a loud sound.
왘
Repeat this step for the second roll bar.
Have the systems checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Warning!
G
Never lower the roll bars manually unless
the soft top is open. Otherwise, the roll bars
function could be impaired, no longer reducing your risk of injury in an optimal manner.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the roll bar lowered when the
soft top is closed.
왘
Take hex wrench out of its storage
location in the storage well casing
(컄 page 422).
왘
Align hex wrench so that its long side is
parallel to orientation seam 1 and insert hex wrench 2 into gap on left side
of respective head restraint.
왘
Press hex wrench down firmly in direction of arrow 3 and hold.
왘
Press head restraint down in direction
of arrow 4.
왘
Pull hex wrench 2 out and take weight
off head restraint.
왘
Repeat this procedure on roll bar for
second head restraint.
Lowering roll bars manually
With the soft top open, you can lower the
roll bars manually after they have been released.
i With the roll bars released, the soft top cannot be operated using the soft top switch and the
rear head restraints cannot be lowered using the
rear head restraint lowering switch.
1 Orientation seam
2 Hex wrench
3 Press wrench down
4 Press head restraint down
431
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency (Cabriolet)
Soft top emergency operation
If the soft top cannot be automatically
closed, check the following:
앫
Is the luggage cover engaged in place
(컄 page 264)?
앫
Have the roll bars been released? If so,
lower the roll bars manually
(컄 page 431).
앫
Is the trunk lid closed (컄 page 112)?
앫
Is there sufficient on-board voltage?
Start the engine if necessary.
These messages will also appear in the
multifunction display (컄 page 420).
If automatic operation still does not function properly, you can close the soft top
manually.
! Manually closing the soft top is a complicated and technically demanding procedure. Close
the soft top manually in emergency cases only.
Otherwise, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Please read the instructions fully before
beginning operation and only undertake it with
another person and if you feel fully capable of
performing the tasks involved.
Warning!
앫
It is important that a second person
helps you. Otherwise, you could become
trapped or injured.
앫
Remove any wristwatches or jewelry
such as rings or bracelets. Otherwise,
they could get caught in the vehicle
mechanism, causing personal injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle.
앫
This procedure should be performed with
great care by two persons.
432
G
Always use the grips provided as indicated. Otherwise you could injure yourself.
왘
Engage parking brake.
왘
Lower the side windows.
왘
Lower rear head restraints
(컄 page 123).
i If the rear head restraints cannot be lowered
using the rear head restraint lowering switch, the
roll bars may have been released. For more information, see “Operating roll bars manually”
(컄 page 430).
왘
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey
from starter switch.
왘
Open the trunk.
왘
Remove the trunk floor cover.
왘
Take the two straps for soft top emergency operation out of vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 422).
왘
Take hex wrench out of its storage
location in the storage well casing
(컄 page 422).
왘
Open the left side trim panel in the
trunk.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency (Cabriolet)
1 Locking mechanism
2 Trim
3 Locking mechanism
왘
Pull locking mechanism 1 out until it
stops and rotate it approximately
one-quarter of a turn.
왘
Fold the right-hand side of the trunk
floor away.
왘
왘
Detach trim 2 along the perforation.
Pull locking mechanism 3 out until it
stops and rotate it approximately
one-quarter of a turn.
왘
Make sure the locking mechanism
does not retract again. If this happens,
pull the locking mechanism out again
and rotate it approximately one-quarter
of a turn.
왘
Make sure the locking mechanism
does not retract again. If this happens,
pull the locking mechanism out again
and rotate it approximately one-quarter
of a turn.
컄컄
433
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency (Cabriolet)
컄컄
4 Hex wrench
5 Screw of hydraulic pump
6 Lever
7 Soft top storage compartment hinge
왘
Insert hex wrench 4 into screw 5.
왘
Turn hydraulic pump screw 5 counterclockwise one revolution with hex
wrench 4.
The soft top storage compartment hinges
are located on the left and right of the
space between the soft top compartment
cover and the trunk seal.
! Do not operate the soft top switch with
screw 5 in the opened position, otherwise the
hydraulic pump could be damaged.
434
왘
Pull the two levers 6 apart and fold
levers 6 of soft top storage compartment hinge 7 forward on both sides
over the detent position.
8 Strap
왘
Pull strap 8, supplied in vehicle tool
kit, behind soft top storage compartment through hinge 7.
왘
Bring strap together in front of hinge.
왘
Pull the side with the handle through
the loop on the opposite side.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency (Cabriolet)
i Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open
automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
is recognized in the area of the rear shelf or inside the trunk.
왘
Pull strap between soft top storage
compartment hinge and soft top compartment.
왘
Secure second strap to second hinge in
the same manner.
! Do not pull the straps when the trunk is
open.
왘
Place both straps on soft top compartment cover.
왘
Take hex wrench out of trunk.
왘
Close trunk lid.
You will only have access to the trunk
again when the emergency operation
has been completed.
! The trunk lid must remain closed during the
next steps in the procedure. Otherwise the trunk
lid and the soft top compartment cover may
come into contact with one another and be damaged.
Warning!
G
At this point, the remaining procedure
needs to be done by two people. Otherwise
you could be injured.
컄컄
435
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency (Cabriolet)
컄컄
Warning!
G
In the next step, you and your assistant
should each take hold of the soft top compartment cover as shown in the illustration.
Both of you should use your free hand to
support yourselves on the edge of the trunk
lid as shown in the illustration.
왘
You and your assistant should each
take one of the straps by the handle.
왘
With a strong, simultaneous tug on the
loops, pull soft top compartment cover
upward and out to the rear.
9 Soft top compartment cover
왘
One person should stand on the left
side of the vehicle and the other on the
right side.
If either you or your helper assume a different position, one or both of you could be
trapped or injured.
왘
Pulling the cover back in one smooth
motion, lift soft top compartment
cover 9 into a vertical position until it
stops.
! Make sure the soft top storage compartment hinges do not fold down during this procedure. Otherwise your vehicle could be damaged.
436
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency (Cabriolet)
a Edge of soft top
b Windshield frame
왘
왘
From left and right sides, reach into
soft top compartment underneath
edge of soft top a.
Warning!
G
Do not place your hands near the upper
windshield area, trunk lid, or between soft
top roof panels and hinges while the soft top
is being raised and locked. Serious personal
injury may occur.
Lift soft top out of soft top compartment and pull it forward to windshield
frame b.
c Opening
d Locking
왘
Take off protective cap on the inner
side of the soft top.
왘
Insert hex wrench into soft top locking
mechanism screw.
왘
Turn the soft top locking mechanism
screw with hex wrench clockwise in direction of arrow c as far as it will go.
The clasp will open and the soft top will
engage audibly.
컄컄
437
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency (Cabriolet)
컄컄왘
Turn the soft top locking mechanism
screw with hex wrench counterclockwise in direction of arrow d as far as it
will go.
The clasp will close and the soft top is
now locked onto the windshield frame.
! Make sure you turn the hex wrench counterclockwise as far as it will go. Otherwise the soft
top may not lock properly.
e Material tensioning frame
f Soft top compartment cover
왘
Lift material tensioning frame e into a
vertical position.
왘
Lower soft top compartment cover f.
! Make sure the soft top compartment
cover f does not collide or make contact with
the material tensioning frame e.
438
g Soft top base
왘
With the palm of your hand, press the
window in material tensioning
frame e until it is positioned on the
soft top compartment cover f.
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency (Cabriolet)
Warning!
G
Position hands as indicated by arrows so
that when you press soft top compartment
cover f forward and lower material tensioning frame e, your hands cannot become trapped.
왘
You and your assistant should press
soft top compartment cover f forward and down with the palms of your
hands until it snaps into place in the
guide. Place your hands on the areas
indicated by the arrows.
At the same time, gently press material
tensioning frame e down with the
palms of your hands.
왘
The soft top is locked onto the windshield frame.
! Make sure you turn the hex wrench counterclockwise as far as it will go. Otherwise the soft
top may not lock properly.
왘
h Locking
왘
Insert hex wrench into soft top locking
mechanism screw.
Turn the soft top locking mechanism
screw with hex wrench counterclockwise in direction of arrow h as far as it
will go.
Have the soft top operation checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
! If, after completing the soft top emergency
operation, the trunk cannot be opened using the
remote trunk lid release switch in the driver’s
door, the Š button on the SmartKey, or the
trunk lid release handle in the license plate recess, press the soft top compartment cover
down again as described above.
Do not open the trunk with the emergency key,
as this could otherwise damage the trunk lid and
the soft top compartment cover.
439
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
Resetting activated head restraints
Warning!
If the active head restraints have been triggered in a rear-end collision, the active
head restraints must be reset. Otherwise,
the active head restraints cannot offer any
additional protection in the event of another rear-end collision.
G
When pushing back the head restraint cushion, take care that your fingers do not become caught between the head restraint
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
lead to injury.
You can tell that the head restraints have
been triggered when they have been
moved forward and cannot be adjusted.
왘
! Be careful not to damage upholstery.
왘
Press the reset tool 1 downward until
you hear the active head restraint release mechanism audibly engage.
왘
Pull out reset tool 1.
왘
Firmly press the head restraint cushion
back in direction of arrow 3 toward
the rear head restraint cover until it
engages.
왘
Repeat this procedure on the active
head restraint for the second front
seat.
왘
After resetting the active head restraints store the reset tool 1 in the
Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.
i For your convenience, we recommend that
you have this work carried out at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You will find the reset tool for manually operating
the active head restraints in the Mercedes-Benz
vehicle literature pouch.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, have the active head restraints checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end
collision.
440
1 Reset tool
2 Hole
3 Press head restraint cushion
왘
Take the reset tool 1 out of the
Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.
Guide reset tool 1 into the hole 2 between the rear head restraint cover and
the head restraint cushion.
For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraints” (컄 page 81).
For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 41).
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
왔 Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore keep the batteries
out of reach of children.
Warning!
G
SmartKey batteries contain Perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Check with
your local government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste
/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
i When inserting the batteries, make sure
they are clean and free of lint.
i When changing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are available
at any Mercedes-Benz Center.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
441
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
SmartKey / SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 427).
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
442
왘
Insert mechanical key 1 into the
opening.
왘
Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
arrow.
왘
왘
Remove the batteries 3.
왘
The battery compartment 2 is unlatched.
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
batteries 3 under the contact
springs 4 with the positive terminal
(+) side facing up.
왘
Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
housing.
Return battery compartment 2 into
housing until it locks into place.
왘
Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey.
왘
Check the operation of the SmartKey.
3 Batteries
4 Contact spring
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp
assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of high
humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the
lights on should clear up the fogging.
i Backup bulbs will be brought into use when
lamps malfunction. Read and observe the
messages in the multifunction display
(컄 page 411).
443
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
Rear lamps
Type
LED
7 High mounted brake
lamp
LED
2 Turn signal lamp
1156 NA
8 Brake lamp
P 21 W
3 Halogen headlamp:
Low beam
9 Turn signal lamp
PY 21 W
H7 (55 W)
D2S-35 W
4 Halogen headlamp:
High beam/high beam H7 (55 W)
flasher
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
High beam flasher
Parking and standing
lamp
444
Type
1 Additional turn signal
lamp
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
Low and high beam1
1
Lamp
H7 (55 W)
W5W
5 Front fog lamp
Corner-illuminating
front fog lamp*
H11 (55 W)
6 Side marker lamp
W5W
H11 (55 W)
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps* do not replace
the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself.
a Tail, parking and stand- P 21/5 W
ing lamp, side marker
lamp
b Backup lamp
P 21 W
c License plate lamps
C5W
d Rear fog lamp (driver’s P 21/4 W
side only) and tail lamp
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Warning!
G
Notes on bulb replacement
앫
Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫
Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
앫
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫
If the newly installed bulb does not
come on, visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
앫
touch or move it when hot
앫
drop the bulb
앫
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the
vehicle. Only have the LEDs replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
lamps replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors
앫
High mounted brake lamp
앫
Bi-Xenon* lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
앫
Front side marker lamps
445
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄 page 129).
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 323).
Front lamps halogen-type
왘
Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of bulb holder 4
and is level to it.
왘
Reinsert bulb holder 4 with the bulb in
the lamp and turn clockwise.
왘
Align housing cover 1 and turn it
clockwise.
High beam bulb
3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb
4 Bulb holder of low beam bulb
5 Bulb holder of high beam bulb
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp bulb
왘
Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Turn bulb holder 5 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb
holder 5.
왘
Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of bulb holder 5
and is level to it.
Low beam bulb
1 Housing cover for low beam headlamp
2 Housing cover for high beam headlamp, parking and standing lamp
446
왘
Turn housing cover 1 counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Turn bulb holder 4 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb
holder 4.
Reinsert bulb holder 5 with the bulb in
the lamp and turn clockwise.
왘
Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.
왘
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front turn signal lamp bulb
왘
Turn bulb socket 3 counterclockwise
and remove it.
왘
Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise out of bulb
socket 3.
왘
Press the new bulb gently into bulb
socket 3 and turn clockwise until it
engages.
왘
Place bulb socket 3 back into the
lamp and turn it clockwise.
Front lamps Bi-Xenon*-type
Warning!
G
Do not remove the cover 3 for the
Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high
voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to
replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its
components. We recommend that you have
such work done by a qualified technician.
4 Bulb holder for high beam flasher bulb
5 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp bulb
Parking and standing lamp bulb
High beam bulb for high beam flasher
왘
Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.
왘
왘
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 6.
Turn bulb holder 4 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Press the new bulb into bulb socket 6.
왘
왘
Press bulb socket 6 back into the
lamp.
Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb
holder 4.
왘
Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of bulb holder 4
and is level to it.
컄컄
왘
Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2 Housing cover for high beam flasher,
parking and standing lamp
3 Housing cover for Bi-Xenon* headlamp
447
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
컄컄왘
왘
Reinsert bulb holder 4 with the bulb in
the lamp and turn clockwise.
Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
왘
왘
Turn bulb socket 1 counterclockwise
and remove it.
Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise out of bulb
socket 1.
왘
Press the new bulb gently into bulb
socket 1 and turn clockwise until it
engages.
왘
Place bulb socket 1 back into the
lamp and turn it clockwise.
Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘
Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise and remove it.
왘
Pull out bulb socket 5 with the bulb.
왘
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 5.
448
왘
Press the new bulb into bulb socket 5.
왘
Press bulb socket 5 back into the
lamp.
왘
Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.
Additional turn signal lamps
The additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.
If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to function, the entire turn signal unit must be replaced. Have the additional turn signal unit
replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
lamp, do the following first:
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄 page 129).
Tail lamp unit
왘
Open trunk lid.
왘
Swing the trim panel covering the
corresponding rear lights to the side.
Front side marker lamp
Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs
is a technically highly demanding process,
we recommend you have the side marker
lamp bulbs replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Connector
2 Tab
왘
Disconnect electrical connector 1.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘
Pull tab 2 in the direction of the
arrow.
왘
Remove the bulb carrier.
왘
Reinstall the bulb carrier.
License plate lamp
Let tab 2 (컄 page 448) engage.
왘
Connect the electrical connector 1
(컄 page 448) until it engage.
왘
Reinstall trim panel.
1 Screws
2 License plate lamp
1 Brake lamp
2 Backup lamp
3 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)/tail lamp
4 Tail lamp, parking and standing lamp,
side marker lamp
5 Turn signal lamp
왘
Press gently onto the respective bulb
and turn counterclockwise out of its
bulb socket.
왘
Press the new bulb gently into its bulb
socket and turn clockwise until it
engages.
왘
Loosen both screws 1.
왘
Remove the license plate lamp 2.
왘
Replace the tubular lamp.
왘
Reinstall the license plate lamp 2.
왘
Retighten the screws 1.
449
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Removing and installing wiper blades
! Never open the hood when the wiper arms
왘
are folded forward.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
Warning!
G
For your convenience, we recommend that you
have this work carried out at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Remove SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: make
sure the vehicle's on board electronics
have status 0).
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear.
Wiper blades are components that are subject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be
able to observe surrounding traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
1 Unlocking
2 Tab
450
The wiper blade is unlocked.
왘
Lift up the wiper arm as far as you need
to remove the wiper blade.
! Hold on to the wiper arm. If released, the
force of the impact from the tensioning spring
could crack the windshield.
왘
Removing wiper blades
Pull the tab 2 in the direction of
arrow 1.
Carefully fold the wiper arm back to
rest on the windshield.
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades
왘
Lift up the wiper arm as far as you need
to position the wiper blade under the
wiper arm and hold it.
! Hold on to the wiper arm. If released, the
force of the impact from the tensioning spring
could crack the windshield.
왘
왘
Slide the tab 2 back in the direction of
arrow 3 until it audibly engages.
The wiper blade is locked.
! Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades
may cause windshield damage.
Carefully fold the wiper arm back and
make sure the taper piece 4 slides
into the recess 1 at the wiper blade.
! Make certain that the square recess 5 on
the taper piece 4 is on the top, otherwise the
taper piece 4 cannot slide into the recess 1 at
the wiper blade. If the square recess 5 is not at
the top turn the taper piece 4 around to bring
the square recess 5 to the top.
1 Recess
2 Tab
3 Locking
4 Taper piece
5 Square recess
451
Practical hints
Flat tire
The CLK 63 AMG is equipped with a
TIREFIT kit.
Preparing the vehicle
왘
Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
when possible.
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flasher
(컄 page 135).
왘
Turn the steering wheel so that the
front wheels are in a straight ahead
position.
왘
Set the parking brake (컄 page 59).
왘
Move the gear selector lever to P.
Vehicles with SmartKey:
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 60).
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
452
Vehicles with SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button on the
gear selector lever once (컄 page 60).
왘
Open the driver’s door (with driver’s
door open, starter switch is now in
position 0, same as with SmartKey removed from starter switch). The driver’s door then can be closed again.
i Open door only when conditions are safe to
do so.
왘
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Sealing tires with TIREFIT
(CLK 63 AMG only)
Small tire punctures, particularly those in
the tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT.
TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures down to -4°F (-20°C).
Warning!
G
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire
damage caused by driving with extremely
low tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or
a damaged wheel.
Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances.
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
for assistance or call Roadside Assistance.
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
왘
Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed from the tire.
Take TIREFIT, the sticker, and the
electric air pump out of the trunk
(컄 page 422).
Warning!
G
i If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You can
then peel it off.
Take care not to allow the contents of
TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or
clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed or absorbed through the skin causes skin, eye and respiratory irritation.
Warning!
G
Observe safety instructions on air pump
label.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
i Your vehicle may be equipped with either of
If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
change clothing as soon as possible.
앫
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately.
Two-part sticker
G
1 Sticker for instrument cluster
2 Sticker for wheel
Warning!
왘
Attach sticker part 1 where it will be
easily seen by the driver on the instrument cluster.
Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
왘
Attach sticker part 2 to the damaged
tire (close to the tire valve).
Do not induce vomiting!
two versions of the electric air pump:
Version 1
The air hose with pressure gauge and the
electrical plug are located behind a flap.
앫
Version 2
The pressure gauge is located in the pump
housing.
The following description applies to both
versions. Differences in usage are expressly
declared.
Consult a physician immediately.
Keep away from open flame or heat source.
453
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
Screw the air pump’s air hose 5 onto
flange 6 of TIREFIT container 1.
왘
Stick TIREFIT container 1 upside
down into notch 2 of the electric air
pump.
Version 1
Version 2
1 TIREFIT container
2 Notch
3 Electric air pump switch
4 Electrical plug
5 Air hose
6 Flange
7 Flap
1 TIREFIT container
2 Notch
3 Electric air pump switch
4 Electrical plug
5 Air hose
6 Flange
8 Filler hose
9 Tire valve
왘
Open flap 7 on the electric air pump
(version 1 only).
왘
왘
Pull plug 4 and air hose 5 out of the
pump housing.
454
Unscrew the valve cap of the damaged
tire from tire valve 9.
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 (컄 page 38).
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
왘
You may operate the air pump again after it has
cooled off.
왘
If the tire inflation pressure of at least
26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained, turn off
the electric air pump by pressing 0 on
electric air pump switch 3
(컄 page 454).
왘
Detach filler hose 8 from tire valve 9
(컄 page 454).
왘
Drive vehicle back and forth very slowly
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
Press I on electric air pump switch 3.
The electric air pump is switched on
and inflates the tire.
Version 1
a Vent screw
b Pressure gauge
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 40) on the gear selector lever once. Do not depress
brake pedal.
! Do not operate the electric air pump longer
than 6 minutes without interruption. Otherwise it
may overheat.
i First, the sealing is pumped into the tire. The
왘
Close vent screw a on pressure
gauge b (version 1 only).
pressure may briefly rise to up to 73 psi (5 bar).
This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Do not switch off the electric air pump.
왘
Screw filler hose 8 onto tire valve 9.
왘
왘
Insert electrical plug 4 into the cigarette lighter (컄 page 290) or the power
outlet in the rear passenger compartment (컄 page 291).
Let the electric air pump inflate the tire
for approximately 5 minutes.
The pressure gauge must display at
least 26 psi (1.8 bar). The air hose can
become hot during inflation.
Please exercise appropriate caution.
This serves to better distribute the
TIREFIT sealant material inside the tire.
왘
Unscrew the air pump’s air hose 5
from flange 6 of TIREFIT container 1
(컄 page 454).
왘
Screw air hose 5 onto tire valve 9.
왘
Inflate the tire again.
컄컄
455
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄
Warning!
G
왘
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar)
is not attained, the tire is too severely
damaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable
tire repair.
In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal
the tire.
왘
왘
Do not drive the vehicle.
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
왘
After attaining a tire inflation pressure
of 26 psi (1.8 bar), press 0 on electric
air pump switch 3 (컄 page 454).
The electric air pump is switched off.
456
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 (컄 page 38).
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 40) on the gear
selector lever twice. Do not depress
brake pedal.
Detach the electric air pump.
The air hose may still be hot. Please
exercise appropriate caution.
왘
Place the electrical air pump back in
the trunk.
왘
Close the trunk.
왘
Drive off immediately.
The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself
evenly inside the tire.
Warning!
G
Do not exceed vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not
designed to operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics of a TIREFIT
repaired tire may change. Adapt your driving
accordingly.
왘
After driving the vehicle for an initial
10 minutes, check the tire inflation
pressure using pressure gauge b on
the air pump.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the
vehicle.
Park your vehicle safely away from the roadway and contact the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside
Assistance.
왘
If the tire inflation pressure is at least
20 psi (1.3 bar), inflate or deflate the
tire to correct tire inflation pressure
(see Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar):
왘
To increase tire inflation pressure:
Switch on the electric air pump.
왘
To decrease tire inflation pressure
(version 1): Open vent screw a
on pressure gauge b
(컄 page 455).
Have the damaged tire replaced.
왘
To decrease tire inflation pressure
(version 2): Press yellow deflate
button a located in air pump housing next to pressure gauge b.
Warning!
G
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes, etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. 컄컄
Version 2
a Deflate button
b Pressure gauge
457
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄왘
Drive to the nearest qualified workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, to have the
damaged tire replaced.
Recommended duration of use:
A maximum of 300 miles (500 km) at
50 mph (80 km/h) or below with the
recommended tire inflation pressure.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible to obtain a
new TIREFIT kit.
왘
Bring used TIREFIT materials to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
proper disposal.
왘
Replace your TIREFIT container every
4 years. Replacement containers are
available at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mounting the Minispare wheel
Warning!
Preparing the vehicle
G
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel is
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style
accordingly.
The Minispare wheel is for temporary use
only. When driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted, ensure proper tire pressure and
do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible to have the Minispare
wheel replaced with a regular road wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one Minispare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a
Minispare wheel is mounted.
458
Prepare the vehicle as described
(컄 page 452).
왘
Take the wheel wrench, alignment bolt,
collapsible wheel chock, and the jack
out of the trunk (컄 page 422).
왘
Take the Minispare wheel and wheel
bolts out of the trunk (컄 page 425).
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lifting the vehicle
왘
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
or other sizeable objects.
One wheel chock is included with the
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 422).
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘
Place the wheel chock in front of and
another sizeable object behind the
wheel that is diagonally opposite to the
wheel being changed.
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack
on a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a
hill, place the wheel chock and the other
sizeable object as follows:
왘
Place the wheel chock and another
sizeable object on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the axle not
being worked on.
Warning!
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
1 Wheel wrench
왘
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts
(approximately one full turn with
wrench 1).
The jack take-up brackets are located
directly behind the front wheel housings
and in front of the rear wheel housings.
459
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
2 Jack
3 Take-up bracket
왘
Place jack 2 on firm ground.
왘
Position jack 2 under take-up
bracket 3 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an
incline.
460
왘
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground. Never start engine while
vehicle is raised.
Warning!
G
The jack is intended only for lifting the
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
suited for performing maintenance work
under the vehicle.
앫
Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
앫
Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
1 Alignment bolt
왘
Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and
remove.
왘
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
왘
Remove the remaining bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This
could result in damage to the bolts and wheel
hub threads.
왘
Remove the wheel.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the Minispare wheel
왘
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first
wheel bolt.
Warning!
G
Always replace wheel bolts that are
damaged or rusted.
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel,
(located in trunk with Minispare wheel)
! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the Minispare wheel. The use of any wheel
bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Minispare
wheel will physically damage the vehicle’s
brakes.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
1 Alignment bolt
왘
Guide spare wheel onto the alignment
bolt and push it on.
왘
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
461
컄컄
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄
Lowering the vehicle
왘
Lower vehicle by turning crank
counterclockwise until vehicle is
resting fully on its own weight.
왘
Remove the jack.
왘
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,
following the diagonal sequence
illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are
tight. Observe a tightening torque
of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Warning!
왘
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque
of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Warning!
G
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could fall off the jack.
462
G
1 - 5 Wheel bolts
Before storing the jack, it should be fully
collapsed, with handle folded in (storage
position) (컄 page 424).
왘
Store the jack and the other vehicle
tools in the trunk.
Practical hints
Flat tire
MOExtended system*
Warning!
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there
is a total loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
G
In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
characteristics are diminished in such situations as:
Do not continue driving in emergency mode
if
앫
you notice knocking sounds
앫
the vehicle starts to shake
앫
smoke develops and you smell rubber
You may only use the MOExtended system
in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator.
앫
driving around curves
ESP® is intervening continuously
앫
앫
while braking
앫
you notice tears on the tire sidewalls
! The maximum distance in emergency mode
앫
while accelerating rapidly
depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 30 miles
(50 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and
18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded.
Therefore, your driving style must be adapted accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and
driving maneuvers, as well as driving over
obstacles (road curbs, potholes, or off-road
areas). This is especially important if the vehicle is heavily loaded.
The point at which the maximum driving distance
begins in emergency mode is when the warning
message appears in the multifunction display
indicating that there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
The emergency driving distance that can be
achieved greatly depends on the demands
placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can
be significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is
driven cautiously, somewhat longer.
After driving in emergency mode, you must
have the rims inspected at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are
suitable for further use. The failed tire must
be replaced in any case.
i When replacing individual or all tires on the
vehicle, make sure only matching tires marked
with “MOExtended” are mounted in the size
specified for your vehicle (컄 page 482).
463
Practical hints
Battery
The battery is located in the engine
compartment on the right hand side.
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and
precautions when handling automotive
batteries (컄 page 329).
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
1 Clamps
Removing filter box:
왘
Release clamps 1.
왘
Remove filter box.
Installing filter box:
왘
Insert filter box properly.
왘
Secure it with clamps 1.
464
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
clamps while the engine is running or the
SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the
alternator and other electronic components
could be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance
intervals or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.
Warning!
G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Practical hints
Battery
! Always disconnect the battery in the order
Removing the battery
described below. Otherwise the vehicle’s electronics can be damaged.
왘
Remove the screw securing the
battery.
왘
Remove the battery support and
bracket.
왘
Pull out the ventilation hose from the
battery (depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle model, the ventilation hose is located either on the left or
right side of the battery).
왘
Take out the battery.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 59).
왘
Make sure gear selector lever is set to
position P (컄 page 174).
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
2 Negative terminal
3 Positive terminal cover
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Press the start/stop button until
the engine shuts off.
왘
Open the driver’s door.
Disconnecting the battery
Warning!
G
With a disconnected battery
앫
앫
you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever will
have no effect
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 323).
왘
Remove the filter box (컄 page 464).
왘
Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄 page 464).
왘
Disconnect the battery negative lead
from negative terminal 2.
왘
Remove cover 3 from the positive
terminal.
왘
Disconnect the battery positive lead.
465
Practical hints
Battery
Charging and reinstalling the battery
Warning!
G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information and availability. Charge battery
in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger.
왘
Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
466
왘
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in
reverse order.
! The battery, its filler caps and the ventilation
hose must always be securely installed when the
vehicle is in operation.
i The following procedures must be carried
out following any interruption of battery power
(e.g. due to reconnecting):
앫
Set the clock (컄 page 160). Vehicles with
COMAND*: see COMAND operator’s manual.
앫
Synchronize the side windows
(컄 page 252).
앫
Synchronize the tilt/sliding sunroof* (CLK
coupe) (컄 page 258).
Reconnecting the battery
! Always connect the battery in the order
described below. Otherwise the vehicle’s
electronics can be damaged.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Open the driver’s door.
! Never invert the terminal connections!
왘
Connect the battery positive lead and
fasten its cover 3 (컄 page 465).
왘
Connect the battery negative lead 2
(컄 page 465).
왘
Reinstall the filter box (컄 page 464).
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
앫
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
attempts.
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫
Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a higher voltage battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated
failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk.
앫
Only use jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation.
앫
Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
parts that move when an engine is
started or running.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any
other metal part while the other end is still
attached to a battery.
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the
battery of another vehicle. Observe the
following:
앫
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
Warning!
G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 329).
467
Practical hints
Jump starting
The battery is located on the right side of
the engine compartment. For jump starting, use the terminals in front of the
battery.
왘
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 59).
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to position P (컄 page 174).
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 323).
왘
Flip up cover from positive under hood
terminal 2 in front of the filter box
(컄 page 465).
1 Positive terminal of charged battery
2 Positive under hood terminal in front of
discharged battery
3 Negative under hood terminal in front
of discharged battery
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
왘
Connect the negative terminal 4 of
the charged battery with the negative
under hood terminal 3 in front of the
filter box with the second jumper cable.
Clamp the cable to the negative
terminal 4 of the charged battery
first.
왘
Start the engine of the disabled
vehicle.
You can now turn on the electrical consumers. Do not switch on the headlamps
under any circumstances.
왘
! Never invert the terminal connections.
왘
왘
468
Connect the positive terminal 1 of the
charged battery with the positive under
hood terminal 2 in front of the filter
box with the jumper cable. Clamp cable
to charged battery 1 first.
Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
Remove the jumper cables first from
the negative terminals 3 and 4 and
then from the positive terminals 2
and 1.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
왘
Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Warning!
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment.
G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
with SmartKey in starter switch turned to
position 0.
there is a malfunction in the brake
system
앫
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing
with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will
damage radiator and supports.
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
This is necessary to adequately control the
towed vehicle.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie
down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts.
Switch off the automatic central locking
(컄 page 166).
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
remove SmartKey from starter switch and
reinsert.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised, the gear selector lever must be in
position N and the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Active braking action through the ESP® may
otherwise seriously damage the brake system.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground, the gear selector lever must be in
position N and the SmartKey must be in starter
switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may
be towed only for distances up to 30 miles
(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
469
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
! Towing of the vehicle should only be done
using the properly installed towing eye bolt.
Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to
the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.
i When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, please note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and
the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 2,
the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as
well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking
(컄 page 166).
i If the battery is disconnected or discharged
앫
the SmartKey will not turn in the starter
switch. For more information, see “Battery”
(컄 page 464) and “Jump starting”
(컄 page 467).
앫
the gear selector lever will remain locked in
position P. For information on manually unlocking the transmission gear selector lever,
see (컄 page 429).
Installing towing eye bolt
To remove cover:
Towing eye bolt CLK 350
i To signal turns while being towed with the
왘
Press mark on cover 1 or 2.
왘
Lift cover off to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the compartment underneath the trunk floor).
hazard warning flasher in use, switch on the
ignition and activate the combination switch for
the left or right turn signal in the usual manner –
only the selected turn signal will operate.
왘
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
warning flasher will operate again.
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with wheel wrench.
To reinstall cover:
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
470
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper
왘
Fit cover 1 or 2 and snap into place.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing eye bolt CLK 550/CLK 63 AMG
Towing eye bolt in front bumper
The cover for the towing eye bolt in the
front bumper is identical to the cover on
the CLK 350.
To remove cover 1:
왘
Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in
recess 2 on the edge of cover 1.
왘
Loosen cover 1 from the bumper using lever, to reveal the threaded hole
for towing eye bolt.
To remove and to reinstall cover, see “Towing eye bolt CLK 350” (컄 page 470).
To reinstall cover 1:
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the compartment
underneath the trunk floor).
Towing eye bolt in rear bumper
왘
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with wheel wrench.
왘
Hook right-hand side of the cover 1
into opening.
왘
Slide cover 1 as far as it will go in the
direction of the arrow 3.
왘
Gently press left-hand side of cover 1
in direction of the arrow 4.
The hooks on the left-hand side
engage.
1 Cover on right side of rear bumper
2 Recess in the cover
i When closing the cover 1, make sure the
cover’s check strap does not get caught.
471
Practical hints
Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If a fuse is blown, the components and systems secured by that fuse will stop operating.
Warning!
G
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system
in question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the
cause determined and remedied at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have
the cause determined and rectified at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
A fuse chart explains the fuse allocation
and fuse amperages. It is located in the
main fuse box in the passenger compartment (컄 page 472).
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The electrical fuses are located in different
fuse boxes:
앫
in the passenger compartment on the
driver’s side (컄 page 472)
앫
on the driver’s side of the engine compartment (컄 page 473)
앫
in the trunk (컄 page 474)
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 60).
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Open the driver’s door.
Fuse box in passenger compartment
The fuse box is located in the passenger
compartment on the driver’s side of the
cockpit.
i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro- Before replacing fuses:
priate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the
fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage
recommended in the fuse chart.
Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise
you on this subject.
472
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 59).
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to position P (컄 page 174).
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
1 Fuse box cover
! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw
driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the
cockpit, as this could damage it.
Practical hints
Fuses
Opening fuse box
왘
Open the driver’s door.
왘
Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into
the edge of the fuse box cover 1 at
the position indicated by the arrow.
왘
Loosen fuse box cover 1 from cockpit
using lever.
왘
Using your hands, remove fuse box
cover 1 rearward.
Fuse box in engine compartment
The fuse box is located in the engine compartment on the driver’s side.
4 Fuse box cover
5 Clamps
Closing fuse box
왘
Attach fuse box cover 1 in the front.
왘
Fold fuse box cover 1 in until it
engages.
Opening fuse box
1 Cover
2 Screw
3 Retainer
Removing cover
왘
Twist screws 2 90° counterclockwise.
왘
Lift the rear of cover 1.
왘
Slide out retainer 3 and remove
cover 1 by pulling towards front.
왘
With a dry cloth, remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
왘
Release clamps 5.
왘
Remove fuse box cover 4.
473
Practical hints
Fuses
Closing fuse box
왘
왘
Fuse box in trunk
Make sure the sealing rubber is
properly positioned.
CLK coupe
Press fuse box cover 4 down and
secure with clamps 5.
The fuse box is located in the trunk behind
the left-hand trim panel.
왘
Press trim panel 1 back into place.
CLK cabriolet
The fuse box is located in the trunk behind
the left-hand trim panel.
! The fuse box cover 4 must be properly positioned as described to prevent moisture or dirt
from entering the fuse box and possibly impairing fuse operation.
Installing cover
왘
Insert cover 1 sideways into
retainer 3.
왘
Twist screws 2 90° clockwise.
1 Trim panel
2 Fuse box cover
Opening fuse box
왘
Pull away trim panel 1.
왘
Remove fuse box cover 2.
Closing fuse box
왘
474
Place fuse box cover 2 back on.
1 Trim panel
Opening fuse box
왘
To open, pull trim panel 1 in the direction of the rear light and outward.
Closing fuse box
왘
Press trim panel 1 back into place.
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions and weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
475
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine
Mercedes-Benz Parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
476
! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s
durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange
or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with
the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories warranties, copies of which
are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
477
Technical data
Identification labels
1 Certification label (on driver’s B-pillar)
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
can be found in the following locations:
2 VIN
3 Paintwork code
앫
on the certification label.
앫
embossed underneath the carpet in
front of the passenger seat
(컄 page 479).
앫
on the lower edge of the windshield
(컄 page 479).
478
Example certification label
(Canada vehicles)
2 VIN
3 Paintwork code
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purpose only. These data are specific
to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustration. Refer to certification label on
vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
Technical data
Identification labels
4 Carpet
5 VIN
왘
Move the passenger seat to the rear as
far as possible.
왘
Fold carpet 4 in direction of arrow.
VIN 5 is visible.
6 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission
standards
7 VIN (lower edge of windshield)
8 Engine number (engraved on engine)
i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle
identification and engine numbers.
479
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
CLK 350 / CLK 550
CLK 63 AMG
1 Idler pulley
2 Idler pulley
3 Automatic belt tensioner
4 Power steering pump
5 Air conditioning compressor
6 Crankshaft
7 Coolant pump
8 Generator (alternator)
1 Idler pulley
2 Idler pulley
3 Idler pulley
4 Automatic belt tensioner
5 Power steering pump
6 Air conditioning compressor
7 Crankshaft
8 Coolant pump
9 Generator (alternator)
480
Technical data
Engine
왔 Engine
Coupe
CLK 350 (209.356)1
CLK 550 (209.372)1
Cabriolet
CLK 350 (209.456)1
CLK 550 (209.472)1
CLK 63 AMG (209.477)1
Engine
272
273
156
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
6
8
8
Bore
3.66 in (92.90 mm)
3.85 in (98.00 mm)
4.02 in (102.20 mm)
Stroke
3.39 in (86.00 mm)
Model
3.56 in (90.50 mm)
3
3.72 in (94.60 mm)
Total piston displacement
213.5 cu in (3498 cm )
333.25 cu in (5461 cm )
378.8 cu in (6208 cm3)
Compression ratio
10.5:1
10.5:1
11.3:1
382 hp/6000
(285 kW/6000 rpm)
475 hp/6800 rpm 2
(354 kW/6800 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 258 lb-ft/2400 - 5000 rpm
1349
(350 Nm/2400 - 5000 rpm)
391 lb-ft/2800 - 4800 rpm
(530 Nm/2800 - 4800 rpm)
465 lb-ft/5000 rpm
(630 Nm/5000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6300 rpm
6500 rpm
7200 rpm
Firing order
1-4-3-6-2-5
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2404 mm
2404 mm (CLK coupe)
2360 mm
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
rpm 2
3
268 hp/6000
(200 kW/6000 rpm)
rpm 2
2380 mm (CLK cabriolet)
1
2
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
481
Technical data
Rims and tires
! Only use tires which have been tested and
! Using tires other than those approved by
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Tires approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP®. Tires specially
developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by
finding the following on the tire’s sidewall:
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects,
such as
앫
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment
tires
AMG vehicles:
Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG
vehicles. For information on tested and approved tires for AMG vehicles, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires with limited run-flat characteristics)
original equipment tires
Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i For information on driving with MOExtended
tires, see “MOExtended system*” (컄 page 348).
482
앫
poor handling characteristics
앫
increased noise
If such information is provided, it can be found
on the placard located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted
on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.
앫
increased fuel consumption
i The following pages also list the approved
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation
characteristics that could cause them to come
into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts.
Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the
result.
i Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental
tire inflation pressure information for driving at
high speeds (컄 page 340) or for vehicle loads
less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition
(컄 page 339).
wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are not available as standard or optional factory equipment,
but can be purchased from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Depending on vehicle model and the standard or
optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on your vehicle (Appearance Package,
Sport Package etc.), equipping your vehicle with
winter tires approved for your vehicle model may
also require the purchase of two or four wheel
rims of the recommended size for use with these
winter tires. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for more information.
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
Model
CLK 350
CLK 550
Rims (light alloy)
7.5 J x 17 H2
7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset
1.42 in (36 mm)
1.42 in (36 mm)
Winter tires
1,3
225/45 R17 91 H M+S.
225/45 R17 91 H M+S.
Winter tires
1,2,3
225/45 R17 91 H M+S.MOExtended
225/45 R17 91 H M+S.MOExtended
1
Radial-ply tires
Must be used in conjunction with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles) or Run Flat Indicator (Canada vehicles) only.
3
Not available as factory equipment.
2
Model
CLK 63 AMG cabriolet
Rims (light alloy)
8 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset
1.34 in (34 mm)
Winter tires
1,2,3
225/40 R18 92 V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
1
Radial-ply tires
Not available as factory equipment.
3 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
2
483
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
Model
CLK 350
CLK 550*
Rims (light alloy)
7.5 J x 17 H2
7.5 J x 17 H2
AMG rims (light alloy)
–
–
Wheel offset
1.42 in (36 mm)
1.42 in (36 mm)
225/45 R17 91H
–
225/45 R17 91W MOExtended
225/45 R17 91W MOExtended
Rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x17 H2
8.5 J x17 H2
AMG rims (light alloy)
–
–
Wheel offset
1.18 in (30 mm)
1.18 in (30 mm)
245/40 R17 91H
–
245/40 R17 91W MOExtended
245/40 R17 91W MOExtended
Front axle:
All-season tires
Summer
1
tires*1,2
Rear axle:
All-season tires
Summer
1
1,3
tires*1,2,3
Radial-ply tires
Must be used in conjunction with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles) or Run Flat Indicator (Canada vehicles) only.
3 Must not be used with snow chains.
2
484
Technical data
Rims and tires
Model
CLK 550
CLK 63 AMG cabriolet
AMG rims (light alloy)
7.5 J x 18 H2
8 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset
1.46 in (37 mm)
1.34 in (34 mm)
225/40 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load)
225/40 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load)
AMG rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x18 H2
8.5 J x18 H2
Wheel offset
1.18 in (30 mm)
1.18 in (30 mm)
255/35 ZR18 94Y XL (Extra Load)
255/35 ZR18 94Y XL (Extra Load)
Front axle:
Summer tires
1
Rear axle:
Summer tires
1
2
1,2
Radial-ply tires
Must not be used with snow chains.
485
Technical data
Rims and tires
Minispare wheel
Model
All Models (except CLK 63 AMG cabriolet)
Rim
3.5 B x 17 H2
Wheel offset
0.67 in (17 mm)
Tire
1
1
T 125/80 R 17 99M
Must not be used with snow chains.
! Please compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on
the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the spare
wheel tire to the recommended tire inflation
pressure given on the yellow label on the spare
wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of
the Minispare tire differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.
Make sure the Minispare tire is inflated to approximately 61 psi (4.2 bar).
486
i The CLK 63 AMG cabriolet does not have a
spare wheel. The CLK 63 AMG cabriolet is
equipped with TIREFIT, see “Sealing tires with
TIREFIT (CLK 63 AMG only)” (컄 page 452).
Technical data
Electrical system
왔 Electrical system
Model
CLK 350
CLK 550
CLK 63 AMG
Generator (alternator)
14 V/150 A
14 V/180 A
14 V/180 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.4 KW
12 V/1.7 KW
12 V/2.2 KW
Battery
12 V/100 Ah
12 V/100 Ah
12 V/100 Ah
Spark plugs
Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP 33
NGK PLKR 6A
Bosch F8 DPP 332
NGK PFR 5R-11
NGK ILZKAR 7A10
Electrode gap
0.031 in (0.80 mm)
0.039 in (1.00 mm)
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque
15 - 22 lb-ft (20 - 30 Nm)
18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)
14.75 - 18.5 lb-ft (20 - 25 Nm)
487
Technical data
Main dimensions and weights
Main dimensions
Model
CLK 350
CLK 550
CLK 63 AMG
Overall vehicle length
183.3 in (4657 mm)
183.3 in (4657 mm)
183.3 in (4657 mm)
Overall vehicle width
(exterior rear view mirrors
folded out)
78.4 in (1991 mm)
78.4 in (1991 mm)
78.4 in (1991 mm)
Coupe:
55.4 in (1408 mm)
55.4 in (1408 mm)
Cabriolet:
55.6 in (1413 mm)
55.4 in (1408 mm)
55.3 in (1400 mm)
Overall vehicle height when
opening/closing soft top
80.2 in (2038 mm)
81.0 in (2057 mm)
80.6 in (2047 mm)
Wheelbase
106.9 in (2715 mm)
106.9 in (2715 mm)
106.9 in (2715 mm)
Track, front
58.8 in (1493 mm)
58.9 in (1497 mm)
58.9 in (1495 mm)
Track, rear
58.0 in (1474 mm)
58.2 in (1478 mm)
58.0 in (1474 mm)
Overall vehicle height
Weights
Roof load max.
(CLK coupe only)
220 lbs (100 kg)
Trunk load max.
220 lbs (100 kg)
488
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities
G
Warning!
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or
inquire at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Comply with all valid regulations with
respect to handling, storing, and disposing
of service fluids. Otherwise you could
endanger persons or the environment.
For health reasons, you should prevent
service fluids from coming into direct
contact with your skin and clothing.
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
physician immediately.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
children.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil filter
CLK 350
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
CLK 550
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
CLK 63 AMG 9.3 US qt (8.8 l)
Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission
CLK 350
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
CLK 550
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
CLK 63 AMG 9.2 US qt (8.7 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear axle
CLK 350
1.16 US qt (1.1 l)
CLK 550
1.27 US qt (1.2 l)
CLK 63 AMG 1.27 US qt (1.2 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Fuchs Titan EG 5010D
489
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Power steering
CLK 350
approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
CLK 550
approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
CLK 63 AMG approx. 1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
Front wheel hubs
CLK 350
approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
CLK 550
approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each
CLK 63 AMG approx. 2.5 oz (70 g) each
Brake system
0.64 US qt (0.6 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid
(Pentosin CHF 11S)
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system
CLK 350
approx. 7.8 US qt (7.4 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
CLK 550
approx. 9.7 US qt (9.2 l)
Agent
CLK 63 AMG approx. 11.5 US qt (10.9 l)
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
16.35 US gal (62.0 l)
2.11 US gal (8.0 l)
CLK 350
2.11 US gal (8.0 l)
CLK 550
CLK 63 AMG 3.17 US gal (12.0 l)
Air conditioning system
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer system
3.2 US qt (3.0 l)
Heated windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
6.4 US qt (6.0 l)
1
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Minimum Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 496).
490
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine oils
Engine oil additives
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for
our service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters
required for vehicles with Maintenance
System.
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending
oil additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
! Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the
Maintenance System, or changing of oil and oil
filter at change intervals longer than those called
for by the Maintenance System will result in
engine or emission control system damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System
recommendations for scheduled oil changes.
Failure to do so will result in engine or emission
control system damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air
conditioning system.
! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system
will occur.
Brake fluid
Warning!
G
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from the
atmosphere.
Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the
formation of bubbles in the system, thus
reducing the system’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
regularly. Refer to your vehicle's Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
provide you with additional information.
491
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
! To maintain the engine’s durability and per-
Premium unleaded gasoline
Warning!
G
formance, premium unleaded gasoline must be
used. If premium unleaded gasoline is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these
precautions:
앫
Have the fuel tank only partially filled with
unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with
premium unleaded gasoline as soon as
possible.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
앫
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
Turn off the engine before refueling
앫
Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm
if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such
as two persons and no luggage.
앫
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator
pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or
operating in mountainous terrain.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
personal injury.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or clothing contact,
extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors can damage your
health.
Fuel requirements
Only use premium unleaded fuel:
앫
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research Octane Number
(RON) and the Motor Octane Number
(MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not
exceed 10%; MTBE not to exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
can be used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
492
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon
deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to
engine performance problems such as:
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasolines which contain these additives,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Refer to Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet (USA only), or contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for a
listing of approved product(s). Follow
directions on product label.
! Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
This only results in unnecessary cost and may be
harmful to the engine operation.
Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel
quality or from blending additional fuel additives
other than those tested and approved by us for
use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles are not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
493
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which
provides:
앫
Corrosion protection
앫
Freeze protection
앫
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and
corrosion protection.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification are used to
renew the coolant concentration or bring it
back up to the proper level.
! Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding
water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
separately from each other, could cause engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty
For information on other Mercedes-Benz
approved products of equal specification,
refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective
to -35°F (-37°C), the boiling point of the
coolant in the pressurized cooling system
is reached at
approximately 266°F (130°C).
494
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 50% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approximately -35°F
[-37°C]). If you use a solution that is more
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze
protection to approximately -49°F
[-45°C]), the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use
more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
should be used to bring it up to the proper
level (have cooling system checked for
signs of leakage). Please make sure the
mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model
Approximate freeze protection
–35°F (–37°C)
–49°F (–45°C)
CLK 350
3.9 US qt (3.7 l)
4.3 US qt (4.1 l)
CLK 550
4.9 US qt (4.6 l)
5.3 US qt (5.1 l)
CLK 63 AMG
5.8 US qt (5.5 l)
6.3 US qt (6.0 l)
495
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
Both the windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system are supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir.
The windshield washer reservoir has a
capacity of approximately:
앫
3.2 US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles with windshield washer system
앫
6.4 US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with heated
windshield washer system* and headlamp cleaning system*.
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
and water (or concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze,
depending on ambient temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and water:
앫
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be
seriously burned.
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze:
앫
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] solvent)
496
Index
A
ABS 29, 90
Malfunction indicator lamp 378
Messages in display 394
Accelerator position,
automatic transmission 176
Accessory weight 358
Accident 58
Active head restraints 81
Resetting 440
Air bags 65
Children 83
Front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp 76
Front side impact air bags 70
Front, Driver 70
Front, Passenger 70
Head-thorax 71
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) 72
Rear side impact air bags* 70
Rear side-impact* 72
Safety guidelines 68
Window curtain 70
Air conditioning refrigerant 491
Air conditioning system
see Climate control system
Air conditioning, Cooling 198, 210
Air distribution 194, 205
Air pressure see Tires, Inflation pressure
Air recirculation mode 196, 207
Air vents 199, 212
Air volume 194, 206
Alarm system see Anti-theft systems
Alignment bolt
(vehicle tool kit) 422, 460, 461
AMG menu (CLK 63 AMG only) 148
Lap analysis 151
Overall analysis 150
RACETIMER 149
Vehicle supply voltage 148
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 494, 495
Antiglare, Rear view mirror 185, 186
Antilock Brake System see ABS
Anti-theft systems 97
Anti-theft alarm system 97
Immobilizer 97
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Armrest 287
Ashtrays 289
Aspect ratio 358
ATF 327
AUDIO menu 151
CD player (CD, MP3-CD) 152
Radio station 151
Radio station (satellite*) 152
Search function 165
Audio system 213
Button and soft key operation 216
CD changer* 232
CD operation 229
Emergency calls "911" 248
MP3 230
Operating and display elements 214
Operating audio system 213
Operating safety 213
Radio operation 221
Sound system* 213, 217
Switching on/off 216
Telephone* operation 213, 236
Auto-dimming, Rear view mirror 186
Automatic central locking,
Control system 118, 166
Automatic climate control
see Climate control system
Automatic headlamp mode see Headlamps
497
Index
Automatic lighting control,
Interior lighting 136
Automatic locking when driving 118
Automatic shift program 178
Automatic transmission
Accelerator position 176
Automatic shift program 178
Emergency operation
(limp-home mode) 184
Gear ranges 177
Gear selector lever 51, 172
Gear selector lever control
one-touch gearshifting 179
Gear selector lever positions 174
Gear shifting malfunctions 184
Kickdown 176
Kickdown, manual shift program 184
Manual shift program
CLK 63 AMG 182
Program mode selector switch 178
Shifting procedure 173
Starting engine 51
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting* 180
Transmission fluid level 327
Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATF
498
B
Backrest 281
Seat, Multicontour* 124
Seat, Power 42
Backup lamps
Messages in display 414
Replacing bulbs 443, 444
Bar 358
BAS 92
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 442
Checking battery condition 108
Battery, Vehicle 329, 464
Charging 466
Connecting 466
Disconnecting 465
Installing 466
Jump starting 467
Messages in display 403
Removing 465
Bead 358
Beverage holder see Cup holder
Block heater (Canada only) 363
Bolts, Spare wheel 426
Brake fluid 491
Checking 322
Message in display 404
Brake lamp
Cleaning lenses 372
High mounted 444
Replacing bulbs 444, 448
Brake pads
Message in display 404
Brakes 310
High-performance brake system
(CLK 63 AMG only) 311
Warning lamp 380
Break-in period 308
Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs
Index
C
California retail buyers and
lessees, Important notice for 11
Call priority (Tele Aid) 300
Can holder see Cup holder
Capacities and
recommended fuels/lubricants 489
Cargo area see Trunk
Cargo tie-down rings 284
Carpets, cleaning 375
Catalytic converter 318
CD changer* 229
MP3 230
CD player 229
Control system 152
Center console 31
Lower part 32
Upper part 31
Central locking
Automatic 118, 166
Locking/unlocking from inside 119
Central locking switch 119
Certification label 478
Certification label, examples 478
Charcoal filter 209
Checking tire pressure electronically
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), (USA only) 344
Children in the vehicle 83
Air bags 83
Blocking
rear side window operation 88
Front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp 76
Infant and
child restraint systems 77, 83, 86
LATCH-type child seat anchors 87
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) 72
Cigarette lighter 290
Climate control
see Climate control system
Climate control system
Air conditioning refrigerant 491
Air conditioning, Cooling 198, 210
Air distribution 194, 205
Air recirculation mode 196, 207
Air vents 199, 212
Air volume 194, 195, 206
Charcoal filter 209
Control panel,
Automatic climate control 201
Deactivating/Reactivating 193, 203
Defogging 206
Defrosting 206
Defrosting, rear window 189
Front defroster 195
MAXCOOL 207
Residual engine heat
and ventilation* (REST*) 211
Temperature 194, 204
Clock 29, 140, 160
Setting time 160
Cockpit 26
Cold tire inflation pressure 358
Collapsible wheel chock 422, 424
COMAND* see separate
COMAND operating instructions
Combination switch 55, 133
Control system 141
Functions 143, 145
Multifunction display 141
Multifunction steering wheel 142
Resetting to factory default 155
499
Index
Control system menus 144, 145
AMG 148
AUDIO 151
NAV* 153
Settings 155
Settings, Submenus 156
Standard display 147
Submenus 143
TEL* 169
Trip computer 167
Vehicle status message memory 154
Control system submenus 143, 145, 157
Convenience 166
Instrument cluster 158
Lighting 162
Time/Date 160
Vehicle 165
500
Coolant 328, 494
Adding 328
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
mixing ratio and quantity 494
Capacities 489
Checking coolant level 328
Messages in display 405–407
Temperature 319
Temperature indicator 139
Warning lamp 382
Coolants 494
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 133
Replacing bulbs 444
Cruise control 267
Canceling 269
Cruise control lever 267
Current speed 268
Fine adjustment 270
Higher speed 269
Last stored speed ("Resume"
function) 270
Slower speed 270
Cup holder 288
Curb weight 358
D
Date 160
Date, Setting 161, 162
Daytime running lamp mode 131
Setting 162
Deep water see Standing water
Defogging
Windshield 196, 206
Defrosting, Front 195, 206
Defrosting, Rear 189
Delayed shut-off
Exterior lamps 164
Interior lighting 165
Department of Transportation see DOT
Difficulties
With starting 53
Digital speedometer 147
Dimensions, Vehicle 488
Direction of rotation (tires) 334
Displays
Digital speedometer 147
Lap analysis 151
Maintenance service indicator 364
Messages in display 392
Multifunction display 141
Outside temperature 140
Index
Overall analysis 150
RACETIMER 149
Symbol messages 403–420
Text messages 394–401
Vehicle status message memory 154
Vehicle status messages
see Multifunction display messages
Vehicle supply voltage 148
Distance to empty (Range),
Trip computer 168
Door
Entry lamps 137
Handle (inside) 34
Locking/unlocking,
KEYLESS-GO* 37, 106
Locking/unlocking,
SmartKey 36, 102
Opening from inside/outside 109
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 300
Unlocking, Mechanical key 427
Door control panel 34
Door handle 109
DOT 358
Drinking and driving 309
Driving
Abroad 317
Hydroplaning 314
In winter 316
Instructions 48, 309
Problems 58
Safety systems 90
Systems 267
Through standing water 317
Driving off 312
Driving safety systems
ABS 90
BAS 92
Electronic traction system 94
ESP® 92
Driving systems
Cruise control 267
Parktronic system*
(CLK 63 AMG (USA),
Canada all models) 271
Driving tips 176
Accelerator position 176
Kickdown 176
E
Easy-entry/exit feature 45, 166
Electrical fuses see Fuses
Electrical outlet 291
Electrical system, Technical data 487
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Emergency call system* 295
Emergency calls
911 calls 248
Tele Aid calls 296, 297
Emergency, In case of
Instrument cluster,
Indicator lamps 378–388
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) 184
Emergency operations
Active head restraints, Resetting 440
Center console,
Indicator lamps 390–391
Gear selector lever, Unlocking 429
Instrument cluster,
Indicator lamps 378–387
Remote door unlock 300
501
Index
Roll bars, Lowering 431
Roll bars, Releasing 430
Soft top, Closing 432–439
Trunk lid, Releasing from inside 117
Trunk lid, Unlocking 428
Unlocking/locking
the vehicle 427, 428
Emergency tensioning device see ETD
Emergency, In case of
Battery, Jump starting 467
First aid kit 421
Flat tire, Changing 452
Fuses 472
Hazard warning flasher 135
Roadside Assistance 12, 298
Towing the vehicle 469
Emission control 318
Emission control information label 479
Emission system warranties 10
502
Engine
Belt layout 480
Block heater (Canada only) 363
Break-in recommendations 308
Cleaning 369
Compartment 323
Malfunction indicator lamp 29, 381
Maximum engine speed 481
Message in display 405
Number 479
Starting 51
Starting difficulties 53
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 52
Starting with SmartKey 52
Technical data 481
Turning off 60
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* 60
Turning off with SmartKey 60
Engine coolant see Coolant
Engine oil 325, 491
Adding 327, 491
Additives 491
Changing 327, 491
Checking level 322, 325
Consumption 325
Filler cap 327
Filler neck 327
Engine oil level 322
ESP® 92
Messages in display 394–395
Warning lamp 384
ETD 80
Safety guidelines 68
Exterior rear view mirrors 47, 186
Exterior view 22, 24
Index
F
Filler cap, Engine oil 327
Filler neck, Engine oil 327
First aid kit 421
Flat tire 452
Jacking up the vehicle 459
Lowering the vehicle 462
Minispare wheel 425
Mounting the spare wheel 458
Preparing the vehicle 452
TIREFIT (CLK 63 AMG only) 422
TIREFIT kit* 452
Floormats* 291
Fluids
Brake fluid 322, 491
Engine coolant 322, 494
Engine oil 322, 491
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning* system 322, 496
Fog lamps 132, 444
Messages in display 412
Replacing bulbs 444, 445, 448
Front air bags 70
Front lamps see Headlamps
Front passenger front air bag 65, 70
Messages in display 396–399
Front passenger front air bag
off indicator lamp 31, 76, 390
Front seat head restraints
see Head restraints
Fuel 321, 489
Additives 493
Automatic transmission fluid 489
Brake fluid 490
Capacities 489
Capacities, Fuel tank 490
Engine coolant 490
Engine oil 489
Filling the tank 320
Fuel display 29
Fuel filler flap and cap 320
Fuel filler flap and cap, Multifunction
display messages 408
Fuel reserve warning lamp 385
Power steering fluid 490
Premium
unleaded gasoline 321, 490, 492
Requirements, Octane rating 492
Technical data 489
Fuel cap
Message in display 382
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 167
Resetting 168
Since last reset 168
Fuel filler flap 320
Locking/unlocking 320
Opening 320
Fuel reserve warning lamp 29
Fuel tank
Capacity 490
Filler flap 320
Fuel, Premium
unleaded gasoline 321, 492
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities 489
Fuses 472
Fuse box (main)
in passenger compartment 472
Fuse box
in engine compartment 473
Fuse box
in trunk 474
Replacing 472
503
Index
G
Garage door opener 33, 301
Gasoline see Fuel
GAWR 358
Gear range
Automatic transmission 177
Limiting 177
Shifting into optimal 180, 182
Gear selector lever 51, 172
Cleaning 375
Gearshift pattern 172
Lock 52
Message in display 400
Position 173, 174
Position indicator 29, 141
Shifting procedure 173
Unlocking in an emergency 429
Gear selector lever one-touch gearshifting
Automatic transmission 179
Global locking/unlocking
see Key, SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*
Glove box 285
Gloves 422
Good visibility 185
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
504
Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
GVW 358
GVWR 359
H
Halogen headlamp see Headlamps
Hands-free microphone 33
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 375
Hazard warning flasher 135
Head restraints 43, 120
Active head restraints 81
Front seat 120
Power seat, Adjusting 43
Rear seat 120, 123
Rear seat, Folding back 121
Rear seat, Lowering 123
Rear seat, Placing upright 122
Rear seat, Raising 123
Rear seat, Removing/installing 122
Headlamp
cleaning system* 185, 330, 496
Headlamp delayed shut-off see
Delayed shut-off, Exterior lamps
Headlamps
Automatic headlamp mode 130
Cleaning lenses 372
Daytime running lamp mode 131
Halogen 446
High beam see High beam flasher
High beam see High beam headlamps
Light sensor 411
Locator lighting 132
Low beam headlamps 130
Low beam see Low beam headlamps
Manual headlamp mode 130
Messages in display 411–415
Night security illumination 132
Replacing bulbs 444, 446
Switch 55, 129
Headliner and shelf below rear window,
Cleaning and care of 375
Head-thorax air bag 71
Heated seats* 125
High beam flasher 55, 133
Replacing bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 444
Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 444
Index
High beam headlamps 133
Indicator lamp 29
Messages in display 412
Replacing bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 444
Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 444, 446
Replacing bulbs for
high beam flasher (Bi-Xenon*) 447
Switching on 55
High mounted brake lamp 444
Hood 323
Horn 27
HVAC see Climate control system
Hydroplaning 314
I
Identification labels 478
Identification number,
Vehicle (VIN) 478, 479
Ignition
with KEYLESS-GO* 40
with SmartKey 38
Immobilizer 97
Indicator lamps see
Lamps, indicator and warning
Infant and child restraint systems see
Children in the vehicle
Inflation pressure see
Tires, Inflation pressure
Inside door handle 34, 109
Instrument cluster 28, 138
Illumination brightness 138
Lamps in 378–387
Messages in display see
Multifunction display messages
Multifunction display 141
Instrument lighting see Instrument
cluster, Illumination brightness
Instrument panel see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls see Cockpit
Interior lighting 136
Delayed shut-off 165
Interior rear view mirror 47, 186
Antiglare position 185
Auto-dimming 186
Interior storage spaces see
Storage compartments
J
Jack 422
Jacking up the vehicle
Jump starting 467
459
505
Index
K
Key, Mechanical 427
Key, SmartKey 100
Batteries 108
Battery check lamp 102, 107
Changing batteries 442
Factory setting 102, 103
Ignition 38
Locking/unlocking 36, 62, 100
Locking/unlocking,
Global setting 102
Locking/unlocking,
Selective setting 102
Loss of 109
Message in display 411
Opening and closing the
power tilt/sliding sunroof* 257
Opening and closing the
power windows 253
Opening and closing the soft top 263
Positions in starter switch 38
Remote control 100
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 103
Starting the engine 52
Steering wheel lock 38
Turning off the engine 60
506
Unlocking/opening trunk lid 103
KEYLESS-GO* 103
Battery check lamp, SmartKey 107
Factory setting 106, 108
Ignition 40
Important notes 105
Lock button 62
Locking/unlocking 37, 62, 103
Locking/unlocking,
Global setting 106
Locking/unlocking, Selective
setting 107
Loss of key 109
Messages in display 410
Remote control 103
Start / stop button 39
Starting the engine 52
Turning off the engine 60
Unlocking/opening trunk lid 108
Kickdown 176
Kilopascal 359
L
Labels 478
Certification 478
Emission control information 479
Lamp sensor see Light sensor
Lamps, exterior 444
Light sensor 411
Messages in display 411–415
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 29, 378
Battery (SmartKey) 102, 107
Brakes 29, 380
Center console 390–391
CHECK ENGINE 381
Coolant 382
Coolant temperature 29, 139
Distance warning 29
Engine diagnostics 381
Engine malfunction 29, 381
ESP® 384
Fog lamps 132
Front passenger front air bag off 70
Front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp 390
Fuel reserve 29, 385
High beam headlamp 29
Index
Instrument cluster 378–387, 388
Low beam headlamp 29
Parktronic system* warning
indicators (Canada only) 273
Roll bar 385
Seat belt telltale 29
SRS 29, 65, 387
Turn signals 29
Language, Setting 158
LATCH-type child seat anchors see
Children in the vehicle
License plate lamps
Messages in display 413
Replacing bulbs 444, 449
Light alloy wheels, cleaning 374
Light sensor
Messages in display 411
Lighter see Cigarette lighter
Lighting, Exterior and interior 129
Limp-home mode 184
Load limit 360
Loading
Ski bag* (Canada only) 278
Loading see Vehicle loading
Loading the vehicle 334
Locator lighting 132, 163
Lock buttons
Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 62, 107
Loss of keys 109
Loss of Service and
Warranty Information Booklet 477
Low beam headlamps
Indicator lamp 29
Messages in display 413
Replacing bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 444
Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 444, 446
Switching on 55
Lubricants 489
Luggage cover 264
Folding back 276
M
Maintenance 12, 364
Calling up service indicator 366
Clearing service indicator 365
Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) 364
Resetting service indicator 366
Service indicator 364
Service term exceeded 365
Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps
Manual shift program
Deactivating 184
Manual shift program CLK 63 AMG 182
MAXCOOL maximum cooling 207
Maximum load rating, Tires 359
Maximum loaded vehicle weight,
Tire inflation pressure 359
Maximum tire inflation pressure 359
Mechanical key 427
Memory function see Seats, Power
Menus see Control system menus
Microphone, Hands-free 33
Minispare wheel see Spare wheel
507
Index
Mirrors
Adjusting 47
Antiglare position 185
Auto-dimming 186
Exterior rear view mirrors 47
Interior rear view mirror 47
Mobile phone see Telephone*
MOE tires* see MOExtended system*
MOE* see MOExtended system*
MOExtended system* 463
MOExtended tires* 482
MON 321
Motor Octane Number see MON
MP3 230
Multicontour seat* see
Seats, Multicontour*
Multifunction display 141
Changing settings see
Control system menus and
Control system submenus
Selecting language 158
Symbol messages 403–420
Text messages 394–401
508
Multifunction display messages
ABS 394
Battery 403
Brake fluid 404
Brake pads 404
Check engine 405
Coolant 405–407
Engine 405
Engine coolant 405–407
ESP® 394
Fog lamps 412
Front passenger
front air bag 396–399
Fuel cap 408
Gear selector lever 400
Headlamps 411–415
Key, SmartKey 411
KEYLESS-GO* 410
Lamps 413
Lamps, exterior 411–415
License plate lamp 413
Light sensor 411
Low tire pressure 419
Parking brake 404
Parking lamps 412
Roll bars 417
392
Soft top 420
SRS 416
Steering gear oil 417
Tele Aid 418
Telephone* 418
Turn signals 412
Windshield washer fluid 420
Multifunction steering wheel 30, 142
Button operation 142
N
Navigation system* 153
See separate COMAND*
operating instructions
Net, Parcel 286
Neutral gear position,
Automatic transmission 172, 174
New vehicle break-in 308
Night security illumination 132
Normal occupant weight 359
Number, paintwork code 478
Number,
vehicle identification (VIN) 478, 479
Index
O
Occupant Classification System see OCS
Occupant distribution 359
Occupant safety 64
Active head restraints 81
Air bags 65
Children and air bags 83
Children in the vehicle 83
ETD 80
Fastening the seat belts 48
Front air bags 70
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp 76, 390
Front side impact air bags 70
Head-thorax air bags 71
Infant and child restraint systems 83
LATCH-type child seat anchors 87
OCS 72
Rear side impact air bags* 70
Rear side-impact air bags* 72
Roll bars 82
Seat belts 48, 77
Seat belts, safety guidelines 68
SRS 64
Window curtain air bags 70
OCS 72
Self-test 76
Odometer 29
Oil level see Engine oil, checking level
One-touch gearshifting
Gear selector lever 179
Steering wheel
gearshift control* 180
Operating safety 213
Operating the vehicle outside the
USA or Canada 13
Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 372
Outside temperature see Displays
Overdue maintenance service 365
Overhead control panel 33
P
Paintwork code 478
Paintwork, Cleaning 368
Panic alarm 89
Parcel net
Front passenger footwell 286
Parking 59, 312
Over combustible materials 59, 312
Parking assist* see Parktronic system*
(CLK 63 AMG (USA), Canada all vehicles)
Parking brake 53, 59
Message in display 404
Warning sounds 54
Parking lamps 129
Messages in display 412
Replacing bulbs 444, 447, 448
Parktronic system* (Canada only)
Malfunction 274
Range of the sensors 272
Switching on/off 274
Warning indicators 273
Warning sounds 273, 274
Parktronic system* (CLK 63 AMG (USA),
Canada all models) 271
Cleaning system sensors 372
Parts service 476
509
Index
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see
Front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp
Passenger compartment 317
Electrical outlet 291
Interior lighting 136
Interior rear view mirror 47
Main fuse box 472
Parcel net in
front passenger footwell 286
Storage bags, rear side
of the front seats 286
Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Pedals 309
Phone see Telephone
Plastic parts, cleaning 374
Poly-V-belt drive
Layout 480
Positions (Memory function)
see Seats, Power
Power assistance 310
Power seat see Seats, Power
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 256
Express opening/closing 257
Opening/closing 256
Stopping 258
510
Synchronizing 258
Power washer 368
Power windows 250
Cleaning 373
Convenience closing feature 254
Express opening/closing 251
Opening with soft top switch 255
Operating 250
Rear side windows,
Blocking operation 88
Summer opening feature 253
Synchronizing 252
Practical hints 378
Premium unleaded gasoline 492
Problems
While driving 58
With vehicle 17
Product information 9
Production options weight 359
Program mode see Automatic
transmission, Automatic shift program
Program mode selector switch
Automatic shift program 178
PSI 359
Push-start see Tow-start
R
RACETIMER (CLK 63 AMG only) 149
Radio
Operation 221
Search function 165
Selecting stations 151
Selecting stations (satellite*) 152
Radio transmitters 317
Range (distance to empty) 168
Reading lamp 33, 137
Rear bench seat, foldable 281
Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear seat ashtray see Ashtray
Rear seat head restraints see
Head restraints
Rear side windows
Blocking operation 88
Rear side-impact air bags* 72
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window defroster 189
Rear window sunshade*
(Canada only) 188
Recommended engine oils
and oil filter 491
Index
Recommended
tire inflation pressure 359
Recovery services,
Stolen vehicle (Tele Aid) 301
Refrigerant, Air conditioning 491
Refueling 320
Regular checks 322
Remote control
SmartKey 100, 103
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 103
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 300
Removing
Ski bag* (Canada only) 280
Replacing bulbs 443
Additional turn signals 444
Backup lamps 444, 448
Brake lamps 444
Corner-illuminating
front fog lamp* 444
Fog lamps 444, 448
Headlamp bulbs 446
Headlamps 444
High beam flasher (Bi-Xenon*) 444
High beam flasher (Halogen) 444
High beam headlamps
(Bi-Xenon*) 444
High beam headlamps
(Halogen) 444, 446
High mounted brake lamp 444
License plate lamps 444, 449
Low beam headlamps
(Bi-Xenon*) 444
Low beam headlamps
(Halogen) 444, 446
Parking lamps 444, 447, 448
Side marker lamps 444
Standing lamps 444, 447, 448
Tail lamps 444, 448
Turn signal lamps 444, 448
Turn signal lamps (Bi-Xenon*) 448
Turn signal lamps (Halogen) 447
Reporting safety defects 18
Research Octane Number see RON
Reset button,
In instrument cluster 29, 138, 156
Residual heat and ventilation* see REST*
REST* 211
Restraint system see
Children in the vehicle
Restraint system see SRS
Reverse gear position,
Automatic transmission 172, 174
Rims 359, 482
Roadside Assistance 12, 298
Roll bar 82
Messages in display 417
Operating manually 430
Warning lamp 385
RON 321
Roof rack 275
Rubber parts, cleaning 374
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 342
511
Index
S
Safety
Driving safety systems 90
Occupant 64
Reporting defects 18
Safety belts see Seat belts
Satellite radio* 225
Seat belts 77
Automatic comfort-fit feature
Children in the vehicle 83
Cleaning 375
ETD 80
Fastening 48
Force limiter 80
Proper use of 50, 78
Safety guidelines 68
Telltale 29
Seating capacity 335
Seats, Multicontour* 124
Backrest contour 124
Backrest side bolsters 124
Cushion depth 124
Seats, Power 41, 120
Active head restraints 81
Adjustment 42
Easy entry/exit feature 45
512
80
Heating* 125
Memory function 127
Ventilation* 126
Seats, Rear bench seat 281
Securing cargo 283
Selector lever see Gear selector lever
Self-test
OCS 76
Tele Aid 295
Service and Warranty Booklet
Loss of 477
Service and warranty information 10
Service life, Tires 332
Service see Maintenance
Service System see Maintenance
Maintenance System
Service, Parts 476
Settings
Control system menus 144
Control system submenus 143, 145
Date 161, 162
Factory, KEYLESS-GO* 106
Factory, SmartKey 102
Global, KEYLESS-GO* 106
Global, SmartKey 102
Individual vehicle 155
Memory function 127
Menus and submenus 144
Resetting all, Control system 155
Selective, KEYLESS-GO* 107
Selective, SmartKey 102
Time 160
Shelf below rear window, Cleaning 375
Shift program mode,
Automatic transmission 178
Shifting
Gear selector lever 51
Shifting,
Automatic transmission 54, 172
Side impact air bags, Front 70
Side impact air bags, Rear* 70
Side marker lamps
Cleaning lenses 372
Messages in display 413
Replacing bulbs 444
Side windows see Power windows
Sidewall 359
Index
Ski bag* (Canada only) 276
Loading 278
Luggage cover 276
Removing 280
Ski bag roller blind 276, 280
Unfolding (Cabriolet) 276
Unfolding (Coupe) 277
Unloading and folding 279
Ski bag* roller blind 276
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
see KEYLESS-GO*
Snow chains 363
Snow tires 362
Soft top 259
Cleaning 370
Emergency operations 432–439
Locking after raising/lowering 262
Luggage cover 264
Messages in display 420
Opening/closing 259
Opening/closing, SmartKey 263
Opening/closing,
Soft top switch 260, 261
Wind screen 265
Soft top switch 255, 260
Sound system* 213, 217
Spare parts service see Parts service
Spare wheel 425
Bolts 422, 426
Mounting 458
Sizes 486
Speedometer 29, 158
SRS 64, 78
Indicator lamp 29, 65, 387
Message in display 416
Standard display, Selecting display 159
Standing lamps 447, 448
Replacing bulbs 444
Standing water, Driving through 317
Starter switch 27, 38
Positions 38
Starting difficulties, Engine 53
Starting, Engine 51
Status line, Selecting display 159
Steering column 44, 45
Steering gear oil
Message in display 417
Steering wheel 44, 45
Buttons 30
Cleaning 375
Lock 53
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting*
Automatic transmission 180
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 301
Storage box 285
Storage compartments 285
Armrest, Front 287
Armrest, Rear 287
Cup holder 288
Glove box 285
Parcel net 286
Storage bags 286
Storage box 285
Storing
Tires 333
Sun visors 187
Sunroof* see Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Sunshade* (Canada only) 188
Supplemental Restraint System see SRS
Symbols used
in this operator’s manual 15
513
Index
T
Tachometer 29, 140
Overspeed range 140
Tail lamps
Cleaning lenses 372
Messages in display 414, 415
Replacing bulbs 444, 448
Tar stains 368
Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant 491
Brake fluid 491
Capacities fuels,
coolants, lubricants etc. 489, 490
Coolant 490, 494
Electrical system 487
Engine 481
Engine oil 491
Engine oil additives 491
Fuel capacity 490
Fuel requirements 492
Gasoline additives 493
Lubricants 489
Premium unleaded gasoline 492
Rims and tires 482
Tires, Mixed size 484
Tires, Same size 483
514
Tires, Spare wheel sizes 486
Vehicle dimensions 488
Weights 488
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning* system 490, 496
Tele Aid 33, 295
Call priority 300
Emergency calls 296
Hands-free microphone 33
Information 299
Initiating an
emergency call manually 297
Messages in display 418
Remote door unlock 300
Roadside Assistance 298
SOS button 297
Stolen Vehicle
Recovery services 301
System self-check 295
Tele Aid System 295
Telephone* 30, 169, 292
Answering/ending a call 170
Changing mobile phone cradle 294
Hands-free microphone 33
Inserting in cradle 293
Installing a different mobile phone
cradle 294
Messages in display 418
Operation 169, 236
Phone book 170
Redialing 171
Removing from cradle 294
TEL* menu 169
Temperature
Interior temperature 194, 204
Tie-down rings, Trunk 284
Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 462
Tilt/sliding sunroof* see
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Time 160
Time, Setting 160
TIN 360
Tire and Loading Information
Placard 335
Terminology 358
Tire inflation pressure 455
Checking tire pressure electronically,
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), (USA only) 344
Tire inflation pressure see
the placard on the fuel filler flap
Index
TIREFIT (CLK 63 AMG only) 422
TIREFIT*
Instructions for use 452
Tires 331, 482
Air pressure 358
Care and maintenance 332
Chains 363
Cleaning 333
Combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale, USA only 29
Direction of rotation, Spinning 334
Driving instructions 313
Important notes,
Tire inflation pressure 340
Inflation pressure 322, 339, 341
Inflation pressure,
Information placard 339
Inspection 332
Load rating 360
Low tire pressure telltale 388
MOExtended system* 463
MOExtended* 348, 482
Ply composition
and material used 360
Problems under-/overinflated 347
Retreads 331
Rims and tires 482
Rotation 361
Run Flat Indicator 342
Service life 332
Sizes 483
Snow 362
Spare wheel 425, 458, 486
Speed rating 315, 351, 360
Storing 333
Temperature 340, 357
Terminology 358
Tire Identification Number see TIN
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)*, (USA only) 344
TIREFIT (CLK 63 AMG only) 422
Total load limit 360
TPMS malfunction telltale 388
Traction 314, 360
Tread 360
Tread depth 333, 362
Treadwear indicators 360
Wear pattern 361
Winter 362
Tools 422
Top tether
Children in the vehicle 86
Tether attachment points 86
Total load limit 360
Towing eye bolt 422, 470, 471
Towing the vehicle 469
Tow-start 467, 469
TPMS (USA only) 344
Traction 94, 314, 360
Transmission see Automatic transmission
Traveling abroad 317
Tread 360
Tread depth 333, 362
Treadwear indicators 360
Trip computer 167
Trip odometer 139
Trunk
Closing from inside 112
Fuse box 474
Lamp 137
Lid 110
Luggage cover 264
Opening 110
Opening, from inside 111
Tie-down rings 284
515
Index
Trunk lid 112
Trunk lid emergency release 117
Unlocking in an emergency 428
Unlocking/opening,
KEYLESS-GO* 108
Unlocking/opening, SmartKey 103
Valet locking 118
Turn signal lamps
Cleaning lenses 372
Messages in display 412
Replacing bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 448
Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 447
Replacing bulbs (rear) 448
Turn signals 56
Additional in mirrors 444
Bulbs 444
Bulbs (Bi-Xenon)) 448
Cleaning lenses 372
Indicator lamps 29
Turning off engine 60
516
U
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards 360
Units, Settings
Speedometer 158
Unleaded gasoline, Premium
Upholstery, Cleaning 376
Useful features 285
492
V
Vehicle
Battery 329, 464
Break-in period 308
Care 367
Control system, Settings menu 155
Dimensions 488
Jump starting 467
Locking/Unlocking,
KEYLESS-GO* 37, 62, 103
Locking/Unlocking,
SmartKey 36, 62, 100
Lowering 462
Modifications and alterations,
Operating safety 16
Towing 469
Unlocking/locking
in an emergency 427, 428
Washing 369
Weights 488
Vehicle identification number see VIN
Vehicle jack 422, 423, 459
Vehicle lighting 322
Vehicle loading
Cargo tie-down rings 284
Instructions 283, 334
Load limit 334
Roof rack* 275
Split rear bench seat 281
Terminology 358
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 360
Vehicle recovery services,
Stolen (Tele Aid) 301
Vehicle status message memory 154
Vehicle status messages 392
Vehicle system settings,
Control system 141
Vehicle tool kit 422
Vehicle washing 367
VIN 478
Index
W
Warning indicators
Parktronic system*
(Canada only) 273
Warning sounds
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt 79
Parking brake 54
Parktronic system*
(Canada only) 273, 274
Seat belt telltale 386
Warranty coverage 10, 477
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washer reservoir level 490
Washing the vehicle 367
Wear pattern, Tires 361
Weights, Vehicle 488
Wheel
Bolts 426
Change 458
Collapsible wheel chock 422
Removing 460
Spare 458
Tightening torque 462
TIREFIT (CLK 63 AMG only) 422
Wrench 422
Wheels, Sizes 483
Wheels, Tires and 331
Wind screen 265
Window curtain air bags 70
Windows see Power windows
Windshield
Cleaning 57, 373
Defogging 196, 206
Windshield washer fluid 330, 496
Message in display 420
Mixing ratio 496
Refilling 330
Reservoir level 490
Wiping 57
Windshield washer system 490, 496
Windshield wipers 56
Cleaning wiper blades 373
Replacing wiper blades 450
Winter driving 362
Block heater (Canada only) 363
Snow chains 363
Tires 362
Winter driving instructions 316
Winter tires 362
Wood trims, cleaning 376
517
518
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
G
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time May 08, 2007
GSP/TID
Printed in U. S. A.